[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2020170820A1 - Protection sheet and method for manufacturing glass unit - Google Patents

Protection sheet and method for manufacturing glass unit Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020170820A1
WO2020170820A1 PCT/JP2020/004337 JP2020004337W WO2020170820A1 WO 2020170820 A1 WO2020170820 A1 WO 2020170820A1 JP 2020004337 W JP2020004337 W JP 2020004337W WO 2020170820 A1 WO2020170820 A1 WO 2020170820A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
protective sheet
low
less
glass plate
layer
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2020/004337
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
和田 博
幸介 米▲崎▼
友紀 椿
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Nitto Denko Corp
Original Assignee
Nitto Denko Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nitto Denko Corp filed Critical Nitto Denko Corp
Publication of WO2020170820A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020170820A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B17/00Layered products essentially comprising sheet glass, or glass, slag, or like fibres
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65DCONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D85/00Containers, packaging elements or packages, specially adapted for particular articles or materials
    • B65D85/30Containers, packaging elements or packages, specially adapted for particular articles or materials for articles particularly sensitive to damage by shock or pressure
    • B65D85/48Containers, packaging elements or packages, specially adapted for particular articles or materials for articles particularly sensitive to damage by shock or pressure for glass sheets
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C03GLASS; MINERAL OR SLAG WOOL
    • C03CCHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF GLASSES, GLAZES OR VITREOUS ENAMELS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF GLASS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF FIBRES OR FILAMENTS MADE FROM GLASS, MINERALS OR SLAGS; JOINING GLASS TO GLASS OR OTHER MATERIALS
    • C03C17/00Surface treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, by coating
    • C03C17/34Surface treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, by coating with at least two coatings having different compositions
    • C03C17/36Surface treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, by coating with at least two coatings having different compositions at least one coating being a metal
    • C03C17/38Surface treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, by coating with at least two coatings having different compositions at least one coating being a metal at least one coating being a coating of an organic material
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J201/00Adhesives based on unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a protective sheet and a method for manufacturing a glass unit.
  • a technique is known in which a protective sheet is adhered to the surface of various articles for the purpose of preventing damage (scratches, stains, corrosion, etc.) on the surfaces when processing or transporting them.
  • the objects of protection are wide-ranging, and for example, a protective sheet is also used for a glass plate with a Low-E (Low-Emissivity) layer that has been widely spread in recent years (Low-E glass plate).
  • the Low-E glass plate is preferably used as a building material such as a window glass because of the effect of improving the cooling and heating efficiency of the indoor space by the Low-E layer.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive (also referred to as a pressure-sensitive adhesive. The same applies hereinafter) can be preferably used as a peelable adhesive means.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive is in the state of a soft solid (viscoelastic body) in a temperature range near room temperature and has a property of easily adhering to an adherend by pressure.
  • a surface protective sheet using an adhesive typically has an adhesive layer on one side of a sheet-like base material made of a resin or the like, and the adhesive layer is adhered to an adherend (object to be protected). By doing so, the protection purpose can be achieved.
  • Patent Documents 3 to 6 are mentioned as prior art documents disclosing an adhesive sheet that can be used as a surface protection sheet.
  • Patent Document 3 discloses a surface protection sheet that protects the surface of a metal plate during drawing
  • Patent Document 4 discloses a surface protection sheet of an optical film such as a polarizing plate
  • Patent Document 5 relates to a surface protective sheet of a hydrophilic coated plate having a self-cleaning property
  • Patent Document 6 addresses the ease of peeling and the reduction of contamination of the surface protection sheet for metal plates on which a coating film is formed.
  • the Low-E glass plate is transported, processed, washed, etc. while being protected by a protective sheet, and during the protection period, there is no foreign matter such as water entering the surface of the object to be protected, Alternatively it can be inspected for defects or damage. Therefore, it is desirable that the Low-E glass sheet protective sheet has transparency so that the object to be protected can be visually recognized through the protective sheet. Further, the protection sheet is removed from the object to be protected at an appropriate timing after the purpose of protection is achieved.
  • the object to be protected is a transparent material such as a glass plate, it is difficult to distinguish between the two if the protective sheet is also transparent, and forgetting to peel off the protective sheet may occur.
  • glass plates for building materials such as window glass represented by Low-E glass plates are becoming larger in area from the viewpoint of efficiency of production, transportation, etc., and have a width of 1.5 m or more (for example, 2 m or more, further 3 m or more). Some have a size of 0.3 m or more). With such a large-area glass plate, there is a situation in which it is difficult to instantaneously determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet on the surface of the glass plate during the removal work of the protective sheet, because the end of the protective sheet cannot be completely seen.
  • the present invention was created in view of the above circumstances, it is possible to inspect a Low-E glass plate through a protective sheet, and a Low-E glass plate that is easy to distinguish on a Low-E glass plate.
  • the purpose is to provide a protective sheet for use.
  • Another related object is to provide a method for manufacturing a glass unit using the protective sheet.
  • a protection sheet for Low-E glass plate has a width of 1.5 meters (hereinafter abbreviated as "m") or more. Further, it has a region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more. Furthermore, at least a part of the sheet surface has a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more. According to the above configuration, it is possible to protect a large-area Low-E glass plate with one sheet or a small number of sheets.
  • the protective sheet has a region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more, it is possible to inspect the Low-E glass plate through the protective sheet while being attached to the Low-E glass plate. .. For example, when foreign matter such as water is present on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, by reattaching or replacing the protective sheet, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects caused by the foreign matter.
  • the protective sheet has a region satisfying at least one of (a) minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) haze value of 10 or more on at least a part of the sheet surface.
  • the haze value of the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more is 50 or less.
  • a protective sheet having a region having a haze value of not more than a predetermined value is excellent in transparency and tends to be limited in reflection, and thus is excellent in visibility of an adherend through the protective sheet.
  • the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 30% or more in the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more.
  • the entire sheet surface is a region that satisfies at least one of (a) and (b) above. According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to identify the protective sheet.
  • the area satisfying at least one of (a) and (b) above is a colored area.
  • the protective sheet according to a preferred aspect is almost uniformly colored over the entire sheet surface. According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to identify the protective sheet. For example, even if a part (for example, a small piece) of the protective sheet remains on the adherend due to tearing or the like, it is easy to find and remove.
  • the protective sheet according to a preferred embodiment is colored blue or green.
  • the protective sheet according to a preferred aspect includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer supported by the base material layer. Further, at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is colored. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably realize the effect of the technique disclosed herein.
  • the base material layer is made of a resin film containing a colorant.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least selected from the group consisting of acrylic polymers, urethane polymers, polyester polymers, polyether polymers, rubber polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers and fluorine polymers. It contains one polymer in a proportion of 50% by weight or more. In the configuration including the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the effect of the technique disclosed herein is preferably realized.
  • a Low-E glass plate protective sheet according to another aspect.
  • This protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more. Further, at least a part of the sheet surface has a region satisfying at least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more. Since the protective sheet has a region satisfying at least one of the above (a) and (b) on at least a part of the sheet surface, the effect of being easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate can be obtained.
  • the transparency for inspecting the Low-E glass plate is not essential depending on the mode of use, and in such a mode, the above configuration is meaningful.
  • a method for manufacturing a glass unit comprises: preparing a Low-E glass plate comprising a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate; A step of attaching any of the protective sheets disclosed in 1.; at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling for the Low-E glass sheet to which the protective sheet is attached. A step of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate; and a step of assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate.
  • the Low-E glass plate has a risk of damage, abrasion, deterioration, corrosion, etc.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein it is possible to protect a large-area Low-E glass plate with one sheet or a small number of sheets. Also, as described above, the protective sheet can be inspected through the protective sheet while being attached to the Low-E glass plate. Further, the protective sheet is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate as described above, and it is easy to determine the presence/absence of the protective sheet for a large-area Low-E glass plate, and the workability of removing the protective sheet is excellent. According to the above method, in the production of the glass unit, it is possible to produce the glass unit with high productivity while achieving protection of the Low-E glass plate.
  • the method for manufacturing a glass unit disclosed herein includes a step (A) of preparing a Low-E glass plate including a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate; A step (B) of attaching a protective sheet to the surface of the Low-E layer of the above; and at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling for the Low-E glass plate to which the protective sheet is attached. And an optional step (C) for carrying out one of the steps; a step (D) for removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate; and a step (E) for assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate. ..
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein also referred to as a surface protective sheet
  • a Low-E glass plate 100 including a glass substrate 110 and a Low-E layer 120 laminated on the glass substrate 110 is prepared ( S10).
  • the Low-E glass plate 100 is prepared by forming a Low-E layer 120 on one surface of a glass substrate 110.
  • the Low-E layer includes a metal layer, an oxide layer such as a metal oxide layer, a layer such as a nitride layer such as a silicon nitride layer, and usually has a multilayer structure, and a known or common method such as sputtering. Is formed by.
  • each layer of the Low-E layer examples include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Si x N y , ZnO x , Ag, NiCrO x , and SnO 2 .
  • An Ag layer is preferably used as the infrared reflective layer. In the Low-E layer according to one embodiment, the Ag layer is typically sandwiched between ZnO x layers.
  • the material of the outermost surface of the Low-E layer should be an oxide such as TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , ZnO x , NiCrO x , SnO 2 or a nitride such as Si x N y. However, it is usually not a metal such as Ag.
  • the Low-E layer may have a multilayer structure of 5 layers or more, for example, 10 layers or more, and further 15 layers or more, depending on the purpose and required characteristics.
  • the thickness of each layer is not particularly limited and is usually 0 to 1000 ⁇ , and about 10 to 700 ⁇ is suitable, for example, about 30 to 300 ⁇ .
  • the thickness (total thickness) of the Low-E layer may be about 10 nm to 1000 nm (eg, about 50 to 500 nm).
  • the size of the glass substrate is not particularly limited, and the length of one side (width) is, for example, about 2 m or more, and more than 2.6 m recently, and further, about 3 m or more (for example, about 3.3 m or more). The thing of the area is used.
  • the protective sheet 200 is attached to the surface of the Low-E layer 120 formed on the glass substrate 110 (S20).
  • the protective sheet 200 is typically releasably attached to the surface.
  • "removably attached” means attachment intended or intended to be removed by peeling, and in many cases, the surface of the adherend after peeling the protective sheet (adhesive sheet) is the same as before attachment. Basically, it refers to pasting that can maintain the same state.
  • the size of the protective sheet 200 is preferably about the same as the surface of the Low-E layer 120.
  • the surface to be protected may be covered by partially overlapping two or more protective sheets. By covering the surface of the Low-E layer 120 with the protective sheet 200, corrosion or the like of the Low-E layer 120 can be prevented or suppressed.
  • At least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling is performed on the Low-E glass sheet 100 to which the protective sheet 200 is attached. It can be implemented arbitrarily (S30).
  • the processing may be cutting, edge seam, or the like of the Low-E glass plate 100 to which the protective sheet 200 is attached.
  • the cutting means and the size after cutting are appropriately set according to the purpose and are not particularly limited.
  • the protective sheet 200 may remain attached to the surface of the Low-E layer 120 even after cutting the Low-E glass plate 100.
  • the cut Low-E glass plate 100 is typically washed with water or the like. In the washing step, in addition to water, a detergent (including a surfactant) can be optionally used.
  • the Low-E layer 120 is formed by the protective sheet 200 being present thereon. Protected from damage, wear, deterioration and corrosion.
  • the protective sheet 200 is removed from the Low-E glass plate 100 ((D) S40 in FIG. 1).
  • the protective sheet 200 is removed from the Low-E glass plate 100, which is the adherend, after achieving the protective purpose. Since the protective sheet 200 disclosed herein is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate 100 as described later, it is easy to determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet 200 with respect to the Low-E glass plate 100, and the protective sheet 200 It has excellent workability in removing.
  • the Low-E glass plate 100 from which the protective sheet 200 has been removed is usually heat-treated in a heating furnace and tempered. Then, as shown in FIG. 1E, a glass unit 300 is manufactured using the Low-E glass plate 100 (step (E) S50).
  • the glass unit 300 is typically a heat-shielding or heat-insulating glass unit.
  • a pair of glass plates, at least one of which is the Low-E glass plate 100, is prepared, and the Low-E layer of the Low-E glass plate 100 is prepared. It can be made by making a pair of glass with the surface 120 facing inward.
  • Reference numerals 320 and 340 in the figure respectively represent other glass plates and spacers that constitute the glass unit 300.
  • the spacer 340 is disposed between the Low-E glass plate 100 and the other glass plate 320 to create a space between the glass plates 100 and 320.
  • a known or commonly used powder or liquid coating may be used in combination with the protective sheet.
  • the glass unit manufacturing method disclosed herein may include an inspection step of the Low-E glass plate 100 after the step (B) and before the step (D).
  • the protective sheet 200 may be transparent. Therefore, it is possible to inspect the Low-E glass plate 100 through the protective sheet 200 while being attached to the Low-E glass plate 100.
  • This inspection step can be typically performed at an appropriate timing while step (C) is being performed.
  • the content of the inspection is not particularly limited, and may be the presence or absence of foreign matter such as water between the surface of the Low-E glass plate 100 and the protective sheet 200, and the presence or absence of defects or damage on the surface of the Low-E glass plate 100. ..
  • the inspection is preferably visual observation by an inspector, or may be an inspection using various inspection devices or inspection devices.
  • the surface protection method disclosed herein is a surface protection method using a protection sheet (also referred to as a surface protection sheet) disclosed herein, and typically, a part or all of the surface of a Low-E glass plate. Regarding how to protect.
  • the protection method disclosed herein is characterized by including a step (sticking step) of sticking a protective sheet on the surface of the Low-E glass plate.
  • the surface protection method disclosed herein may further include a step (removal step) of removing the protection sheet from the Low-E glass plate. Further, between the attaching step and the removing step, the article to which the protective sheet is attached may optionally include at least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling.
  • Suitable examples of the surface protection method disclosed herein are as described in the above-mentioned method for manufacturing a glass unit, and the attaching step and the removing step in this method are performed in steps (B) and (D) in the above-mentioned manufacturing method. Corresponds to each. Other matters in the surface protection method are not particularly limited, but since they can be understood by those skilled in the art in consideration of the above description of the method for manufacturing the glass unit, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the term "adhesive” refers to a material that is in the state of a soft solid (viscoelastic body) in a temperature range near room temperature and has a property of easily adhering to an adherend by pressure. ..
  • the adhesive used herein generally has a complex tensile modulus E * (1 Hz) as defined in “C. A. Dahlquist, “Adhesion: Fundamentals and Practice”, McLaren & Sons, (1966) P. 143”. It may be a material having a property satisfying ⁇ 10 7 dyne/cm 2 (typically, a material having the above property at 25° C.).
  • the concept of the protective sheet in the present specification may include what is called an adhesive sheet, an adhesive tape, an adhesive label, an adhesive film and the like.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein may be in a roll shape or a sheet shape. Alternatively, it may be a sheet having a form further processed into various shapes.
  • FIG. 2 shows a cross-sectional structure of the protective sheet according to the one example.
  • This protective sheet 10 has a structure in which a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 is provided on one surface 1A of a sheet-shaped base material layer 1, and the surface 2A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 is attached to an adherend for use. ..
  • the protective sheet 10 is used as a surface protective sheet, the surface 2A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 is attached to the object to be protected.
  • the back surface 1B of the base material layer 1 (the surface opposite to the one surface 1A) is also the back surface of the protective sheet 10 and constitutes the outer surface of the protective sheet 10.
  • the protective sheet 10 before use (that is, before being adhered to an adherend) has a surface (adhesive surface, that is, a surface to be adhered to an adherend) 2A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2, and a release surface at least on the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer side. It may be in a form protected by a release liner (not shown). Alternatively, the other surface (back surface) 1B of the base material layer 1 is a release surface, and when the protective sheet 10 is wound in a roll, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 comes into contact with the back surface and its surface (adhesion) The surface 2A may be the protective sheet 10 in a protected form.
  • a conventional release paper or the like can be used and is not particularly limited.
  • a release liner having a release treatment layer on the surface of a liner substrate such as a plastic film or paper, or a release liner made of a low adhesion material such as a fluoropolymer (polytetrafluoroethylene) or a polyolefin resin.
  • the release treatment layer may be formed by surface-treating the liner substrate with various release treatment agents such as silicone-based, long-chain alkyl-based, fluorine-based, and molybdenum sulfide.
  • the width of the protective sheet disclosed here may be approximately 1.5 m or more. Such a wide protective sheet can achieve a protective function for a large area Low-E glass plate with one sheet or a small number of sheets. Further, the protective sheet disclosed herein is easily distinguishable from the Low-E glass plate even if it is attached to the Low-E glass plate in a large area as described later.
  • a protective sheet having a width of, for example, about 2 m or more, and further, about 2.6 m or more can be preferably used.
  • the width of the protective sheet can be greater than 2.6 m (eg, 3 m or more, and even about 3.3 m or more).
  • the upper limit of the width of the protective sheet is not particularly limited, and from the viewpoint of productivity, handleability, etc., it is suitable to be about 5 m or less, and for example, about 4 m or less.
  • the length of the long protective sheet (distance in the length direction) is the same as or larger than the width.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein may be a sheet specified by having long sides and short sides in its plane (sheet surface), for example.
  • the long side is longer than the short side, and the short side is defined as the side shorter than the long side.
  • the short side may be a side substantially orthogonal to the long side.
  • the length direction of the protective sheet is a direction along the long side, and the width direction is a direction orthogonal to the length direction. Therefore, in this specification, "width" is defined as the length in the direction orthogonal to the length direction.
  • the protective sheet called a long shape, a belt shape, and a rectangular shape is a typical example of the protective sheet disclosed herein.
  • the long side is a line segment that extends substantially linearly, while the short side is not limited to a straight line and may be a curved line, a polygonal line, or the like.
  • the length (distance in the length direction) of the long protective sheet is equal to or more than the width.
  • the thickness of the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and from the viewpoint of handleability, lightness, etc., it is suitable to be about 1000 ⁇ m or less (typically about 300 ⁇ m or less, for example, about 150 ⁇ m or less). .. In one aspect, the thickness of the protective sheet may preferably be about 120 ⁇ m or less, more preferably about 100 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably about 75 ⁇ m or less, for example less than 60 ⁇ m. Also, the thickness of the protective sheet may typically be above 20 ⁇ m, preferably above 30 ⁇ m, more preferably above 40 ⁇ m, for example above 45 ⁇ m. In this specification, the thickness of the protective sheet includes the thicknesses of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the base material layer, but does not include the thickness of the release liner.
  • the thickness of the base material layer constituting the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited.
  • the thickness of the base material layer may be, for example, about 800 ⁇ m or less (typically about 250 ⁇ m or less).
  • the thickness of the substrate layer (typically a non-foamed resin film) can be preferably about 150 ⁇ m or less, more preferably about 100 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably less than 65 ⁇ m, for example less than 55 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the base material layer is typically about 10 ⁇ m or more, preferably about 25 ⁇ m or more, more preferably more than 30 ⁇ m, further preferably more than 40 ⁇ m, for example, It can be above 45 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer forming the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of preventing adhesive residue on the adherend, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is appropriately about 50 ⁇ m or less and about 30 ⁇ m or less, preferably about 15 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably about 8 ⁇ m or less (for example, less than 6 ⁇ m). preferable. In another aspect, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is appropriately about 5 ⁇ m or less, may be about 4 ⁇ m or less, and may be, for example, 3 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of peelability and the like.
  • the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is appropriately about 0.5 ⁇ m or more, preferably about 1 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably more than 2 ⁇ m.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have a thickness of more than 3 ⁇ m, for example, more than 4 ⁇ m.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein has a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more (hereinafter, for convenience. It is characterized by having a "visual recognition area") on at least a part of the sheet surface.
  • the protective sheet having the visible area is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, and the presence or absence thereof can be easily determined.
  • the layout, shape, size, and ratio of the visible area to the entire sheet surface are not particularly limited.
  • the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet may be the visible area, or a part of the sheet surface may be the visible area.
  • a protective sheet having a pattern of a visible area and a transparent area (described later) on the sheet surface is an example of a protective sheet having a visible area.
  • the area ratio of the visible region on the sheet surface of the protective sheet is about 1% or more (for example, about 5% or more), about 10% or more, preferably about 30% or more, and more preferably about 10% or more. It is 50% or more, more preferably about 70% or more, particularly preferably about 90% or more (typically 100%).
  • the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible area.
  • the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm is not particularly limited, and it is suitable that it is approximately 95% or less.
  • the minimum transmittance of the visible region in the visible region may be about 90% or less.
  • the protective sheet having such a visible region is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, and the presence or absence thereof can be easily discriminated.
  • the minimum transmittance of the visible region in the visible region is preferably about 80% or less, for example, about 70% or less, about 60% or less, or about 50% or less. Good.
  • the minimum transmittance in the visible light region of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.
  • the haze value in the above visible area is not limited to a specific range. It is appropriate that the haze value in the visible region is about 1 or more (for example, about 5 or more). In one aspect, the haze value in the visible region may be about 10 or more (eg, about 11 or more).
  • the protective sheet having a haze value of a predetermined value or more is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, and the presence or absence thereof can be easily discriminated. In another aspect, the haze value may be about 15 or more (eg, about 20 or more), and may be more than 50 (eg, about 80 or more, and even about 90 or more). In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible region, the haze value of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.
  • the “haze value” refers to the ratio of diffuse transmitted light to the total transmitted light when the measurement target is irradiated with visible light. Also called cloudiness value.
  • the haze value can be adjusted, for example, by selecting the composition and thickness of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • the total light transmittance in the visible region of the protective sheet is not limited to a specific range, but from the viewpoint of the discriminability on the Low-E glass plate, it is appropriate that it is approximately 95% or less, and preferably Is about 90% or less, for example, about 80% or less, or about 70% or less. In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible region, the total light transmittance of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.
  • the visible area is a colored area. Since the colored area is excellent in visibility, providing the colored area on the surface of the sheet makes it easier to obtain superior protection sheet discrimination.
  • the coloring aspect is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aspect in which at least a part of the sheet surface of the protective sheet is a colored region. Specifically, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet may be the colored area, or a part of the sheet surface may be the colored area.
  • a protective sheet having a pattern of colored portions and non-colored portions on the sheet surface is an example of a protective sheet having colored regions.
  • At least a part (typically the whole) of the protective sheet according to one aspect is colored. It is preferable that the colored portion (which is also a colored region) is uniformly colored from the viewpoint of discriminating property.
  • the protective sheet is colored almost uniformly over the entire sheet surface. Thereby, for example, even if a part (for example, a small piece) of the protective sheet remains on the Low-E glass plate due to tearing or the like, it is easy to determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet.
  • the term “uniform” as used herein means the uniformity at the visual level. The fact that the entire sheet surface has the same color and the same darkness is a typical example of a configuration in which the entire sheet surface is colored almost uniformly.
  • a linear or curved stripe pattern can be mentioned.
  • a wavy stripe pattern may be adopted.
  • the wavy shape include a curved shape such as a sine wave, a pseudo sine wave, and an arc wave, and a non-curved shape such as a zigzag shape and a triangular wave.
  • the wavy pattern may be formed by overlapping two or more kinds of waves of the same shape or different shapes with their phases shifted, or by inverting the shape or pattern.
  • Other examples of the above pattern include, for example, arc-shaped, circular, elliptical, and linear patterns.
  • a grid pattern can be cited.
  • the lattice pattern typically refers to a pattern including two stripe pattern portions that intersect each other.
  • the lattice pattern includes various lattice shapes such as an orthorhombic lattice, a square lattice, a triangular lattice, and a hexagonal lattice.
  • a dot-shaped or polka-dot-shaped pattern, or a pattern in which a plurality of colored portions having a specific shape such as a quadrangle or a triangle are arranged at intervals is cited.
  • the visible area (typically the colored area) on the sheet surface of the protective sheet may be a mark.
  • the mark may typically be a combination of a color and a character (that is, a character, a figure or a symbol, or a combination thereof).
  • Characters and symbols include those in which the above-mentioned characters and the like are designed in various degrees.
  • the product name, manufacturer name, specifications Low-E and low VOC (volatile organic compounds), energy saving, environmental load, reduction of greenhouse gas emissions, and other expressions that mean them ), usage method, recycling related information, manufacturing date, product number (lot number), expiration date, logo mark, image character, mascot character, material of product components (adhesive, base material, etc.)
  • logo mark image character, mascot character, material of product components (adhesive, base material, etc.)
  • the kind, the kind of the contained component, the content thereof and the like can be mentioned. These marks may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Characters and the like representing these pieces of information can be a mark that more effectively conveys the information to the viewer by being combined with coloring.
  • the color of the colored area of the protective sheet is not particularly limited, and for example, one or more of black, gray, white, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, purple, gold, silver, pearl, etc. Can be From the viewpoint of the adherend visibility through the protective sheet, gray, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, and purple are preferable.
  • the protective sheet is colored blue and/or green. The colors of blue and green are relatively unnoticeable compared to red and yellow, and they have sufficient visibility on the Low-E glass plate and are easy to harmonize with the surrounding environment.
  • blue means a color having a visible spectrum wavelength range of 360 nm or more and less than 480 nm
  • green means a color having a visible spectrum wavelength range of 480 nm or more and less than 560 nm.
  • An appropriate coloring agent is typically used for coloring the protective sheet.
  • the colorant conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used.
  • the pigment include zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, zinc sulfide, talc, kaolin, calcium carbonate, titanium oxide, silica, lithium fluoride, calcium fluoride, barium sulfate, alumina, zirconia, iron oxides, iron hydroxides.
  • Inorganic pigments such as chromium oxide type, chromium hydroxide type, spinel type firing type, chromic acid type, chrome vermilion type, navy blue type, cobalt blue type, aluminum powder type, bronze powder type, silver powder type, calcium phosphate, etc., Phthalocyanine, azo, condensed azo, azo lake, anthraquinone, perylene/perinone, flavone, indigo, thioindigo, isoindolinone, azomethine, dioxazine, quinacridone, aniline black, triphenylmethane And organic pigments such as carbon black.
  • organic pigments such as carbon black.
  • the dye examples include azo dyes, anthraquinone, quinophthalone, styryl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, oxazine, triazine, xanthan, methane, azomethine, acridine, and diazine.
  • the colorants may be used alone or in appropriate combination of two or more.
  • the above coloring is realized by including an appropriate coloring agent in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the base material layer, or a coloring layer different from them.
  • at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer forming the protective sheet is colored.
  • both the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are colored, the base material layer is colored and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not colored, and the base material layer is not colored.
  • the layer may be colored.
  • the embodiment in which the base material layer is colored is preferable because it does not affect the adhesive property.
  • a non-colored base material layer and an adhesive layer may be a colorless transparent base material layer and an adhesive layer, respectively.
  • the colorless transparent base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer have a total light transmittance of more than 85% (eg, more than 90%), a minimum transmittance in the visible light region of more than 85% (eg, more than 90%), and
  • the haze value can be 20 or less (eg, 10 or less).
  • the protective sheet may be colored by providing a colored layer on at least one surface of the base material layer.
  • a coloring layer can be typically formed by applying a coloring layer-forming composition containing a coloring agent and a binder to a supporting substrate.
  • a coloring layer-forming composition containing a coloring agent and a binder
  • the colorant a conventionally known pigment or dye can be used, and one kind or two or more kinds of the above-mentioned colorants can be used.
  • the binder materials known in the field of paints or printing can be used without particular limitation. For example, polyurethane, phenol resin, epoxy resin, urea melamine resin, polymethylmethacrylate, etc. are exemplified.
  • the configurations of the colored layers may be the same or different.
  • the composition for forming a colored layer may be, for example, a solvent type, an ultraviolet curing type, a thermosetting type, or the like.
  • the formation of the colored layer can be carried out by using the means conventionally used for forming the colored layer without particular limitation.
  • a method of forming a colored layer (printing layer) by printing such as gravure printing, flexographic printing and offset printing can be preferably adopted.
  • the coloring layer may have a single-layer structure consisting of one layer or a multi-layer structure including two layers, three layers or more sub-coloring layers.
  • the total thickness of the colored layer is appropriately about 1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, preferably about 1 ⁇ m to 7 ⁇ m, and for example, about 1 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of each sub-colored layer is preferably about 1 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein typically has a transparent region (a region having transparency). With this, the Low-E glass plate can be inspected through the protective sheet while being attached to the Low-E glass plate.
  • the term "transparency” as used herein means a degree of transparency that allows the state of the opposite side to be visually recognized through the protective sheet, and is a concept that includes translucency and colored transparency.
  • the transparency of the protective sheet is the permeability in the direction orthogonal to the sheet surface (in other words, the thickness direction of the protective sheet).
  • the transparency can be characterized by, for example, total light transmittance. Specifically, in the present specification, “having transparency” means that the total light transmittance is 3% or more. Therefore, in the present specification, a protective sheet having a total light transmittance of less than 3%, a base material layer (for example, a resin film), or an adhesive layer is classified as having no transparency.
  • the arrangement, shape, size, and ratio of the transparent area to the entire sheet surface are not particularly limited.
  • the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet may be the transparent area, or a part of the sheet surface may be the transparent area.
  • a protective sheet having a pattern of visible areas and transparent areas on the sheet surface is an example of a protective sheet having transparent areas.
  • the transparent region and the above-mentioned visible region may be the same region.
  • the area ratio of the transparent region on the sheet surface of the protective sheet is about 1% or more (for example, about 5% or more), about 10% or more is appropriate, preferably about 30% or more, more preferably It is about 50% or more, more preferably about 70% or more, particularly preferably about 90% or more (typically 100%).
  • the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the transparent area.
  • the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent area and a visible area.
  • the total light transmittance in the transparent region is about 3% or more as described above, and may be, for example, about 5% or more (typically about 10% or more). From the viewpoint of the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet, it is appropriate that the total light transmittance in the transparent region is about 20% or more (eg, about 30% or more), preferably about 40% or more, and more preferably about 40% or more. Is about 50% or more, more preferably about 60% or more, particularly preferably about 70% or more, and may be about 80% or more (for example, about 90% or more). In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent region, the total light transmittance of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.
  • the minimum transmittance of the visible region in the transparent region is not particularly limited, and is usually about 2% or more, for example, about 5% or more, and about 10% or more (for example, about 20% or more). Appropriate.
  • the minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm corresponding to the visible light region is about a predetermined value or more, the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet is improved.
  • the minimum transmittance in the visible light region is about 30% or more, more preferably about 40% or more, even more preferably about 50% or more (for example, about 60% or more).
  • the minimum transmittance in the visible light region of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.
  • the haze value in the transparent area is not limited to a specific range. Usually, the haze value of the transparent region is about 99 or less (for example, 90 or less). From the viewpoint of suppressing transparency and diffusion and reflection that affect visibility, the haze value is suitably about 50 or less, preferably about 30 or less, more preferably about 20 or less, and It may be 10 or less (for example, about 5 or less). In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent region, the haze value of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.
  • the total light transmittance of the protective sheet and each region thereof, the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm, and the haze value are in accordance with JIS K7136:2000, and a commercially available transmittance meter (for example, a product name “HAZEMETER HM-150”). Manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory Co., Ltd.).
  • the total light transmittance, the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm, and the haze value of the base material layer (supporting base material) described later are also measured by the same method. The same method is used in the examples described below.
  • the surface layer portion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has specific characteristics.
  • the properties of the surface layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be accurately characterized as mechanical properties by measurement by the nanoindentation method.
  • the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to one aspect may be 0.3 MPa or more.
  • the adhesive force is limited to a predetermined value or less and the amount of increase in the adhesive force with time is also limited, and the adhesive force with time to a level that does not impair the removal workability as a whole. Is thought to be suppressed.
  • the surface hardness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.4 MPa or more (for example, 0.6 MPa or more, further 0.7 MPa or more). ), more preferably 0.8 MPa or more (for example, 1.2 MPa or more, further 2 MPa or more).
  • the upper limit of the surface hardness is appropriately 5 MPa or less from the viewpoint of adhesiveness, and can be, for example, 3 MPa or less, and further 2.7 MPa or less.
  • the surface hardness is preferably less than 2 MPa, more preferably less than 1.2 MPa, further preferably less than 0.8 MPa, particularly preferably 0 MPa. It is less than 4 MPa.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the above aspect can be classified into two aspects from the duality of suppression of adhesive strength over time and adhesiveness to an adherend.
  • the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to one embodiment is 0.3 MPa or more and less than 0.7 MPa.
  • the lower limit of the surface hardness is preferably 0.32 MPa or more, more preferably 0.34 MPa or more, further preferably 0.35 MPa or more, and the upper limit thereof is preferably less than 0.55 MPa, more preferably Is less than 0.45 MPa, more preferably less than 0.4 MPa, particularly preferably less than 0.38 MPa.
  • the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to another embodiment (second embodiment) is 0.7 MPa or more and 5 MPa or less.
  • the lower limit of the surface hardness is preferably 0.8 MPa or more, more preferably 0.9 MPa or more (for example, 1.2 MPa or more, further 2 MPa or more), and the upper limit thereof is preferably 4 MPa or less, It is more preferably 3 MPa or less, still more preferably 2.7 MPa or less, and particularly preferably 2.5 MPa or less.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is a load curve slope (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “load curve slope”) obtained by a nanoindentation method, which is represented by a ratio of a load [ ⁇ N] to an indentation depth [nm] up to a predetermined depth. .) is 0.7 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more.
  • Information corresponding to elasticity (compressive elastic modulus) in the surface layer portion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be obtained from the slope of the load curve [ ⁇ N/nm].
  • the gradient of the load curve is more preferably 0.73 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more, further preferably 0.75 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more, and particularly preferably 0.78 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more. is there.
  • the slope of the load curve is 7 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less, for example, 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less, and further 4.5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less from the viewpoint of adhesiveness.
  • the load curve gradient of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the first embodiment is 0.7 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more and less than 1.2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm.
  • the lower limit of the load curve slope is preferably 0.75 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more, more preferably 0.8 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more (for example, 0.85 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm). nm or more), and the upper limit is preferably less than 1.1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm, more preferably less than 1.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm, and further preferably 0.95 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the second embodiment has a load curve gradient of 1.2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more and 7 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less.
  • the lower limit of the load curve slope is preferably 1.4 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more (for example, 1.8 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more), and 2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more. (For example, 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more).
  • the upper limit is preferably 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less, more preferably 4.5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less (for example, 4 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or less).
  • the above numerical range is appropriately determined in consideration of the suppression of adhesive strength over time and good adhesiveness.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein preferably has a minimum load of an unloading curve by the nanoindentation method of less than 0 ⁇ N.
  • the fact that the load applied to the indenter in the unloading direction is in the negative direction means that the indenter pushed into the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is difficult to be pulled out, and thus the pressure-sensitive adhesive has a cohesive force.
  • the minimum load of the unloading curve is more preferably ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ N or less, for example ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ N or less (typically less than ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ N, or even less than ⁇ 0.8 ⁇ N), It may be -1 ⁇ N or less and -2 ⁇ N or less. Further, the fact that the minimum load of the unloading curve is low may be that the adsorbability (adhesive force) to the indenter is evaluated. Considering the influence of this element on the light peeling property, it is appropriate that the minimum load of the unloading curve is -8 ⁇ N or more, preferably -5 ⁇ N or more, more preferably -3 ⁇ N or more, for example -2 ⁇ N. Or more (more specifically, ⁇ 2.0 ⁇ N or more, typically ⁇ 1.8 ⁇ N or more), or ⁇ 1 ⁇ N or more.
  • the minimum load of the unloading curve of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the first embodiment is -8 ⁇ N or more and less than -1 ⁇ N.
  • the lower limit of the minimum load of the unloading curve is preferably ⁇ 5 ⁇ N or more, more preferably ⁇ 3 ⁇ N or more, and the upper limit is preferably less than ⁇ 1.5 ⁇ N, more preferably less than ⁇ 1.8 ⁇ N. , And more preferably less than ⁇ 2 ⁇ N.
  • the minimum load on the unloading curve is ⁇ 1 ⁇ N or more and 0 ⁇ N or less.
  • the lower limit of the minimum load of the unloading curve is preferably ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ N or more, more preferably ⁇ 0.4 ⁇ N or more (eg, ⁇ 0.3 ⁇ N or more, more specifically ⁇ 0.3 ⁇ N or more, Further, it may be ⁇ 0.25 ⁇ N or more) and may be ⁇ 0.2 ⁇ N or more (eg, ⁇ 0.15 ⁇ N or more).
  • the upper limit is preferably ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ N or less, and may be, for example, ⁇ 0.15 ⁇ N or less, ⁇ 0.2 ⁇ N or less.
  • the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be 0.5 MPa or less.
  • the protective sheet adheres well to the surface of the adherend and can prevent the infiltration of water from the space between the adherend and the adherend.
  • the surface hardness of the adhesive layer is less than 0.45 MPa, more preferably less than 0.4 MPa (typically less than 0.38 MPa, eg less than 0.35 MPa), eg 0.3 MPa. It may be less than.
  • the lower limit of the surface hardness is not particularly limited, and it is suitable to be about 0.1 MPa or more, and preferably 0.2 MPa or more, more preferably from the viewpoint of light peelability and suppression of increase in adhesive strength with time.
  • the pressure is preferably 0.25 MPa or more (typically 0.3 MPa or more, for example 0.32 MPa or more, further 0.34 MPa or more).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is a load curve slope by a nanoindentation method represented by a ratio of a load [ ⁇ N] to an indentation depth [nm] up to a predetermined depth (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “load curve slope”). .) is less than 1.2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm. Information corresponding to elasticity (compressive elastic modulus) in the surface layer portion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be obtained from the slope of the load curve [ ⁇ N/nm].
  • the slope of the load curve is more preferably less than 1.1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm, further preferably less than 1.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm, and particularly preferably It is less than 0.95 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm (for example, less than 0.8 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm).
  • the lower limit of the slope of the load curve is not particularly limited, and it is suitable to be about 0.5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more, and preferably from the viewpoint of having an appropriate elasticity and preventing adhesive residue and the like.
  • 0.6 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more more preferably 0.7 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more, further preferably 0.75 ⁇ 10 -2 ⁇ N/nm or more, particularly preferably 0.8 ⁇ 10 It is ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more (for example, 0.85 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ N/nm or more).
  • the adhesive layer disclosed herein preferably has a minimum load of -8 ⁇ N or more on the unloading curve by the nanoindentation method.
  • the fact that the load applied to the indenter at the time of unloading is more than a predetermined value means that the indenter pushed into the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is easy to be pulled out, which suggests that the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is limited.
  • Such an adhesive layer easily wets the surface of the adherend and easily adheres to the surface of the adherend.
  • the minimum load of the unloading curve is more preferably ⁇ 5 ⁇ N or more, further preferably ⁇ 3 ⁇ N or more (eg ⁇ 2.5 ⁇ N or more).
  • the minimum load of the unloading curve is not particularly limited and it is suitable that it is approximately less than 0 ⁇ N. Even when the pressure-sensitive adhesive is hard, the indenter pushed into the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is easily pulled out, and the minimum load of the unloading curve can be in a high range (for example, around 0 ⁇ N). In consideration of such matters, from the viewpoint of obtaining appropriate softness and wettability, the minimum load of the unloading curve is preferably ⁇ 0.3 ⁇ N or less (typically less than ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ N, and further ⁇ 0). Less than 0.8 ⁇ N), more preferably ⁇ 1 ⁇ N or less, still more preferably ⁇ 1.5 ⁇ N or less, and particularly preferably ⁇ 2 ⁇ N or less (eg ⁇ 2.5 ⁇ N or less).
  • the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the load curve slope, and the minimum load of the unloading curve are determined based on the nanoindentation method by applying a minute indenter from the surface (adhesive surface) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • a depth corresponding to a layer thickness of 6% also referred to as a depth of 6%. 600 nm when the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer thickness is 10 ⁇ m
  • a depth of 300 nm a depth of 300 nm
  • the transition of the load (vertical axis) applied to the indenter is based on the adhesive surface. It is obtained from the load (push-in)-unload (pull-out) curve obtained by plotting against the displacement (horizontal axis) of the indenter.
  • the surface hardness [MPa] of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is the maximum projected load (Pmax) [ ⁇ N] of the load curve when the depth is 6% and the depth of 300 nm is the shallower of the contact projection area (A). It is calculated by dividing by.
  • the load curve slope [ ⁇ N/nm] is obtained by dividing Pmax [ ⁇ N] by the indentation depth (D) [nm]. That is, the surface hardness and the load curve slope of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are calculated by the following equations.
  • the minimum load [ ⁇ N] of the unloading curve is the minimum value of the unloading curve.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be used even for a thin pressure-sensitive adhesive layer as in Examples described later.
  • the behavior of the surface layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be accurately evaluated without being affected by the base material layer supporting the layer. If the depth is increased, the influence of the base material layer may be detected, and the device (typically indenter size) is also limited. On the other hand, in the case of a thin pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, if the depth is less than 6%, the stress tends to be small and it becomes difficult to detect a significant difference. Therefore, in the technique disclosed herein, the shallower depth of 6% and 300 nm is adopted as the optimum depth.
  • the surface hardness, the load curve slope, and the minimum load of the unloading curve can be measured based on the nanoindentation method, for example, using a Triboindenter manufactured by Hysitron under the following conditions.
  • Indenter used Berkovich (triangular pyramid) diamond indenter Measuring method: Single indentation measuring temperature: Room temperature (25°C) Indentation depth setting: 6% of adhesive layer thickness or 300 nm Pushing speed: 100 nm/sec Pulling speed: 100 nm/sec
  • the surface hardness, the slope of the load curve, and the minimum load of the unloading curve are adjusted by the composition of the polymer (monomer composition), the glass transition temperature (Tg), the molecular weight, and the type and addition amount of the crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive. can do.
  • Other factors that can be used for adjusting the above properties include gel fraction, polymerization method of the above polymers, polymerization conditions and the like.
  • the surface hardness, the load curve slope and the minimum load of the unloading curve when the depth is 6% are referred to as the depth 6% surface hardness, the depth 6% load curve slope and the minimum load of the depth 6% unloading curve, respectively. ..
  • the surface hardness, the load curve slope and the minimum load of the unloading curve when the depth is 300 nm are referred to as the depth 300 nm surface hardness, the depth 300 nm load curve slope, and the minimum load of the depth 300 nm unloading curve, respectively.
  • surface hardness includes 6% depth surface hardness and 300 nm depth surface hardness.
  • the load curve slope includes a depth 6% load curve slope and a depth 300 nm load curve slope.
  • the minimum load of the unloading curve includes the minimum load of the 6% depth unloading curve and the minimum load of the 300 nm depth unloading curve.
  • the type of the pressure-sensitive adhesive that constitutes the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is, for example, various polymers such as acryl-based, polyester-based, urethane-based, polyether-based, rubber-based, silicone-based, polyamide-based, and fluorine-based polymers (also referred to as a pressure-sensitive adhesive polymer or a pressure-sensitive adhesive polymer). It can be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing as a base polymer (a main component among polymer components, that is, a component occupying 50% by weight or more) selected from the above.
  • the technology disclosed herein can be preferably implemented in the form of a protective sheet provided with, for example, an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or a rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having an acrylic polymer as a base polymer.
  • rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive layer refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a rubber-based polymer as a base polymer.
  • Acrylic polymer means a monomer having at least one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule (hereinafter, this may be referred to as “acrylic monomer”) as a main constituent monomer component (mainly monomer).
  • Component that is, a component which accounts for 50% by weight or more of the total amount of monomers constituting the acrylic polymer).
  • (meth)acryloyl group means a generic term for an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group.
  • (meth)acrylate is used to mean a generic term for acrylate and methacrylate.
  • the acrylic polymer includes, for example, an alkyl (meth)acrylate (hereinafter also referred to as “monomer A”) and another monomer having copolymerizability with the alkyl (meth)acrylate (hereinafter also referred to as “monomer B”).
  • the polymer of the monomer raw material which can further include .) is preferable.
  • the acrylic polymer typically has a copolymerization composition corresponding to the composition of the monomer component contained in the monomer raw material.
  • an alkyl(meth)acrylate represented by the following general formula (1) can be preferably used as the monomer A.
  • CH 2 C(R 1 )COOR 2 (1)
  • R 1 in the above formula (1) is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 2 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • such a range of the number of carbon atoms may be represented as “C 1-20 ”.
  • an alkyl (meth)acrylate in which R 2 is a C 1-16 alkyl group is preferable, and R 2 is C 1-12 (typically C 1-10 , for example, Alkyl (meth)acrylate, which is a C 1-8 ) alkyl group, is more preferable.
  • alkyl(meth)acrylate in which R 2 is a C 1-20 alkyl group examples include, for example, methyl(meth)acrylate, ethyl(meth)acrylate, propyl(meth)acrylate, isopropyl(meth)acrylate, n-butyl(meth)acrylate.
  • the technique disclosed herein is such that the alkyl acrylate as the monomer A is about 50% by weight or more (more preferably about 75% by weight or more, further preferably about 90% by weight or more, for example, about 95% by weight, based on the total monomer components.
  • the above can be preferably carried out.
  • the alkyl acrylate is preferably an alkyl acrylate in which R 2 in the above formula (1) is a C 1-20 alkyl group, and R 2 is C 1-12 (more preferably C 1-10 , particularly preferably C 1 ).
  • Alkyl acrylate which is an alkyl group of 1-8 ) is more preferable.
  • the alkyl acrylate is an alkyl acrylate in which R 2 in the formula (1) is a C 2-8 (typically C 4-8 ) alkyl group. Can be done.
  • the alkyl acrylates may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds of alkyl acrylates are used, R 2 is C 4-20 (more preferably C 4-10 , further preferably C 4-8 ) for the reason that the Tg of the acrylic polymer is adjusted to the optimum range.
  • the alkyl acrylate A1 which is an alkyl group of 1 and the alkyl acrylate A2 which is a C 1-3 (more preferably C 1-2 , for example C 2 ) alkyl group may be used in combination.
  • the weight ratio (A1:A2) of the alkyl acrylate A1 and the alkyl acrylate A2 is not particularly limited, and is usually about 5:95 to 95:5, and about 10:90 to 90:10. It is suitable, for example, about 15:85 to 85:15.
  • the monomer component contains, as the monomer A, one kind or two or more kinds of alkyl methacrylate.
  • alkyl methacrylate By using alkyl methacrylate, it is possible to preferably design a base polymer that can achieve a desired adhesive hardness.
  • the above-mentioned alkyl methacrylate is preferably an alkyl methacrylate in which R 2 in the above formula (1) is a C 1-10 alkyl group, and R 2 is a C 1-4 (more preferably C 1 or C 2-4 ) Alkyl methacrylate, which is an alkyl group, is more preferable.
  • the alkyl methacrylates can preferably be used in combination with alkyl acrylates.
  • the weight C AM of one or more kinds of alkyl methacrylate (for example, C 2-4 alkyl methacrylate) and the weight C AA of one or more kinds of alkyl acrylate are used.
  • the ratio (C AM :C AA ) is not particularly limited, and in one embodiment, it is usually about 1:9 to 9:1, and it is suitable to be about 2:8 to 8:2, preferably about It is 3:7 to 7:3, more preferably about 4:6 to 6:4.
  • the weight C AM of alkyl methacrylate (eg, C 1 alkyl methacrylate, or methyl methacrylate (MMA)) in the total amount of alkyl (meth)acrylate (C AM +C AA ) is usually about 30 wt% or less. Approximately 20% by weight or less is suitable, preferably approximately 10% by weight or less, more preferably approximately 7% by weight or less. On the other hand, the lower limit is usually about 0.1% by weight or more and about 1% by weight or more, and preferably about 2% by weight or more (for example, about 3% by weight or more).
  • the technique disclosed herein can be carried out in a mode in which the monomer component does not substantially contain alkyl methacrylate as the monomer A. In the mode in which the alkyl methacrylate is used, for example, C 1-3 alkyl methacrylate (typically Specifically, it can be carried out in a mode not including MMA).
  • the acrylic polymer contains an alkyl acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms (hereinafter, also referred to as a monomer m A ), and may contain another monomer as necessary. It is a polymer of.
  • the acrylic polymer can be synthesized by polymerizing a monomer raw material having a corresponding composition (monomer composition) by a known method.
  • Non-limiting examples of the monomer m A include n-butyl acrylate (BA), n-hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), n-octyl acrylate, n-nonyl acrylate and isononyl acrylate (iNA). Can be mentioned.
  • An alkyl acrylate having a —(CH 2 ) 3 — structure in the alkyl group is preferable, and an alkyl acrylate having a —(CH 2 ) 4 — structure in the alkyl group is more preferable.
  • Suitable examples of monomers m A, 2EHA, include BA and iNA.
  • the monomer m A one type can be used alone, or two or more types can be used in combination.
  • the amount of monomer m A is typically at least 40 wt% of the total monomer raw material used in the synthesis of the acrylic polymer.
  • Comprise a monomer m A in a proportion of more than 40 wt% in the monomer composition is advantageous in terms of flexibility and low-temperature characteristics improve pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer.
  • the ratio of the monomers m A is preferably 45 wt% or more, may be 50 wt% or more (e.g., 50 wt.%). Further, by the ratio of monomer m A in the monomer in the composition and 99.9 wt% or less, it becomes easy to impart moderate cohesiveness to the adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer.
  • the proportion of the monomers m A is preferably 95 wt% or less, more preferably 90 wt% or less, may be 85 wt% or less. In one embodiment, it may be less than 80 wt% the proportion of the monomers m A, may be less than 70 wt% (e.g. 65 wt% or less).
  • the acrylic polymer in the technique disclosed herein may have a monomer composition containing a carboxy group-containing monomer (hereinafter, also referred to as a monomer m B ) as the monomer B. That is, the monomer m B may be copolymerized with the acrylic polymer.
  • the monomer m B can be useful for introducing a cross-linking point in the acrylic polymer and for enhancing the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing the acrylic polymer.
  • the monomer m B can also help improve the non-adhesive residue property by increasing the adhesiveness (anchoring property) between the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer and the base material layer.
  • carboxy group-containing monomer examples include ethylene such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, carboxyethyl(meth)acrylate, carboxypentyl(meth)acrylate, and 1-[2-(methacryloyloxy)ethyl]succinic acid.
  • unsaturated monocarboxylic acids ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as maleic acid, fumaric acid, itaconic acid and citraconic acid and anhydrides thereof (eg maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride); and the like.
  • the carboxy group-containing monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the proportion of the monomer m B in the monomer composition is not particularly limited.
  • the proportion of the monomer m B can be, for example, 0.05% by weight or more, suitably 0.1% by weight or more, and preferably 0.5% by weight or more from the viewpoint of polymerization stability and dispersion stability. It is more preferably 1% by weight or more.
  • the proportion of the monomer m B is preferably about 20% by weight or less (preferably about 10% by weight or less, typically about 7% by weight or less). Is about 5% by weight or less, more preferably about 4% by weight or less (for example, 3% by weight or less).
  • the acrylic polymer in the technology disclosed herein is a homopolymer in which the alkyl group has 4 to 20 carbon atoms as the monomer A for the purpose of adjusting the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic polymer, and the like.
  • Alkyl (meth)acrylate having Tg of ⁇ 50° C. or higher (hereinafter, also referred to as monomer m C ) may be copolymerized.
  • monomer m C Alkyl (meth)acrylate having Tg of ⁇ 50° C. or higher
  • the above-mentioned monomers belonging to the monomer m A are excluded from the category of the monomer m C.
  • the monomer m C one type can be used alone, or two or more types can be used in combination.
  • the monomer m C preferably has a homopolymer Tg in the range of ⁇ 40° C. to +60° C., more preferably in the range of ⁇ 30° C. to +40° C. (eg, ⁇ 20° C. to +30° C.).
  • preferably used monomers m C include n-butyl methacrylate (BMA), 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate and lauryl acrylate.
  • the proportion of the monomer m C in the monomer composition is not particularly limited.
  • the proportion of the monomer m C may be, for example, 1% by weight or more, may be 5% by weight or more, may be 10% by weight or more, and may be 15% by weight or more.
  • the ratio of the monomers m C in the monomer in the composition may be more than 20 wt%, may be more than 25 wt%, even more than 30 wt% It may be 35 wt% or more (for example, 40 wt% or more).
  • the proportion of the monomer m C in the monomer composition can be less than 60% by weight, and from the viewpoint of improving flexibility and low-temperature characteristics, it is approximately 55% by weight or less (typically approximately 50% by weight or less, for example, approximately 45% by weight or less) is suitable. In some embodiments, the proportion of the monomer m C may be less than 30% by weight, less than 20% by weight, less than 10% by weight (eg less than 5% by weight, even less than 1% by weight). ..
  • a monomer (monomer m D ) other than the monomers m A , m B , and m C may be copolymerized as the monomer A, if necessary.
  • monomer m D various monomers copolymerizable with the monomer m A can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • an alkyl(meth)acrylate represented by the above general formula (1) (monomer m D1 ) (excluding those corresponding to the monomer m A or the monomer m C ) can be used. ..
  • Specific examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate that can be used as the monomer m D1 include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, and lauryl (meth)acrylate.
  • the monomer m D1 can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the compound that can be used as the monomer m D may include the following functional group-containing monomers (monomer B). Such a functional group-containing monomer can be useful for introducing a cross-linking point into the acrylic polymer and increasing the cohesive force of the acrylic polymer.
  • Hydroxyl group-containing monomer For example, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, Hydroxyalkyl (such as 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth)acrylate and (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl)methyl acrylate) (Meth)acrylates; unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol and allyl alcohol.
  • Hydroxyalkyl such as 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth)acrylate and (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl)methyl acrylate
  • Amide group-containing monomer For example, (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl(meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethyl(meth)acrylamide, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl(meth)acrylamide, N-butyl(meth)acrylamide , N-methylol(meth)acrylamide, N-methylolpropane(meth)acrylamide, N-methoxymethyl(meth)acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl(meth)acrylamide, diacetone(meth)acrylamide.
  • Imido group-containing monomer for example, N-isopropylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, itacone imide.
  • Amino group-containing monomer For example, aminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylate, t-butylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate.
  • Monomers having epoxy groups for example, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, methylglycidyl (meth)acrylate, allylglycidyl ether.
  • Cyano group-containing monomer for example, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile.
  • Keto group-containing monomer For example, diacetone (meth)acrylamide, diacetone (meth)acrylate, vinyl methyl ketone, vinyl ethyl ketone, allyl acetoacetate, vinyl acetoacetate.
  • N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone N-methylvinylpyrrolidone
  • N-vinylpyridine N-vinylpiperidone
  • N-vinylpyrimidine N-vinylpiperazine
  • N-vinylpyrazine N-vinyl Pyrrole
  • N-vinylimidazole N-vinyloxazole
  • N-vinylmorpholine N-vinylcaprolactam
  • N-(meth)acryloylmorpholine N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidone.
  • Alkoxysilyl group-containing monomer for example, 3-(meth)acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(meth)acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-(meth)acryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-(meth)acryloxy Propylmethyldiethoxysilane.
  • the compound that can be used as the monomer m D include vinyl ester-based monomers such as vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene, substituted styrenes ( ⁇ -methylstyrene) and vinyltoluene; cyclohexyl ( Non-aromatic ring-containing (meth)acrylates such as (meth)acrylate, t-butylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, cyclopentyl di(meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate; aryl (meth)acrylates (eg phenyl (meth)acrylate) , Benzyl (meth)acrylate, aryloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate (eg phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate), arylalkyl (meth)acrylate (eg benzyl (meth)acrylate), etc.
  • vinyl ester-based monomers such as vinyl
  • Olefin-based monomers such as ethylene, propylene, isoprene, butadiene and isobutylene; chlorine-containing monomers such as vinyl chloride and vinylidene chloride; isocyanate group-containing monomers such as 2-(meth)acryloxyethyl isocyanate; methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate Alkoxy group-containing monomers such as ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate; vinyl ether type monomers such as methyl vinyl ether, ethyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether; and the like.
  • Still another example of the compound that can be used as the monomer m D is a polyfunctional monomer.
  • the polyfunctional monomer include 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa.
  • examples thereof include compounds having two or more (meth)acryloyl groups in one molecule, such as (meth)acrylate and methylenebisacrylamide.
  • the amount used is not particularly limited, but it is suitable to be 2% by weight or less (more preferably 1% by weight or less) of the total monomer components.
  • the amount of the monomer m D used is appropriately set so as not to exceed 40% by weight of the monomer composition, preferably does not exceed 20% by weight, and more preferably does not exceed 10% by weight.
  • the monomer m D may not be used.
  • the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out in an embodiment in which the amount of the monomer m D used is 0% by weight or more and less than 5% by weight of the monomer composition.
  • that the amount of the monomer m D used is 0 wt% of the monomer composition means that the monomer m D is not used at least intentionally.
  • the proportion of the monomer A (alkyl (meth)acrylate) in all the monomer components can be, for example, about 50% by weight or more, and about 60% by weight or more is suitable. It is preferably about 70% by weight or more, more preferably about 80% by weight or more, and even more preferably about 85% by weight or more.
  • a protective sheet having desired adhesive properties can be preferably realized.
  • the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out, for example, in a mode in which the proportion of the monomer A in all the monomer components is about 90% by weight or more. In one embodiment, the proportion of the monomer A may be about 95% by weight or more, or about 97% by weight or more.
  • Such a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing an acrylic polymer as a base polymer can be advantageous from the viewpoint of weather resistance of a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from the composition (and by extension, a protective sheet having the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer).
  • the ratio of the monomer A in all the monomer components can be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less from the viewpoint of appropriately exerting the effect of the monomer B. , Preferably 99.5% by weight or less, more preferably 99% by weight or less, or about 97% by weight or less (for example, 95% by weight or less).
  • the proportion of the functional group-containing monomer in all the monomer components constituting the acrylic polymer is about 0.1% by weight or more (typically Is preferably about 0.5% by weight or more, for example about 1% by weight or more), and about 40% by weight or less (typically about 30% by weight or less, for example about 20% by weight or less). Is preferred.
  • the proportion of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in all the above monomer components is about 0.001% by weight or more (typically from the viewpoint of obtaining a desired cohesive force).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be a rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • the base polymer include natural rubber; styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR); polyisoprene; butene (1-butene, and cis- or trans-2-butene) and/or 2-methylpropene (isobutylene).
  • SBS styrene-butadiene-styrene block copolymer rubber
  • SIBS styrene-isoprene-styrene block copolymer rubber
  • SIBS styrene-isobutylene-
  • Rubber-based polymers such as a united rubber (SEBS) and a styrene hydride of styrene-ethylene-propylene-styrene block copolymer rubber (SEPS); These rubber-based polymers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • SEBS united rubber
  • SEPS styrene hydride of styrene-ethylene-propylene-styrene block copolymer rubber
  • the Tg of the base polymer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited.
  • the Tg of the base polymer can be, for example, about 0° C. or lower.
  • the Tg of the base polymer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is about -5°C or lower.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having excellent adhesion to an adherend can be preferably formed.
  • the Tg of the base polymer is about ⁇ 15° C. or lower (more preferably about ⁇ 20° C. or lower, for example, about ⁇ 25° C.
  • the Tg of the base polymer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is about ⁇ 35° C. or lower, more preferably about ⁇ 40° C. or lower, and further preferably about ⁇ 45. C. or lower (for example, about ⁇ 50° C. or lower, further about ⁇ 52° C. or lower, or about ⁇ 55° C. or lower).
  • the Tg of the base polymer is suitably -70°C or higher, and from the viewpoint of cohesiveness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, etc., it is preferably about -65°C or higher, more preferably -60°C or higher, and even more preferably -.
  • the temperature is 55° C.
  • the Tg of the base polymer can be adjusted by appropriately changing the monomer composition (that is, the type of monomer used in the synthesis of the polymer and the ratio of the amounts used).
  • the Tg of a polymer means a Fox based on the Tg of a homopolymer of each monomer constituting the polymer and the weight fraction of the monomer (copolymerization ratio on a weight basis). The value obtained from the formula.
  • the Fox equation is a relational expression between Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of a homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer, as shown below.
  • Tg is the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of the copolymer
  • Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio on a weight basis)
  • Tgi is a homopolymer of the monomer i. Represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of.
  • the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer used for calculation of Tg the value described in publicly known data shall be used.
  • the monomers listed below the following values are used as the glass transition temperature of homopolymers of the monomers.
  • Tg of homopolymers of monomers other than those exemplified above the values described in the "Polymer Handbook” (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989) shall be used. For monomers for which multiple types of values are described in this document, the highest value is adopted. When the Tg of the homopolymer is not described in the above Polymer Handbook, the value obtained by the measuring method described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-51271 shall be used.
  • the method for obtaining the base polymer is not particularly limited.
  • a known polymerization method such as a solution polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a bulk polymerization method, or a suspension polymerization method can be appropriately adopted.
  • photopolymerization performed by irradiating light such as UV (typically, performed in the presence of a photopolymerization initiator), radiation polymerization performed by irradiating radiation such as ⁇ -ray or ⁇ -ray.
  • Active energy ray irradiation polymerization may be adopted.
  • the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) is obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization of a monomer raw material having the above composition.
  • a monomer supply method in the emulsion polymerization method a batch charging method of supplying all the monomer raw materials at once, a continuous supply (dropping) method, a divided supply (dropping) method, and the like can be appropriately adopted.
  • Part or all of the monomer components may be previously mixed with water and a surfactant to emulsify, and the emulsion may be supplied to the polymerization vessel.
  • the polymerization temperature can be appropriately selected according to the type of monomer and solvent used, the type of polymerization initiator, and the like.
  • the polymerization temperature is appropriately about 20°C or higher, preferably about 40°C or higher, more preferably about 50°C or higher, about 60°C or higher, about 65°C or higher, and further about 70°C. It may be set to °C or higher.
  • the polymerization temperature is appropriately about 170° C. or lower (typically about 140° C. or lower), and preferably about 95° C. or lower (eg, about 85° C. or lower). In emulsion polymerization, the polymerization temperature is preferably about 95° C. or lower (for example, about 85° C. or lower).
  • the solvent (polymerization solvent) used for solution polymerization can be appropriately selected from conventionally known organic solvents.
  • aromatic compounds such as toluene (typically aromatic hydrocarbons), acetic acid esters such as ethyl acetate, and aliphatic or alicyclic hydrocarbons such as hexane and cyclohexane are preferably used.
  • polymerization initiator examples include, but are not limited to, an azo initiator, a peroxide initiator, and a redox initiator in which a peroxide and a reducing agent are combined.
  • the polymerization initiators may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • azo initiators are 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis[N-(2-carboxyethyl)-2-methylpropionamidine]hydrate, 2,2′.
  • -Azobis(2-methylpropionamidine) disulfate 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine) dihydrochloride, 2,2'- Examples thereof include azobis[2-(5-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)propane]dihydrochloride and 2,2′-azobis(N,N′-dimethyleneisobutylamidine)dihydrochloride.
  • peroxide-based initiators include persulfates such as potassium persulfate and ammonium persulfate; benzoyl peroxide, t-butyl hydroperoxide, di-t-butyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, dilauroyl peroxide, di-n.
  • Examples of the redox type initiator include a combination of peroxide and ascorbic acid (a combination of hydrogen peroxide solution and ascorbic acid, etc.), a combination of a peroxide and an iron (II) salt (a hydrogen peroxide solution and Iron (II) salt and the like), persulfate and sodium bisulfite, and the like.
  • the amount of the polymerization initiator used can be appropriately selected depending on the type of the initiator, the type of the monomer (composition of the monomer components), the polymerization conditions, and the like.
  • the amount of the polymerization initiator used is, for example, about 0.0005 to 1 part by weight, preferably about 0.001 to 0.5 part by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the monomer raw material.
  • the amount is preferably 002 to 0.3 parts by weight, more preferably 0.005 to 0.1 parts by weight.
  • chain transfer agents which can be understood as a molecular weight modifier or a polymerization degree modifier
  • the chain transfer agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • chain transfer agents include mercaptans such as n-dodecyl mercaptan, t-dodecyl mercaptan, glycidyl mercaptan, 2-mercaptoethanol, mercaptoacetic acid, thioglycolic acid, 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, and 2,3-dimercapto-1-propanol. Classes can be preferably used.
  • the amount thereof may be, for example, about 0.01 to 1 part by weight, and may be 0.02 to 0.1 part by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of all the monomer components. Is preferred, and more preferably 0.03 to 0.07 parts by weight.
  • the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out even in a mode without using a chain transfer agent.
  • the surfactant (emulsifier) used for emulsion polymerization is not particularly limited, and known anionic surfactants, nonionic surfactants and the like can be used. You may use the surfactant which has a radically polymerizable functional group.
  • the surfactant having a radically polymerizable functional group is also referred to as a reactive (polymerizable) surfactant.
  • a general surfactant having no radically polymerizable functional group may be referred to as a non-reactive (non-polymerizable) surfactant.
  • the surfactants may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the amount of the surfactant used is preferably about 0.1 parts by weight or more (eg, about 0.5 parts by weight or more) based on 100 parts by weight of all the monomer components, and 100 parts by weight of all the monomer components. It is preferable that the total amount be about 10 parts by weight or less (for example, about 5 parts by weight or less).
  • non-reactive surfactants include sodium lauryl sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate, sodium polyoxyethylene lauryl sulfate, sodium polyoxyethylene alkyl ether ether, ammonium polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfate, polyoxy Anionic emulsifiers such as sodium ethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfate and sodium polyoxyethylene alkyl sulfosuccinate; nonionics such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ether, polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene block polymer System emulsifiers; and the like.
  • the reactive surfactant is not particularly limited as long as it has a radically polymerizable functional group.
  • it may be a reactive surfactant having a structure in which a radically polymerizable functional group is introduced into the above-mentioned anionic surfactant or nonionic surfactant.
  • the radically polymerizable functional group include a vinyl group, a propenyl group, an isopropenyl group, a vinyl ether group (vinyloxy group), an allyl ether group (allyloxy group) and the like.
  • the concept of the propenyl group as used herein includes a 1-propenyl group (CH 3 —CH ⁇ CH—) and a 2-propenyl group (CH 2 ⁇ CH—CH 2 —; sometimes referred to as an allyl group). included.
  • anionic reactive surfactant examples include polyoxyethylene (allyloxymethyl) alkyl ether sulfate (for example, ammonium salt), polyoxyethylene nonylpropenyl phenyl ether sulfate (for example, ammonium salt), alkylallyl sulfosuccinic acid.
  • examples thereof include salts (for example, sodium salt), methacryloxy polyoxypropylene sulfate ester salt (for example, sodium salt), polyoxyalkylene alkenyl ether sulfate (for example, ammonium salt in which the terminal of the alkenyl group is an isopropenyl group), and the like.
  • the salt may be a metal salt such as sodium salt or a non-metal salt such as ammonium salt or amine salt.
  • the nonionic reactive surfactant include polyoxyethylene nonylpropenyl phenyl ether.
  • a reactive surfactant having an oxyethylene chain may be preferably used.
  • the oxyethylene chain refers to a repeating structure of oxyethylene units, that is, a structural portion represented by —(C 2 H 4 O) n —.
  • n represents the number of repeating oxyethylene units.
  • a reactive surfactant having a repeating number n of about 5 to 30 (for example, 8 to 25) is preferable.
  • a reactive surfactant having a propenyl group can be preferably adopted.
  • Reactive surfactants having a propenyl group and an oxyethylene chain are particularly preferred.
  • an anionic reactive surfactant for example, an anionic reactive surfactant having an oxyethylene chain
  • the anionic reactive surfactant forms a salt
  • the salt is preferably a non-metal salt, and particularly preferably an ammonium salt.
  • other surfactants such as anionic reactive surfactant, anionic non-reactive surfactant, nonionic non-reactive surfactant, etc. When used in combination with, more preferable results can be realized.
  • the reactive surfactant By subjecting the monomer raw material to emulsion polymerization in the presence of a reactive surfactant having a radically polymerizable functional group, the reactive surfactant can react and be incorporated into a base polymer (eg, acrylic polymer).
  • a base polymer eg, acrylic polymer
  • the reactive surfactant incorporated in the base polymer is less likely to bleed out on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer because its movement within the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is limited. Therefore, the use of the reactive surfactant can suppress the bleed-out of the low molecular weight compound to the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. This is preferable from the viewpoint of low contamination. From the viewpoint of achieving a more excellent low contamination property, an embodiment in which only a reactive surfactant is used as a surfactant during emulsion polymerization can be preferably adopted.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the protective sheet disclosed herein may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from various forms of pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions.
  • a water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be preferably used.
  • a water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing an acrylic polymer as a base polymer (acrylic water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, typically acrylic emulsion-type pressure-sensitive adhesive) Composition).
  • acrylic water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition typically acrylic emulsion-type pressure-sensitive adhesive
  • solvent-based adhesive compositions are preferred.
  • the hot-melt pressure-sensitive adhesive composition that does not require the use of a solvent is advantageous in that it is easy to handle in the production process.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition used for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer preferably contains a crosslinking agent.
  • the crosslinking agent By using the crosslinking agent, the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted.
  • the type of crosslinking agent used is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known crosslinking agents.
  • crosslinking agent examples include oxazoline-based crosslinking agents, aziridine-based crosslinking agents, isocyanate-based crosslinking agents, epoxy-based crosslinking agents, melamine-based crosslinking agents, peroxide-based crosslinking agents, urea-based crosslinking agents, metal alkoxide-based crosslinking agents.
  • a metal chelate-based crosslinking agent, a metal salt-based crosslinking agent, a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent, a hydrazine-based crosslinking agent, an amine-based crosslinking agent, and a silane coupling agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • oxazoline type crosslinking agent an oxazoline type crosslinking agent, an aziridine type crosslinking agent, an isocyanate type crosslinking agent and an epoxy type crosslinking agent.
  • oxazoline-based crosslinking agents, isocyanate-based crosslinking agents, and epoxy-based crosslinking agents are more preferable.
  • a water-soluble or dispersible crosslinking agent is preferable, and a water-soluble (that is, water-soluble) crosslinking agent is particularly preferable.
  • oxazoline-based cross-linking agent one having one or more oxazoline groups in one molecule can be used without particular limitation.
  • an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water.
  • the oxazoline group may be any of a 2-oxazoline group, a 3-oxazoline group and a 4-oxazoline group.
  • An oxazoline-based crosslinking agent having a 2-oxazoline group can be preferably used.
  • a water-soluble copolymer or a water-dispersible copolymer obtained by copolymerizing an addition-polymerizable oxazoline such as methyl-2-oxazoline and 2-isopropenyl-5-ethyl-2-oxazoline with another monomer And can be used as an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent.
  • Examples of commercially available products of the oxazoline-based cross-linking agent include trade names “Epocros WS-500”, “Epocros WS-700”, “Epocros K-2010E”, “Epocros K-2020E”, and “Epocros K-” manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd. 2030E” and the like.
  • aziridine crosslinking agent examples include trimethylolpropane tris[3-(1-aziridinyl)propionate] and trimethylolpropane tris[3-(1-(2-methyl)aziridinylpropionate)].
  • examples of commercially available products of the aziridine crosslinking agent include "Chemite PZ-33" and "Chemite DZ-22E” manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.
  • a bifunctional or higher polyfunctional isocyanate compound can be used as an example of the isocyanate cross-linking agent.
  • aromatic isocyanate such as tolylene diisocyanate, xylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl diisocyanate, tris(p-isocyanatophenyl)thiophosphate, diphenylmethane diisocyanate; alicyclic isocyanate such as isophorone diisocyanate; aliphatic such as hexamethylene diisocyanate Isocyanate; and the like.
  • trimethylolpropane/tolylene diisocyanate trimer adduct manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name “Coronate L”
  • trimethylolpropane/hexamethylene diisocyanate trimer adduct manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name “ Coronate HL”
  • an isocyanurate of hexamethylene diisocyanate manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name "Coronate HX”
  • an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water.
  • a water-soluble, water-dispersible or self-emulsifying type isocyanate crosslinking agent can be preferably used.
  • a so-called blocked isocyanate type isocyanate cross-linking agent in which an isocyanate group is blocked can be preferably used.
  • epoxy-based cross-linking agent one having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule can be used without particular limitation.
  • An epoxy-based cross-linking agent having 3 to 5 epoxy groups in one molecule is preferable.
  • an epoxy-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water.
  • Specific examples of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent include N,N,N′,N′-tetraglycidyl-m-xylenediamine, 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl)cyclohexane, 1,6-hexane.
  • Examples thereof include diol diglycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, polyglycerol polyglycidyl ether and the like.
  • Commercially available epoxy crosslinking agents are trade names “TETRAD-X” and “TETRAD-C” manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Inc., trade names “Epiclone CR-5L” manufactured by DIC, and products manufactured by Nagase ChemteX. Examples include the name “Denacol EX-512" and the trade name "TEPIC-G” manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • carbodiimide cross-linking agent a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound having two or more carbodiimide groups can be used.
  • a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water.
  • commercially available carbodiimide crosslinking agents include carbodilite V series (aqueous solution type) such as "carbodilite V-02", “carbodilite V-02-L2", and “carbodilite V-04" manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd.
  • Carbodilite series such as carbodilite E series (water dispersion type) such as carbodilite E-01”, “carbodilite E-02”, and “carbodilite E-04” can be mentioned.
  • the content of the cross-linking agent (total amount of the cross-linking agent) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and in consideration of the composition and the molecular weight of the base polymer, an appropriate property may be obtained after the cross-linking. Can be set. Although not particularly limited, it is appropriate that the amount of the crosslinking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (typically an acrylic polymer) is about 0.01 parts by weight or more, and about 0.1 parts by weight or more, It is preferably about 1 part by weight or more (for example, about 2 parts by weight or more).
  • the amount of the cross-linking agent used is about 15 parts by weight or less (preferably about 10 parts by weight or less, for example, about 5 parts by weight or less) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It is suitable, and from the viewpoint of enhancing the adhesion to the adherend, it is preferably about 4 parts by weight or less, more preferably less than 3.5 parts by weight, further preferably less than 3 parts by weight.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (and thus the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) disclosed herein may contain a phosphoric acid ester.
  • the phosphoric acid ester include alkyl phosphoric acid esters such as lauryl phosphoric acid and lauryl phosphate, phosphoric acid esters having an oxyethylene chain, and salts thereof.
  • the salt may be, for example, a sodium salt, a potassium salt, a barium salt, a triethanolamine salt or the like of the phosphoric acid ester.
  • phosphate ester is used to include a salt. Above all, it is more preferable to use a phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain.
  • the phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain mainly suppresses an increase in the adhesive force with time (that is, improves the stability of the adhesive force), while at the same time adding water or acid between the adhesive layer and the surface of the adherend. It is possible to prevent entry of corrosion-inducing components such as alkali.
  • the oxyethylene chain refers to a chain-like structural portion that contains at least one ethylene oxide (EO) unit and may further contain another oxyalkylene unit (for example, an oxyalkylene unit having about 3 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • EO ethylene oxide
  • the phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain is a phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain constituted by EO units or repeating thereof.
  • a phosphoric acid ester represented by the following general formula (a) or a salt thereof can be preferably adopted.
  • R 1 is —OH or —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n OR 3
  • R 2 represents —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) m OR 4
  • n and m represent the number of moles of EO added.
  • the EO-added mole number n is an integer of 1 to 30, typically an integer of about 1 to 20, preferably an integer of about 1 to 10, and may be an integer of about 1 to 8, for example.
  • the number of moles of EO added n is preferably an integer of about 1 to 6, and more preferably an integer of about 1 to 4 (eg, 2 to 4).
  • the number EO-added moles m can typically be approximately the same as the number EO-added moles n.
  • R 3 and R 4 are monovalent organic groups (typically hydrocarbon groups), and are, for example, each independently selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylaryl group and an arylalkyl group.
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and may be an organic group having 6 or more carbon atoms (preferably 8 or more, for example 11 or more).
  • R 3 and R 4 may be an organic group having 20 or less carbon atoms, preferably 18 or less carbon atoms, for example 15 or less carbon atoms.
  • the salt of the phosphoric acid ester represented by the general formula (a) may be, for example, sodium salt, potassium salt, barium salt, triethanolamine salt or the like of these phosphoric acid ester.
  • the phosphate ester may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the phosphoric acid ester include polyoxyethylene tridecyl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene octadecyl ether phosphoric acid, and the like; polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphoric acid ester; polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether phosphoric acid. , Polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene dinonyl phenyl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene dioctyl phenyl ether phosphoric acid, etc., and the like. In one aspect, a phosphoric acid ester having a molecular weight of 150 to 5000 can be preferably used.
  • the amount of the phosphate ester used can be, for example, about 0.05 part by weight or more, and preferably about 0.1 part by weight or more, relative to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (eg, acrylic polymer). More preferably, it is about 0.3 parts by weight or more (for example, about 0.5 parts by weight or more). From the viewpoint of low contamination of the surface of the adherend, the amount of the phosphoric acid ester used is about 30 parts by weight or less (eg, 20 parts by weight or less) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (eg, acrylic polymer). It is suitable, and is preferably about 10 parts by weight or less, more preferably about 5 parts by weight or less, further preferably about 3 parts by weight or less, particularly preferably about 2 parts by weight or less (for example, 1 part by weight or less).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to a preferred embodiment may contain a rust preventive agent.
  • the rust preventive agent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include amine compounds, azole compounds, nitrites, ammonium benzoate, ammonium phthalate, ammonium stearate, ammonium palmitate, ammonium oleate, ammonium carbonate, and dicyclohexylamine benzoate. Examples thereof include acid salts, urea, urotropine, thiourea, phenyl carbamate, cyclohexyl ammonium-N-cyclohexyl carbamate (CHC) and the like.
  • These rust preventives may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Of these, amine compounds and azole compounds are preferable.
  • the content of the rust preventive agent (for example, amine compound (amine rust preventive) or azole compound (azole rust preventive)) is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 0.01 part by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It can be more than 1 part (typically more than 0.05 part by weight). From the viewpoint of obtaining a better effect of preventing corrosion and the like, the content may be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.3 parts by weight or more, and 0.5 parts by weight or more. On the other hand, the content of the rust preventive agent is appropriately less than 8 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer from the viewpoints of preventing corrosion and the like due to the contained components and cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • the amount may be not more than 5 parts by weight, preferably not more than 5 parts by weight, for example not more than 3 parts by weight, or not more than 1 part by weight.
  • the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out even in a mode in which a rust preventive agent is not substantially used.
  • the adhesive layer may typically include a colorant.
  • the kind of the colorant is not particularly limited, and for example, one kind or two or more kinds of the above-mentioned colorants can be preferably used.
  • the amount of the colorant compounded is not particularly limited, and is appropriately 0.3% by weight or more of the adhesive layer, preferably 0.5% by weight or more, and more preferably 1.0% by weight or more.
  • the content of the colorant can be, for example, less than 10% by weight, preferably less than 5% by weight, more preferably less than 3.5% by weight, still more preferably less than 3.0% by weight.
  • the technique disclosed here can be preferably implemented in a mode in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer does not substantially contain a colorant. In this aspect, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be uncolored.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may contain a known tackifier such as a rosin-based tackifier, a terpene-based tackifier, or a hydrocarbon-based tackifier, if necessary.
  • a known tackifier such as a rosin-based tackifier, a terpene-based tackifier, or a hydrocarbon-based tackifier, if necessary.
  • the amount of the tackifier used is preferably about 5 parts by weight or less, and more preferably about 1 part by weight or less, relative to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. ..
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein can effectively control the adhesive force through the composition and Tg of the base polymer, the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, and the like, and thus can be preferably carried out even in a mode where no tackifier is used.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (and by extension, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) is, if necessary, a viscosity modifier (thickener, etc.), a cross-linking aid, a plasticizer, a softening agent, a filler, an antistatic agent, an antiaging agent, an ultraviolet ray. It may contain various optional additives generally used in the field of pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions, such as an absorber, an antioxidant, a light stabilizer and a defoaming agent. Further, as the above-mentioned optional additive, an arbitrary polymer component different from the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) may be used.
  • the content of such an optional polymer is, for example, about 10% by weight or less, for example, about 1% by weight or less) in the PSA composition, and the PSA composition disclosed herein is substantially the same as the above optional polymer. May not be included in.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect may be one in which the content of a plasticizer such as a fatty acid ester is limited to less than 10 parts by weight (for example, less than 1 part by weight) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. ..
  • the adhesive composition may be substantially free of plasticizer.
  • an antistatic agent which may be a conductive agent
  • an ionic compound for example, an ionic liquid or an alkali metal salt
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is, for example, an acrylic polymer obtained by emulsion polymerization using a surfactant. It can be prepared by mixing other components used as necessary (for example, a cross-linking agent, a phosphoric acid ester, etc.) with the water dispersion liquid.
  • the above aqueous dispersion may contain the below-mentioned aqueous liquid.
  • a polymerization reaction liquid obtained by emulsion polymerization or one obtained by subjecting the polymerization reaction liquid to treatment such as pH adjustment (for example, neutralization), adjustment of non-volatile content, adjustment of viscosity, etc. as necessary. it can.
  • the dispersion stability of the emulsion can be improved by adding a neutralizing agent such as aqueous ammonia to the polymerization reaction liquid to adjust the pH to an appropriate range (for example, a pH range of about 6 to 9).
  • the nonvolatile content (NV; nonvolatile content) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is, for example, about 20% by weight or more (typically about 30% by weight or more, preferably from the viewpoint of drying efficiency). It can be about 40% by weight or more), and can be about 75% by weight or less (typically about 70% by weight or less, preferably about 60% by weight or less) from the viewpoint of coatability and the like. ..
  • a method for providing the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the supporting base material which becomes the base material layer a method of directly applying (typically coating) the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to the supporting base material and performing a curing treatment (direct method) ) Or an appropriate release surface (for example, the surface of a transfer sheet having releasability), and by applying a curing treatment to the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed on the release surface.
  • a method in which the layer is attached to a supporting base material and transferred (transfer method) or the like can be used.
  • the curing treatment may be one or more treatments selected from drying (heating), cooling, crosslinking, additional copolymerization reaction, aging and the like.
  • the treatment of simply drying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a solvent or the treatment of simply cooling (solidifying) the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition in a heating and melting state is also included in the curing treatment here. May be included.
  • the curing treatment includes two or more treatments (for example, drying and crosslinking), these treatments may be performed simultaneously or may be performed in multiple steps.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be applied using a conventional coater such as a gravure roll coater, a reverse roll coater, a kiss roll coater, a dip roll coater, a bar coater, a knife coater, and a spray coater. From the viewpoint of accelerating the crosslinking reaction, improving the production efficiency, etc., it is preferable to dry the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition under heating. A drying temperature of, for example, about 40° C. to 150° C. can be adopted, although it depends on the type of the object (supporting substrate or the like) to which the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer constituting the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited, but the chloride ion amount measured by hot water extraction is about 105 ⁇ g or less per 1 g of the pressure-sensitive adhesive (layer). Appropriate. This makes it possible to prevent corrosion and the like in the Low-E glass plate that is the protection target for a long period of time.
  • the chloride ion amount per 1 g of the adhesive (layer) is preferably about 100 ⁇ g or less, more preferably about 95 ⁇ g or less, further preferably about 90 ⁇ g or less, particularly preferably about 85 ⁇ g or less, about 75 ⁇ g or less (about 70 ⁇ g or less. ).
  • the lower limit of the amount of chloride ions per 1 g of the pressure-sensitive adhesive (layer) is ideally 0 ⁇ g, but from the viewpoint of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be about 1 ⁇ g or more, about 10 ⁇ g. It may be more than 50 ⁇ g.
  • the chloride ion amount per 1 g of the pressure-sensitive adhesive (layer) is measured by the following method. Alternatively, the chloride ion amount in the protective sheet and the base material layer is measured by hot water extraction, and the chloride ion amount from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is calculated from the difference in the chloride ion amount between the two, and the obtained value is used as a unit. It may be obtained by converting it into a value per weight of the adhesive (layer).
  • the weight fraction (gel fraction) of the ethyl acetate insoluble matter in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited and may be, for example, about 40% or more (typically about 50% or more).
  • the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is suitably about 60% or more, preferably about 80% or more, and about 90% or more (for example, about 91% or more. , And about 93% or more) is more preferable.
  • the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be, for example, about 95% or more (eg, about 98% or more). The increase in the gel fraction tends to improve the cohesiveness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive and suppress the temporal adhesive force.
  • the upper limit of the gel fraction is 100% in principle.
  • the gel fraction can be, for example, about 98% or less, and can be about 95% or less (eg, about 90% or less).
  • the gel fraction can be adjusted by, for example, the composition of the base polymer, the polymerization method and the polymerization conditions of the base polymer, the molecular weight of the base polymer, the presence or absence of the use of a crosslinking agent, and the selection of the type and the amount thereof.
  • the gel fraction is measured by the following method.
  • the swelling degree of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited and may be about 30 times or less.
  • the degree of swelling is appropriately about 20 times or less, preferably about 15 times or less, more preferably about 12 times or less, for example, about 10 times or less, from the viewpoint of obtaining a surface hardness of a predetermined value or more. It may be about 8 times or less.
  • the lower limit of the degree of swelling is in principle 1 time and may be approximately 3 times or more, for example approximately 5 times or more.
  • the degree of swelling can be adjusted by, for example, the molecular weight of the base polymer, the type (distance between functional groups) of the crosslinking agent, the amount used, and the like. The degree of swelling is measured by the following method. The same method is adopted for the examples described later.
  • the package is dipped in 50 mL of ethyl acetate and kept at room temperature (typically 23° C.) for 7 days, then the package is taken out, the ethyl acetate adhering to the outer surface is wiped off, and the weight of the package (W 4 ) To measure. Then, the package is dried at 130° C. for 2 hours, and the weight (W 5 ) of the package is measured.
  • the gel fraction and swelling degree of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be calculated by substituting each value into the following equation.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein may include a substrate layer.
  • a resin film, a rubber sheet, a foam sheet, a composite of these, or the like can be used as the base material layer.
  • the rubber sheet include a natural rubber sheet and a butyl rubber sheet.
  • the foam sheet include a polyurethane foam sheet, a chloroprene rubber sheet, and the like.
  • the technique disclosed here can be preferably applied to a protective sheet having a resin film as a base layer.
  • the "resin film” here is typically a film formed by molding a resin composition containing a resin component as shown below into a film, and is distinguished from so-called non-woven fabrics and woven fabrics. (That is, the concept excluding non-woven fabric and woven fabric).
  • a substantially non-foamed resin film is preferred.
  • the non-foamed resin film refers to a resin film that has not been intentionally treated to form a foam, and specifically, has a foaming ratio of less than about 1.1 times (for example, 1.05 times). Less, typically less than 1.01 times) resin film.
  • the resin component constituting the resin film examples include polyolefin resin (polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene-propylene copolymer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, etc.), polyvinyl chloride resin (typically soft poly Vinyl chloride resin), polyvinyl acetate resin, polyurethane resin (ether polyurethane, ester polyurethane, carbonate polyurethane, etc.), urethane (meth)acrylate resin, thermoplastic elastomer (olefin elastomer, styrene elastomer, Acrylic elastomer, etc.), polyester resin (polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene naphthalate, etc.), polycarbonate resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, fluorine resin, cellophane resin, etc. Resin etc. are mentioned. These resin components may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • one or more selected from the group consisting of a polyolefin resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, a polyurethane resin, a thermoplastic elastomer and a polyester resin can be preferably used.
  • a base material layer containing the above resin component as a main component typically, a base material layer containing such a resin component in a proportion exceeding 50% by weight
  • a base material layer including a polyolefin-based resin layer, a polyester-based resin layer, or a polyvinyl chloride-based resin layer can be preferably used in consideration of performance, handleability, cost, and the like.
  • polyolefin-based resins, polyurethane-based resins and olefin-based elastomers are preferable from the viewpoint of thermal stability and light weight, and polyolefin-based resins and olefin-based elastomers are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of handleability.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably carried out in an aspect including a base material layer containing a polyolefin-based resin as a main component (in a proportion exceeding 50% by weight), that is, an embodiment using a polyolefin-based resin film as the base material layer.
  • a polyolefin resin film in which 50% by weight or more of the entire base material layer is a polyethylene (PE) resin and/or a polypropylene (PP) resin can be preferably used.
  • the total amount of the PE resin and the PP resin in the polyolefin resin film may account for 50% by weight or more of the entire base material layer.
  • the polyolefin resin film may be a blend of PE resin and PP resin.
  • the PP resin may be mainly composed of various polymers (propylene-based polymers) containing propylene as a constituent monomer. It may be a PP resin substantially composed of one or two or more propylene-based polymers.
  • propylene-based polymer includes a random copolymer of propylene and another monomer (random polypropylene) or a block copolymer (block polypropylene).
  • the concept of the propylene-based polymer here includes, for example, the following.
  • a homopolymer of propylene homopolypropylene
  • a random polypropylene containing propylene as a main monomer main constituent monomer, that is, a component occupying 50% by weight or more of the whole monomer.
  • a copolymer (block polypropylene) obtained by block copolymerizing propylene with another ⁇ -olefin (typically, one or more selected from ethylene and ⁇ -olefins having 4 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • a block polypropylene containing propylene as a main monomer main constituent monomer, that is, a component accounting for 50% by weight or more of the whole monomer).
  • the PE resin may be mainly composed of various polymers (ethylene-based polymers) containing ethylene as a constituent monomer. It may be a PE resin substantially composed of one or two or more ethylene-based polymers.
  • the ethylene-based polymer may be a homopolymer of ethylene, which is obtained by copolymerizing ethylene as a main monomer with another ⁇ -olefin as a sub-monomer (random copolymerization, block copolymerization, etc.). Good.
  • the ⁇ -olefin include propylene, 1-butene (which may be branched 1-butene), 1-hexene, 4-methyl-1-pentene, 1-octene and the like having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a PE resin containing an ethylene-based polymer as a main component, which is copolymerized with the ⁇ -olefin as the sub-monomer at a ratio of about 10% by weight or less (typically about 5% by weight or less) can be preferably used.
  • the PE resin also includes a PE resin containing a copolymer of ethylene with a monomer (functional group-containing monomer) having another functional group in addition to the polymerizable functional group, and a copolymer of the functional group-containing monomer with an ethylene-based polymer. It may be PE resin or the like.
  • the copolymer of ethylene and a functional group-containing monomer include ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), ethylene-acrylic acid copolymer (EAA), ethylene-methacrylic acid copolymer (EMAA), ethylene-acrylic.
  • Methyl acid copolymer EMA
  • EAA ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer
  • EMMA ethylene-methyl methacrylate copolymer
  • ethylene-(meth)acrylic acid that is, acrylic acid and/or methacrylic acid.
  • the density of the PE resin is not particularly limited.
  • the concept of the PE resin as used herein includes any of high density polyethylene (HDPE), medium density polyethylene (MDPE), low density polyethylene (LDPE) and linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE).
  • the density of the PE resin may be, for example, about 0.90 to 0.94 g/cm 3 .
  • Preferred PE resins include LDPE and LLDPE.
  • the PE resin may include one or more kinds of LDPE and one or more kinds of LLDPE.
  • the blending ratio of each LDPE or LLDPE and the blending ratio of LDPE and LLDPE are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set so that the PE resin exhibits desired characteristics.
  • an LLDPE film or LDPE containing LLDPE in an amount of more than 50% by weight preferably about 75% by weight or more, for example, about 90% by weight or more
  • a polyethylene resin film such as an LDPE film which is preferably contained in a proportion of about 75% by weight or more, for example about 90% by weight or more
  • a laminated resin film containing such a polyethylene resin film as a constituent may be used.
  • the base material layer contains a colorant.
  • the base material layer may include a resin film containing a colorant. This makes it possible to preferably obtain a protective sheet having a substantially uniform coloring on the entire sheet surface.
  • a base material layer made of a resin film in which a colorant is kneaded can be preferably used as the base material layer disclosed herein.
  • the resin film in which the colorant is kneaded refers to a resin film in which the colorant is mixed in the main constituent material (typically the resin material) of the resin film. The colorant is substantially contained in the resin film in a dispersed state.
  • the colorant-containing resin film is advantageous in terms of productivity as compared with the aspect in which the color layer is provided.
  • the colorant-containing base material layer (for example, a colorant-containing resin film) can be said to be colored in itself, and can be referred to as a colored base material layer (for example, a colored resin film).
  • the amount of the colorant used in the base material layer is not particularly limited, and may be an amount appropriately adjusted so as to achieve desired transparency and colorability.
  • the amount of the colorant used is suitably about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the weight of the base material layer, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 20% by weight). It can be a degree.
  • the resin film (for example, a polyolefin resin film) used as the base material layer of the protective sheet disclosed herein may optionally contain appropriate components that are allowed to be contained in the base material layer.
  • additives such as a filler, an antioxidant, a light stabilizer (which means a radical scavenger, an ultraviolet absorber, etc.), an antistatic agent, a plasticizer, a slip agent, an antiblocking agent, etc. are appropriately mixed. can do.
  • the amount of each additive compounded can be, for example, approximately the same as the amount normally compounded in the field of a resin film used as a base layer or the like of a protective sheet.
  • the base material layer may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure having two layers, three layers or more.
  • at least one layer is preferably any one of the resin films described above.
  • a base material layer having a structure in which 75% or more (more preferably 90% or more) of the thickness is a single-layer or multi-layer (typically single-layer) polyolefin resin film is preferable.
  • the entire base material layer may be a base material layer made of a single-layer or multi-layer polyolefin resin film. From the viewpoint of economy, a base material layer made of a resin film having a single-layer structure (for example, LLDPE film, LDPE film, etc.) can be preferably used.
  • the method for producing the base material layer may be any conventionally known method, and is not particularly limited.
  • a resin film when a resin film is adopted as the base material layer, a resin film produced by appropriately adopting a conventionally known general film forming method such as inflation molding, extrusion molding, T die cast molding, calender roll molding, etc. Can be used.
  • the surface of the resin film is subjected to corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ozone exposure, flame exposure, ultraviolet irradiation treatment.
  • Conventionally known surface treatments such as acid treatment, alkali treatment, and application of an undercoat agent may be applied.
  • Such a surface treatment may be a treatment for improving the adhesion between the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, in other words, the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the base material layer.
  • the polyolefin-based resin film is used as the base material layer, it is particularly significant to perform the above surface treatment.
  • the total light transmittance of the base material layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited. Generally, the total light transmittance of the substrate layer is about 3% or more, for example about 5% or more (typically about 10% or more). From the viewpoint of the adherend visibility through the protective sheet, the total light transmittance is appropriately about 20% or more (for example, about 30% or more), preferably about 40% or more, and more preferably about 50%. As described above, it is more preferably about 60% or more, particularly preferably about 70% or more, and may be about 80% or more (for example, about 90% or more).
  • the upper limit of the total light transmittance of the base material layer is not limited to a specific range, but from the viewpoint of the discriminability on the Low-E glass plate, it is suitable to be about 95% or less, and preferably Is about 90% or less, for example, about 80% or less, or about 70% or less.
  • the minimum transmittance of the base material layer disclosed herein at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is not particularly limited.
  • the minimum transmittance at the wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is usually about 2% or more, for example about 5% or more, and about 10% or more (for example, about 20% or more) is suitable.
  • the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is about 30% or more, more preferably about 40% or more, even more preferably about 50% or more (for example, about 60% or more).
  • the minimum transmittance at the wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is appropriately about 95% or less, preferably about 90% or less, from the viewpoint of discriminating property on the Low-E glass plate, and for example, about 90% or less. It may be 80% or less, about 70% or less, about 60% or less, or about 50% or less.
  • the haze value of the base material layer is not limited to a specific range. Usually, the haze value of the base material layer is about 99 or less (for example, 90 or less). From the viewpoint of suppressing transparency and diffusion and reflection that affect visibility, the haze value is suitably about 50 or less, preferably about 30 or less, more preferably about 20 or less, and It may be 10 or less (for example, about 5 or less). The lower limit of the haze value is not particularly limited, and it is suitable to be about 1 or more (for example, about 5 or more), and for example, about 10 or more. In another aspect, the haze value may be about 20 or more, and may be more than 50 (for example, about 80 or more, and further about 90 or more). By setting the high haze value within the range in which the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet is not impaired, the distinguishability of the protective sheet on the Low-E glass plate can be improved.
  • the method for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known or commonly used pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preparation method can be appropriately adopted.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preparation method has, for example, (a) an electric conductivity of less than 300 ⁇ S/cm; and (b) an amount of chloride ions less than 35 ⁇ g/mL. It is preferable to use an aqueous liquid satisfying at least one of the following. According to this method, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition that can prevent corrosion and the like can be obtained.
  • Such an adhesive composition is particularly preferably used for protecting Low-E glass plate.
  • the method for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may include a step of preparing the aqueous liquid.
  • the aqueous liquid satisfying the above (a) and/or (b) is desired from surface water, raw water including ground water (which may be well water), tap water, and treated water obtained by performing known water treatment. It is possible to obtain an aqueous liquid satisfying the electric conductivity and/or the amount of chloride ions of (1) by selecting, for example, by analyzing as necessary.
  • the above-mentioned aqueous liquid is obtained by subjecting an aqueous liquid such as raw water (untreated aqueous liquid) to known treatment such as filtration, membrane separation, ion exchange, distillation, physical adsorption, electrolysis and the like.
  • an aqueous liquid such as raw water (untreated aqueous liquid)
  • known treatment such as filtration, membrane separation, ion exchange, distillation, physical adsorption, electrolysis and the like.
  • the treatment by membrane separation using a reverse osmosis membrane, a nanofiltration membrane, an ultrafiltration membrane, a microfiltration membrane or the like is more preferable, and a reverse osmosis membrane is particularly preferable.
  • ion exchange is adopted as the water treatment method, cation exchange (using cation exchange resin), anion exchange (using anion exchange resin), or a mixed system thereof can be used, but corrosion, etc.
  • the untreated aqueous liquid used in the treatment step has an electric conductivity of 300 ⁇ S/cm or more and a chloride ion amount of 35 ⁇ g/mL or more.
  • the processing device is not particularly limited, and a known or common processing device can be used.
  • the treatment condition is not limited to a specific condition as long as it is appropriately set depending on the untreated water, the device, and the required water quality.
  • a polymer-containing liquid containing a polymer which may be a base polymer
  • the method disclosed herein may include a step of obtaining a polymer-containing liquid containing the aqueous liquid and the polymer.
  • the usage form of the aqueous liquid is not particularly limited as long as it is used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, and the timing of use is also not particularly limited.
  • the above aqueous liquid is also referred to as water for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
  • Examples of the form of use of the water for preparation include use as water for polymerization in polymerization of the above-mentioned polymer and water for post-polymerization added after polymerization (post-added water).
  • the resulting polymer-containing liquid may be used as it is as a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, or a mixture of the polymer-containing liquid and additional components may be used as a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
  • the PSA composition obtained by using the aqueous liquid may be in the form of a water-dispersed PSA composition in which at least a part (typically all) of the polymer is dispersed in the aqueous liquid.
  • the details of the polymer (typically a base polymer) used in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, the details of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, and other matters relating to the preparation of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition are as described above, and therefore, duplicate description will be given. Is omitted.
  • the above aqueous liquid is used as water for polymerization in emulsion polymerization.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preparation method disclosed herein may include a step of performing emulsion polymerization in the presence of the aqueous liquid to obtain a polymer.
  • the details of the polymer obtained by the emulsion polymerization are as described above, and thus the duplicate description is omitted.
  • the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is not particularly limited.
  • the chloride ions in the aqueous liquid are preferably limited to less than a predetermined amount, in which case the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid need not be less than 300 ⁇ S/cm.
  • the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid in another aspect is preferably less than 300 ⁇ S/cm from the viewpoint of limiting the amount of ions causing corrosion and the like.
  • Such an aqueous liquid can be used as one having a corrosion preventing property without quantifying the amount of chloride ions which is considered to be a main cause of corrosion.
  • the lower limit of the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid used may be a theoretical lower limit value (around 0.05 ⁇ S/cm at room temperature), but considering the production efficiency and the practically acceptable level, it is about 1 ⁇ S/cm or more. May be about 5 ⁇ S/cm or more, about 10 ⁇ S/cm or more, about 50 ⁇ S/cm or more (for example, about 100 ⁇ S/cm or more, and further about 200 ⁇ S/cm or more). It may be.
  • the electric conductivity of the aqueous liquid is measured at room temperature (23°C) using a commercially available electric conductivity meter. Specifically, it can be measured using a portable electric conductivity meter “ES-71” manufactured by Horiba Ltd. or its equivalent.
  • the amount of chloride ions in the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is limited. Specifically, when the electric conductivity of the aqueous liquid is 300 ⁇ S/cm or more, the chloride ion amount thereof is preferably less than 35 ⁇ g/mL. As a result, a corrosion prevention effect can be realized. Although not particularly limited, the chloride ion amount in the aqueous liquid is preferably less than 35 ⁇ g/mL even when the electric conductivity thereof is less than 300 ⁇ S/cm. In that case, the aqueous liquid used in the preparation of the PSA composition disclosed herein contains less than 35 ⁇ g/mL of chloride ion, regardless of its electrical conductivity.
  • the chloride content of the aqueous liquid is suitably less than 35 ⁇ g/mL (eg less than 30 ⁇ g/mL), preferably less than 25 ⁇ g/mL, more preferably less than 20 ⁇ g/mL, even more preferably 15 ⁇ g. /ML, particularly preferably less than 10 ⁇ g/mL, most preferably less than 5 ⁇ g/mL, and may be less than 3 ⁇ g/mL (eg less than 1 ⁇ g/mL).
  • the lower limit of the amount of chloride ions in the above aqueous liquid is ideally 0 ⁇ g/mL, but in consideration of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be approximately 1 ⁇ g/mL or more, approximately 3 ⁇ g. /ML or more.
  • the ratio (A Cl /C) of the chloride ion amount A Cl [ ⁇ g/mL] to the electrical conductivity C [ ⁇ S/cm] of the aqueous liquid is about 1 ⁇ 5 or less.
  • the ratio (A Cl /C) is not more than the predetermined value, it means that the chloride ion amount is relatively low among all the ions.
  • the above ratio (A Cl /C) is more preferably about 1 ⁇ 8 or less, may be about 1/10 or less, and may be about 1/15 or less.
  • the lower limit value of the ratio (A Cl /C) is not particularly limited and may be about 1/30 or more (for example, about 1/20 or more).
  • the amount of sulfate ion of the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect is limited from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion and the like.
  • the amount of sulfate ion in the aqueous liquid is usually about 50 ⁇ g/mL or less, about 35 ⁇ g/mL or less (for example, about 25 ⁇ g/mL or less) is suitable, and preferably about 15 ⁇ g/mL or less, more preferably It is about 5 ⁇ g/mL or less, more preferably about 2 ⁇ g/mL or less (for example, about 1 ⁇ g/mL or less).
  • the lower limit of the amount of sulfate ion of the aqueous liquid is ideally 0 ⁇ g/mL, but in consideration of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be about 10 ⁇ g/mL or more, about 20 ⁇ g. /ML or more.
  • the amount of nitrate ions in the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect is limited from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion and the like.
  • the amount of nitrate ion in the aqueous liquid is usually about 30 ⁇ g/mL or less, about 20 ⁇ g/mL or less (for example, about 10 ⁇ g/mL or less) is suitable, and preferably about 7 ⁇ g/mL or less, more preferably It is about 5 ⁇ g/mL or less, more preferably about 2 ⁇ g/mL or less (for example, about 1 ⁇ g/mL or less).
  • the lower limit of the amount of nitrate ions of the above aqueous liquid is ideally 0 ⁇ g/mL, but in consideration of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be about 1 ⁇ g/mL or more, about 3 ⁇ g. /ML or more, or about 5 ⁇ g/mL or more (for example, 10 ⁇ g/mL or more).
  • the total amount of nitrate ion, sulfate ion, and chloride ion is about 80 ⁇ g/mL or less.
  • the total amount of the three ions is preferably less than 50 ⁇ g/mL, more preferably less than 30 ⁇ g/mL, even more preferably less than 15 ⁇ g/mL, and approximately 10 ⁇ g/mL or less (for example, approximately 5 ⁇ g/mL or less). May be.
  • the lower limit of the total amount of the three types of ions in the aqueous liquid is ideally 0 ⁇ g/mL, but may be approximately 1 ⁇ g/mL or more from the viewpoint of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, and the like. It may be about 5 ⁇ g/mL or more, or about 10 ⁇ g/mL or more (for example, 30 ⁇ g/mL or more).
  • the amount of anions (typically chloride ions) among the ions contained in the aqueous liquid is not particularly limited.
  • the amount of cations in the aqueous liquid can be in the range of having an electrical conductivity of less than 300 ⁇ S/cm.
  • the amount of calcium ions and magnesium ions removed by general water softening treatment is not particularly limited, and the amount of calcium ions and magnesium ions in the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is 1 ⁇ g/mL. Or more, about 10 ⁇ g/mL or more, or 20 ⁇ g/mL or more.
  • the amount of chloride ion, amount of sulfate ion, amount of nitrate ion, amount of calcium ion, and amount of magnesium ion of the aqueous liquid can be determined by ion chromatography using each commercially available ion standard solution (for example, available from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.). Can be measured. Specifically, it is measured by the following method.
  • Ion chromatography measurement conditions are as follows. (Measurement condition) Anion analysis: Device: "ICS-3000" made by Thermo Fisher Scientific Separation column: Dionex IonPac AS18-fast (4mm x 250mm) Guard column: Dionex IonPac AG18-fast (4mm x 50mm) Removal system: Dionex AERS-500 (external mode) Detector: Electric conductivity detector Eluent: KOH aqueous solution (using eluent generator cartridge) Eluent flow rate: 1.0 mL/min Sample injection volume: 250 ⁇ L Cation analysis: Equipment: "DX-320" made by Thermo Fisher Scientific Separation column: Dionex Ion Pac CS16 (5mm x 250mm) Guard column: Dionex Ion Pac CG16 (5mm x 50mm) Removal system: Dionex CSRS-500 (recycle mode) Detector: Electric conductivity detector Eluent: KOH aqueous solution (using eluent generator
  • the aqueous liquid disclosed herein is a liquid containing water (H 2 O) as a main component, and may contain an organic solvent such as alcohol in a ratio smaller than that of water.
  • a liquid having a water content of more than 50% by volume is used as the aqueous liquid.
  • the proportion of water in the aqueous liquid is usually about 90% by volume or more, and about 99% by volume or more (for example, 99.9% by volume or more) is suitable.
  • the amount of chloride ions measured by hot water extraction is less than 8.9 ⁇ g per 1 g of the protective sheet (for example, about 8.5 ⁇ g or less). Appropriate. As a result, it is easy to obtain a structure that prevents corrosion or the like in the Low-E glass plate that is the object of protection for a long period of time, and the protective sheet tends to have excellent long-term reliability.
  • the amount of chloride ions per 1 g of the protective sheet is preferably less than 8.0 ⁇ g, more preferably less than 7.0 ⁇ g, still more preferably less than 6.5 ⁇ g, particularly preferably less than 6.0 ⁇ g (eg less than 5.5 ⁇ g). ..
  • the lower limit of the amount of chloride ions per 1 g of the protective sheet is ideally 0 ⁇ g, but from the viewpoint of production efficiency and practically acceptable level, it may be approximately 1 ⁇ g or more, or approximately 3 ⁇ g or more. Or about 5 ⁇ g or more.
  • the chloride ion amount per 1 g of the protective sheet is measured by the following method.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein has an initial peel strength of about 0.01 N/20 mm or more, which is measured at a peeling speed of 0.3 m/min and a peeling angle of 180 degrees, 30 minutes after being attached to a Low-E glass plate. Is suitable.
  • the protective sheet having the above initial peel strength after being adhered to the adherend, adheres well to the adherend within a relatively short time, and is unlikely to be peeled off from the adherend, It can exhibit excellent protection performance.
  • the initial peel strength can be about 0.05 N/20 mm or greater (eg, about 0.1 N/20 mm or greater).
  • the initial peel strength can be about 0.5 N/20 mm or greater (eg, about 1 N/20 mm or greater).
  • the upper limit of the initial peeling strength is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of light peeling property, about 5 N/20 mm or less is suitable, and about 2.5 N/20 mm or less (for example, about 2 N/20 mm or less) is preferable.
  • the initial peel strength is measured by the following method.
  • a protective sheet to be measured is cut into a strip having a width of 20 mm and a length of 100 mm to prepare a test piece. Under a standard environment of 23° C. and 50% RH, this test piece is pressure-bonded to a Low-E glass plate as an adherend by reciprocating a 2 kg rubber roller twice. After holding this sample in the standard environment for 30 minutes, under the standard environment, using a universal tensile tester, under conditions of a tensile speed of 0.3 m/min and a peel angle of 180 degrees, the initial peel strength [N /20 mm] is measured.
  • the Low-E glass plate product number “RSFL6AS” (100 mm ⁇ 100 mm) manufactured by Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd. is used.
  • the adherend any low-E glass plate can be used without particular limitation, and equivalent products of the above products or other commercially available low-E glass plates may be used.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein has a peel strength of about 5 N measured with a pulling speed of 0.3 m/min and a peel angle of 180 degrees after being attached to a Low-E glass plate and stored at 50°C for 7 days. It is preferably /20 mm or less.
  • a protective sheet satisfying these characteristics has sufficiently suppressed adhesive strength over time even if it is adhered to an adherend for a relatively long period of time, and can maintain its light releasability from the adherend. Therefore, the workability of removing from the adherend is excellent.
  • a protective sheet having a peel strength of about 4 N/20 mm or less (more preferably about 2 N/20 mm or less), better peeling workability can be realized.
  • the temporal peel strength is about 0.05 N/20 mm or more. Is suitable, preferably about 0.1 N/20 mm or more, more preferably about 0.3 N/20 mm or more.
  • the time-dependent peel strength may be about 1 N/20 mm or more. The peel strength with time is measured by the following method.
  • a protective sheet to be measured is cut into a strip having a width of 20 mm and a length of 100 mm to prepare a test piece. Under a standard environment of 23° C. and 50% RH, this test piece is pressure-bonded to a Low-E glass plate as an adherend by reciprocating a 2 kg rubber roller twice. This sample was stored in an environment of 50° C. for 7 days, and then kept in a standard environment of 23° C. and 50% RH for 1 hour, and then, in the standard environment, a tensile rate of 0. The peel strength with time [N/20 mm] is measured under the conditions of 3 m/min and a peel angle of 180 degrees. The Low-E glass plate used as the adherend is the same as in the case of the above initial peel strength measurement.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein has a ratio (that is, P 2 /P 1 ratio) of the temporal peel strength P 2 [N/20 mm] to the initial peel strength P 1 [N/20 mm]. It can be 5 times or less.
  • a small P 2 /P 1 ratio means that the peel strength does not increase with time.
  • the initial adhesiveness and the light releasability during the peeling work are suitably compatible with each other.
  • the P 2 /P 1 ratio may be preferably 4 or less, more preferably 3 or less, still more preferably 2 or less, for example 1.8 or less, and 1.5 or less, further 1.3. It may be the following.
  • P 2 / P 1 ratio may typically be in is 0.8 or more, such as one or more.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein includes the protective sheet (the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be included when the protective sheet is heated at 80° C. for 30 minutes, but the release liner is not included.
  • the total amount of volatile organic compounds (VOC: volatile organic compounds) emitted from 1 g (hereinafter, also simply referred to as VOC emission amount) is 1000 ⁇ g (hereinafter, this may be referred to as “ ⁇ g/g”). ) The following is preferable.
  • the VOC emission amount is more preferably 500 ⁇ g/g or less (for example, 300 ⁇ g/g or less, typically 100 ⁇ g/g or less).
  • the VOC emission amount is measured by the following method.
  • VOC measurement test A protective sheet is cut into a predetermined size (here, a size of about 5 cm 2 ) and the release liner is peeled off to form a sample piece. Then, the vial is heated at 80° C. for 30 minutes, and 1.0 mL of heated gas (sample gas) is injected into a gas chromatograph (GC) measuring device using a headspace autosampler (HSS). Based on the obtained gas chromatogram, the amount of gas generated from the above-mentioned sample piece is obtained as an n-decane conversion amount. From the obtained value, the amount of VOC emission ( ⁇ g/g) per 1 g of the protective sheet (excluding the release liner) is determined.
  • sample gas gas chromatograph
  • HSS headspace autosampler
  • the n-decane conversion amount is determined by applying the calibration curve of n-decane prepared in advance, by regarding the detected intensity of the generated gas obtained by GC Mass as the detected intensity of n-decane.
  • the settings of HSS and GC are as follows.
  • HSS Model "7694" manufactured by Agilent Technologies Heating time: 30 minutes Pressurization time: 0.12 minutes Loop filling time: 0.12 minutes Loop equilibration time: 0.05 minutes
  • Injection time 3 minutes
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein is suitable for a surface protective sheet for a glass plate used as a building material such as a window glass.
  • the glass plate to be attached typically includes a glass substrate and a coating layer laminated on the glass substrate, and the coating layer may include a metal layer.
  • the glass plate may be a glass plate having a Low-E layer on one surface.
  • the Low-E layer usually includes a metal layer such as silver.
  • the low-E layer forming surface can be exposed until two glass plates including the Low-E glass plate are paired with the Low-E layer side surface facing inward. ..
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably used for the purpose of preventing the surface on which the Low-E layer is formed from damage, abrasion, deterioration, corrosion and the like. That is, the protective sheet can be used as a low-E layer forming surface protective sheet.
  • Low-E glass sheets have higher heat shielding properties and heat insulating properties than conventional glass sheets, and can improve the cooling and heating efficiency of indoor spaces, and are therefore widely used as building materials such as window glass.
  • the technology disclosed herein can indirectly contribute to energy saving and reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by being used for manufacturing such a material.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably used for a large-area adherend surface whose peel strength tends to be limited in terms of workability for removal.
  • the protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably in a mode of covering the entire surface of the adherend having a width of about 1.5 m or more, for example, about 2 m or more (typically about 3 m or more, further about 3.3 m or more). Used.
  • the length of the adherend surface is equal to or larger than the width.
  • the flat plate having a large area preferably, a flat plate having a smooth surface
  • glass plates for building materials such as window glass are becoming larger in area in terms of efficiency of production, transportation and the like.
  • the entire surface of a glass sheet having such a large area (for example, a surface width of more than 2.6 m, typically a surface width of about 3 m or more, and even about 3.3 m or more) (typically The low-E glass plate is preferably used in such a manner as to cover the entire surface on which the Low-E layer is formed). Since the protective sheet disclosed herein is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, it is easy to determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet on the Low-E glass plate, and the workability of removing the protective sheet is excellent. In addition, the glass sheet can be inspected for defects through the protective sheet while the glass sheet is protected by the protective sheet. Furthermore, according to a preferred aspect of the technology disclosed herein, excellent corrosion resistance and the like can be realized for the adherend having a large area as described above while maintaining light peelability.
  • the protective sheet according to some aspects may have a suppressed adhesive force over time, for example, the period of application to the adherend (which may be the period of protection of the adherend) is relatively long. Good removal workability can be exhibited even (typically for 2 weeks or longer, for example, for 4 weeks or longer). Therefore, for example, it can be suitably used even in a usage mode in which the period from attachment to an adherend (specifically, Low-E glass plate) to removal from the adherend can be 2 weeks or more (eg, 4 weeks or more). Can be done.
  • the period from attachment to an adherend specifically, Low-E glass plate
  • a method of manufacturing a glass unit A step (A) of preparing a Low-E glass plate including a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate; Attaching a protective sheet to the surface of the Low-E layer of the Low-E glass plate (B); An optional step (C) of carrying out at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling on the Low-E glass plate having the protective sheet attached thereto; A step (D) of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate; A step (E) of assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate; Including, Here, the protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more, A method in which at least a part of the sheet surface has at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more.
  • the protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more, Low-E having a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more; How to protect glass plates.
  • the method further includes a step (removal step) of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate, Between the attaching step and the removing step, optionally, at least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling of the Low-E glass sheet to which the protective sheet is attached is included.
  • the Low-E glass plate has a width of 1.5 m or more
  • the said pasting process is a method as described in said (11) or (12) including the process of covering one whole surface of the said Low-E glass plate with at least one said protective sheet.
  • At least a part of the sheet surface has a region satisfying at least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more.
  • Protective sheet A protective sheet having a colored region on at least a part of the sheet surface.
  • the protective sheet according to any of (21) to (30) above, wherein at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is colored.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least one selected from the group consisting of acrylic polymers, urethane polymers, polyester polymers, polyether polymers, rubber polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers, and fluorine polymers.
  • a method for manufacturing a glass unit comprising: Preparing a Low-E glass plate comprising a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate; Attaching the protective sheet according to any one of (21) to (35) to the surface of the Low-E layer of the Low-E glass plate; An optional step of performing at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning, and handling on the Low-E glass plate to which the protective sheet is attached; Removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate; Assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate; A method of manufacturing a glass unit, comprising:
  • Example 1 Monomer raw material consisting of 58 parts of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 40 parts of n-butyl methacrylate and 2 parts of acrylic acid, and a surfactant (trade name "Aqualon KH-1025" manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd., EO addition mole number 30 or less) 3 parts of polyoxyethylene-1-(allyloxymethyl)alkyl ether ammonium sulfate) and 150 parts of ion-exchanged water are mixed and emulsified with an emulsifying machine (homomixer) while introducing nitrogen gas to obtain a monomer raw material. An emulsion was prepared.
  • a surfactant trade name "Aqualon KH-1025" manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd., EO addition mole number 30 or less
  • 3 parts of polyoxyethylene-1-(allyloxymethyl)alkyl ether ammonium sulfate
  • the above emulsified liquid was placed in a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a condenser and a stirrer, and heated to a liquid temperature of 50°C while stirring under a nitrogen stream.
  • a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a condenser and a stirrer, and heated to a liquid temperature of 50°C while stirring under a nitrogen stream.
  • 0.03 part of 2,2′-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine)dihydrochloride manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., trade name “V-50”
  • V-50 2,2′-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine)dihydrochloride
  • an oxazoline-based cross-linking agent (trade name "Epocros WS-500” manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) was mixed with 100 parts of a non-volatile component contained in the aqueous dispersion.
  • An adhesive composition was prepared.
  • an LDPE film having a thickness of 46 ⁇ m (blue LDPE film) in which a blue pigment was kneaded was prepared by inflation molding under the conditions such as temperature and speed. Corona discharge treatment was applied to one surface of the blue LDPE film, and the adhesive composition prepared above was applied to the corona-treated surface (first surface) with a bar coater so that the thickness after drying was 6 ⁇ m. ..
  • Example 2 A 46 ⁇ m-thick LDPE film in which a green pigment was kneaded was produced by the same method as in Example 1, and the protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that this was used as a supporting substrate.
  • Example 3 As a supporting base material, a 55 ⁇ m-thick LDPE film containing no pigment was produced by adjusting the conditions such as temperature and speed by inflation molding and used as a supporting base material. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
  • Example 4 A protective film according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3, except that an LDPE film having a thickness of 55 ⁇ m, in which a blue pigment was kneaded, was produced in the same manner as in Example 3, and this was used as a supporting base material.
  • Example 5 A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that an LDPE film having a thickness of 55 ⁇ m, in which a white pigment was kneaded, was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3, and this was used as a supporting substrate.
  • Example 6 A 50 ⁇ m-thick PE/PP blend film (trade name “Tretec CF470”, manufactured by Toray Film Co., Ltd.) containing no pigment was used as a supporting substrate.
  • a protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
  • Example 7 A 50 ⁇ m thick PE/PP blend film (trade name “Tretec CF470”, manufactured by Toray Film Co., Ltd.) in which a blue pigment was kneaded was used as a supporting substrate.
  • a protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
  • Example 8> A 38 ⁇ m-thick PET film (trade name “Diafoil W100”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) in which a white pigment was kneaded was used as a supporting substrate.
  • a protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
  • Example 9 As a supporting base material, a transparent LDPE film having a thickness of 60 ⁇ m was produced by inflation molding under controlled conditions such as temperature and speed. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that this was used as a supporting substrate.
  • Example 10 As the supporting base material, a PET film (trade name “Diafoil B100”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.) having a thickness of 25 ⁇ m in which a black pigment was kneaded was used. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
  • a Low-E glass plate having a width of 1500 mm and a length of 1000 mm was prepared and a protective sheet was attached thereto. Place the Low-E glass plate with a protective sheet upright at a position 3 m away from the fluorescent lamp, and place the protective sheet affixing surface of the Low-E glass plate at a position 1 m away from the protective sheet affixing surface side of the Low-E glass plate. It was visually observed to evaluate whether the presence or absence of the protective sheet can be confirmed. The case where the protective sheet on the Low-E glass plate was visible was judged as " ⁇ ", and the case where it was not visible was judged as "x".
  • Low-E glass plate defect inspection Prepare a Low-E glass plate with a width of 1500 mm and a length of 1000 mm, which has streaky defects with a length of 3 to 5 cm (3 places) and chipping scratches with a diameter of 1 to 5 mm (3 places) on the surface.
  • a protective sheet was attached to. Place a Low-E glass plate with a protective sheet at a position 3 m away from the fluorescent lamp, and place the protective sheet affixing surface of the Low-E glass plate at a position 1 m away from the protective sheet affixing surface side of the Low-E glass plate. It was visually observed, and the defect inspection property of the Low-E glass plate was evaluated through the protective sheet according to the following criteria. (Evaluation criteria) 4 points: All streak defects and chipping scratches were visible. 3 points: Stripe defects and chipping scratches were almost visible. 2 points: Either streak defects or chipping scratches were visually recognized. 1 point: No streak defects and chipping scratches were visible.
  • Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the protective sheet of each example. Table 1 also shows an outline of each example (base material type, color, total light transmittance, minimum transmittance in visible light region (wavelength 450 to 800 nm), haze value).
  • Examples 1 to 8 had good visibility and were easy to discriminate on the glass plate.
  • a region which satisfies at least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more; Have at least a portion.
  • Example 9 which does not satisfy the above (a) and (b), good visibility was not obtained. From this result, it can be seen that the protective sheet having the region satisfying at least one of the above (a) and (b) on at least a part of the sheet surface is easy to discriminate on the Low-E glass plate.
  • the protective sheets of Examples 1 to 8 had a total light transmittance of not less than the predetermined value, and it was possible to inspect the Low-E glass plate for defects.
  • the protective sheet of Example 10 which does not have the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more does not have a good evaluation result of the defect inspection property of the Low-E glass plate, and the Low-E glass plate through the protective sheet is poor. The inspection was difficult. From this result, it can be seen that a protective sheet having a region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more enables a Low-E glass plate inspection through the protective sheet. The effect can be better exhibited in a structure having a width of 1.5 m or more.
  • Base material layer 1A One surface 1B: Other surface 2: Adhesive layer 2A: Adhesive surface 10: Protective sheet 100: Low-E glass plate 110: Glass substrate 120: Low-E layer 200: Protective sheet 300 : Glass unit 320: Other glass plate 340: Spacer

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Geochemistry & Mineralogy (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Packaging Frangible Articles (AREA)
  • Surface Treatment Of Glass (AREA)
  • Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a protection sheet for a Low-E glass plate that is easily discriminated on an adherend. Provided is a protection sheet for a Low-E glass plate. The protection sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more. Further, the protection sheet has a region, which satisfies at least one of (a) in which minimum transmittance is 90% or less in a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm and (b) in which a haze value is 10 or more, in at least a part of a sheet surface. Further, the protection sheet preferably has a region in which total light transmittance is 3% or more.

Description

保護シートおよびガラスユニットの製造方法Method for manufacturing protective sheet and glass unit

 本発明は、保護シートおよびガラスユニットの製造方法に関する。
 本出願は、2019年2月21日に出願された日本国特許出願2019-029737号に基づく優先権を主張しており、その出願の全内容は本明細書中に参照として組み入れられている。
The present invention relates to a protective sheet and a method for manufacturing a glass unit.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-029737 filed on February 21, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference.

 各種物品を加工したり運搬したりする際に、その表面の損傷(傷や汚れ、腐食等)を防止する目的で、該表面に保護シートを接着して保護する技術が知られている。その保護対象は多岐にわたっており、例えば、近年広く普及しているLow-E(Low-Emissivity:低放射)層付きガラス板(Low-Eガラス板)にも保護シートが利用されている。Low-Eガラス板は、Low-E層による室内空間の冷暖房効率改善効果から、窓ガラス等の建築材料として好ましく用いられている。Low-Eガラス板の製造では、通常、Low-Eガラス板と他のガラス板とを、Low-E層側表面を内側に向けてペアガラスとするまで、そのままでは露出するLow-E層表面に対して接着剤層を介して保護シートが貼り付けられる。これによって、Low-E層は損傷、摩耗、劣化、腐食等から保護される。ガラスユニットの製法に関する従来技術を開示する先行技術文献として、特許文献1および2が挙げられる。 A technique is known in which a protective sheet is adhered to the surface of various articles for the purpose of preventing damage (scratches, stains, corrosion, etc.) on the surfaces when processing or transporting them. The objects of protection are wide-ranging, and for example, a protective sheet is also used for a glass plate with a Low-E (Low-Emissivity) layer that has been widely spread in recent years (Low-E glass plate). The Low-E glass plate is preferably used as a building material such as a window glass because of the effect of improving the cooling and heating efficiency of the indoor space by the Low-E layer. In the manufacture of Low-E glass plates, the Low-E glass plate and other glass plates are usually exposed as they are until the Low-E layer side surface faces inward to form a pair of glasses. A protective sheet is attached to the substrate via the adhesive layer. This protects the Low-E layer from damage, wear, deterioration, corrosion, etc. Patent Documents 1 and 2 are cited as prior art documents disclosing conventional techniques relating to the manufacturing method of the glass unit.

 表面保護の用途では、剥離可能な接着手段として粘着剤(感圧接着剤ともいう。以下同じ。)が好ましく用いられ得る。一般に、粘着剤は、室温付近の温度域において柔らかい固体(粘弾性体)の状態を呈し、圧力により簡単に被着体に接着する性質を有する。粘着剤を用いた表面保護シートは、典型的には、樹脂等の材料からなるシート状基材の片面に粘着剤層を有し、その粘着剤層を被着体(保護対象物)に接着することで、保護目的を達成し得るように構成されている。表面保護シートとして用いられ得る粘着シートを開示する先行技術文献としては、特許文献3~6が挙げられる。特許文献3には金属板の絞り加工時に該金属板の表面を保護する表面保護シートが、特許文献4には偏光板等の光学フィルムの表面保護シートがそれぞれ開示されている。特許文献5は、セルフクリーニング性を有する親水性塗装板の表面保護シートに関するものである。特許文献6は、塗膜が形成される金属板用表面保護シートの剥離容易性や汚染性低減に取り組んでいる。 For surface protection, a pressure-sensitive adhesive (also referred to as a pressure-sensitive adhesive. The same applies hereinafter) can be preferably used as a peelable adhesive means. Generally, the pressure-sensitive adhesive is in the state of a soft solid (viscoelastic body) in a temperature range near room temperature and has a property of easily adhering to an adherend by pressure. A surface protective sheet using an adhesive typically has an adhesive layer on one side of a sheet-like base material made of a resin or the like, and the adhesive layer is adhered to an adherend (object to be protected). By doing so, the protection purpose can be achieved. Patent Documents 3 to 6 are mentioned as prior art documents disclosing an adhesive sheet that can be used as a surface protection sheet. Patent Document 3 discloses a surface protection sheet that protects the surface of a metal plate during drawing, and Patent Document 4 discloses a surface protection sheet of an optical film such as a polarizing plate. Patent Document 5 relates to a surface protective sheet of a hydrophilic coated plate having a self-cleaning property. Patent Document 6 addresses the ease of peeling and the reduction of contamination of the surface protection sheet for metal plates on which a coating film is formed.

欧州特許第2150669号明細書European Patent No. 2150669 国際公開第2016/139318号International Publication No. 2016/139318 日本国特許出願公開2017-186517号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-186517 日本国特許第5719194号公報Japanese Patent No. 5719194 日本国特許出願公開2012-131976号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication 2012-131976 日本国特許第3571460号公報Japanese Patent No. 3571460

 Low-Eガラス板は、保護シートによって保護された状態で輸送や加工、洗浄等が実施されるところ、その保護期間中においても、保護対象物の表面に水等の異物の進入がないか、あるいは欠陥や損傷がないか検査され得る。そのため、Low-Eガラス板用保護シートは、当該保護シート越しに保護対象物を視認し得る透明性を有することが望ましい。また、上記保護シートは、保護目的を達成した後、適当なタイミングで保護対象物から除去される。しかし、保護対象物がガラス板のような透明物の場合、保護シートも透明であると両者の判別がし難く、保護シートの剥がし忘れが生じ得る。特に、Low-Eガラス板に代表される窓ガラス等の建材用ガラス板は、生産、運搬等の効率面から大面積化が進んでおり、幅1.5m以上(例えば2m以上、さらには3.3m以上)のサイズを有するものがある。このような大面積のガラス板では、保護シートの除去作業中、保護シート端部まで視界に入り切らず、ガラス板表面における保護シートの有無を瞬時には判別しにくいという事情がある。 The Low-E glass plate is transported, processed, washed, etc. while being protected by a protective sheet, and during the protection period, there is no foreign matter such as water entering the surface of the object to be protected, Alternatively it can be inspected for defects or damage. Therefore, it is desirable that the Low-E glass sheet protective sheet has transparency so that the object to be protected can be visually recognized through the protective sheet. Further, the protection sheet is removed from the object to be protected at an appropriate timing after the purpose of protection is achieved. However, when the object to be protected is a transparent material such as a glass plate, it is difficult to distinguish between the two if the protective sheet is also transparent, and forgetting to peel off the protective sheet may occur. In particular, glass plates for building materials such as window glass represented by Low-E glass plates are becoming larger in area from the viewpoint of efficiency of production, transportation, etc., and have a width of 1.5 m or more (for example, 2 m or more, further 3 m or more). Some have a size of 0.3 m or more). With such a large-area glass plate, there is a situation in which it is difficult to instantaneously determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet on the surface of the glass plate during the removal work of the protective sheet, because the end of the protective sheet cannot be completely seen.

 本発明は、上記の事情に鑑みて創出されたものであり、保護シート越しにLow-Eガラス板を検査することが可能であり、Low-Eガラス板上で判別しやすいLow-Eガラス板用保護シートを提供することを目的とする。関連する他の目的は、上記保護シートを用いたガラスユニットの製造方法を提供することである。 The present invention was created in view of the above circumstances, it is possible to inspect a Low-E glass plate through a protective sheet, and a Low-E glass plate that is easy to distinguish on a Low-E glass plate. The purpose is to provide a protective sheet for use. Another related object is to provide a method for manufacturing a glass unit using the protective sheet.

 本明細書によると、Low-Eガラス板用保護シートが提供される。この保護シートは1.5メートル(以下「m」と略す。)以上の幅を有する。また、全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有する。さらに、(a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する。上記の構成によると、一枚または少ない枚数で大面積のLow-Eガラス板の保護を実現することができる。また、保護シートは、全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有するので、Low-Eガラス板に貼り付けた状態で、保護シート越しにLow-Eガラス板を検査することが可能である。例えば、Low-Eガラス板表面に水等の異物が存在する場合には、保護シートを貼り直したり取り換えたりすることで、上記異物を原因とする不具合の発生を予防することができる。また保護シートは、(a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有するので、Low-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすく、保護シートの端部まで視界に入り切らないような大面積のLow-Eガラス板の保護に用いられた場合にも、当該ガラス板の中央部分を見るだけで保護シートの有無を判別することができる。 According to the present specification, a protection sheet for Low-E glass plate is provided. This protective sheet has a width of 1.5 meters (hereinafter abbreviated as "m") or more. Further, it has a region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more. Furthermore, at least a part of the sheet surface has a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more. According to the above configuration, it is possible to protect a large-area Low-E glass plate with one sheet or a small number of sheets. In addition, since the protective sheet has a region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more, it is possible to inspect the Low-E glass plate through the protective sheet while being attached to the Low-E glass plate. .. For example, when foreign matter such as water is present on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, by reattaching or replacing the protective sheet, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects caused by the foreign matter. Further, the protective sheet has a region satisfying at least one of (a) minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) haze value of 10 or more on at least a part of the sheet surface. Since it has a low-E glass plate surface, it is easy to see on the surface of the low-E glass plate, and even when it is used to protect a large-area Low-E glass plate that does not reach the end of the protective sheet, the center of the glass plate The presence or absence of the protective sheet can be determined simply by looking at the part.

 好ましい一態様では、前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域のヘイズ値は50以下である。ヘイズ値が所定値以下である領域を有する保護シートは、透明性に優れ、反射が制限される傾向があるので、保護シート越しの被着体視認性に優れる。 In a preferred aspect, the haze value of the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more is 50 or less. A protective sheet having a region having a haze value of not more than a predetermined value is excellent in transparency and tends to be limited in reflection, and thus is excellent in visibility of an adherend through the protective sheet.

 好ましい一態様では、前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域は、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が30%以上である。このような構成によると、保護シート越しに被着体の視認がしやすい。 In a preferred embodiment, the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 30% or more in the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more. With such a configuration, the adherend can be easily viewed through the protective sheet.

 好ましい一態様では、前記シート面の全体が、前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域である。上記構成によると、保護シートの判別がより容易となる。 In a preferred aspect, the entire sheet surface is a region that satisfies at least one of (a) and (b) above. According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to identify the protective sheet.

 好ましい一態様では、前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域は着色領域である。シート面に着色領域を設けることで、より優れた保護シート判別性が得られやすい。 In a preferred embodiment, the area satisfying at least one of (a) and (b) above is a colored area. By providing the colored area on the sheet surface, it is easy to obtain more excellent protection sheet discrimination.

 好ましい一態様に係る保護シートは、シート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている。上記構成によると、保護シートの判別がより容易となる。例えば、保護シートの一部(例えば小片)が千切れ等により被着体に残存しても発見しやすく、除去しやすい。 The protective sheet according to a preferred aspect is almost uniformly colored over the entire sheet surface. According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to identify the protective sheet. For example, even if a part (for example, a small piece) of the protective sheet remains on the adherend due to tearing or the like, it is easy to find and remove.

 好ましい一態様に係る保護シートは、青色または緑色に着色されている。このように構成することで、赤色や黄色と比べて比較的目立たない配色でLow-Eガラス板上で十分な視認性が得られ、また周辺環境とも調和しやすい。 The protective sheet according to a preferred embodiment is colored blue or green. By configuring in this way, it is possible to obtain sufficient visibility on the Low-E glass plate with a color that is relatively unnoticeable compared to red and yellow, and it is also easy to harmonize with the surrounding environment.

 好ましい一態様に係る保護シートは、基材層と、該基材層に支持された粘着剤層と、を備える。また、前記基材層および前記粘着剤層のうち少なくとも一方が着色されている。このように構成することにより、ここに開示される技術による効果を好ましく実現することができる。 The protective sheet according to a preferred aspect includes a base material layer and an adhesive layer supported by the base material layer. Further, at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is colored. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably realize the effect of the technique disclosed herein.

 好ましい一態様では、前記基材層は、着色剤を含む樹脂フィルムからなる。このように構成することにより、シート面全体がほぼ均一な着色を有する構成を好ましく得ることができる。 In a preferred embodiment, the base material layer is made of a resin film containing a colorant. With this structure, it is possible to preferably obtain a structure in which the entire sheet surface is colored almost uniformly.

 一態様では、前記粘着剤層は、アクリル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ポリエーテル系ポリマー、ゴム系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリアミド系ポリマーおよびフッ素系ポリマーからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種のポリマーを50重量%以上の割合で含む。上記粘着剤層を備える構成において、ここに開示される技術による効果は好ましく実現される。 In one aspect, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least selected from the group consisting of acrylic polymers, urethane polymers, polyester polymers, polyether polymers, rubber polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers and fluorine polymers. It contains one polymer in a proportion of 50% by weight or more. In the configuration including the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the effect of the technique disclosed herein is preferably realized.

 また、本明細書によると、他の一態様に係るLow-Eガラス板用保護シートが提供される。この保護シートは1.5m以上の幅を有する。また、(a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する。保護シートが上記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有することで、Low-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすいという効果が得られる。このような保護シートは、その端部まで視界に入り切らないような大面積のLow-Eガラス板の保護に用いられた場合にも、当該ガラス板の中央部分を見るだけで保護シートの有無を判別することができる。なお、使用態様によってはLow-Eガラス板を検査するための透明性は必須でない場合があり、そのような態様において上記構成は有意義である。 Also, according to the present specification, a Low-E glass plate protective sheet according to another aspect is provided. This protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more. Further, at least a part of the sheet surface has a region satisfying at least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more. Since the protective sheet has a region satisfying at least one of the above (a) and (b) on at least a part of the sheet surface, the effect of being easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate can be obtained. Even when such a protective sheet is used to protect a large-area Low-E glass plate that does not reach the end of the field of view, just by looking at the center of the glass plate, the presence or absence of the protective sheet Can be determined. In some cases, the transparency for inspecting the Low-E glass plate is not essential depending on the mode of use, and in such a mode, the above configuration is meaningful.

 また、本明細書によると、ガラスユニットの製造方法が提供される。この方法は:ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板を用意する工程と;前記Low-Eガラス板の前記Low-E層表面に、ここに開示されるいずれかの保護シートを貼り付ける工程と;前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを実施する任意の工程と;前記Low-Eガラス板から前記保護シートを除去する工程と;前記Low-Eガラス板を用いてガラスユニットを組み立てる工程と;を含む。
 上記の方法によると、Low-Eガラス板は、輸送、保管、切断等の加工処理、水洗等の洗浄、各種ハンドリング等の間、保護シートの存在によって、損傷や摩耗、劣化、腐食等のリスクを回避することができる。また、ここに開示される保護シートを用いることで、一枚または少ない枚数で、大面積のLow-Eガラス板の保護を実現することができる。また保護シートは、上述のように、Low-Eガラス板に貼り付けた状態で保護シート越しにLow-Eガラス板を検査することが可能である。さらに保護シートは、上述のようにLow-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすく、大面積のLow-Eガラス板に対して保護シートの有無の判別がしやすく、保護シートの除去作業性に優れる。上記の方法によると、ガラスユニットの製造において、Low-Eガラス板の保護を達成しつつ、ガラスユニットを生産性よく製造することができる。
Further, according to the present specification, a method for manufacturing a glass unit is provided. The method comprises: preparing a Low-E glass plate comprising a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate; A step of attaching any of the protective sheets disclosed in 1.; at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling for the Low-E glass sheet to which the protective sheet is attached. A step of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate; and a step of assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate.
According to the above method, the Low-E glass plate has a risk of damage, abrasion, deterioration, corrosion, etc. due to the presence of the protective sheet during processing such as transportation, storage, cutting, washing such as washing, and various handling. Can be avoided. Further, by using the protective sheet disclosed herein, it is possible to protect a large-area Low-E glass plate with one sheet or a small number of sheets. Also, as described above, the protective sheet can be inspected through the protective sheet while being attached to the Low-E glass plate. Further, the protective sheet is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate as described above, and it is easy to determine the presence/absence of the protective sheet for a large-area Low-E glass plate, and the workability of removing the protective sheet is excellent. According to the above method, in the production of the glass unit, it is possible to produce the glass unit with high productivity while achieving protection of the Low-E glass plate.

ガラスユニットの製造方法の一実施形態を説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating one Embodiment of the manufacturing method of a glass unit. 保護シートの一形態例を模式的に示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows typically one form example of a protection sheet.

 以下、本発明の好適な実施形態を説明する。本明細書において特に言及している事項以外の事柄であって本発明の実施に必要な事柄は、本明細書に記載された発明の実施についての教示と出願時の技術常識とに基づいて当業者に理解され得る。本発明は、本明細書に開示されている内容と当該分野における技術常識とに基づいて実施することができる。 A preferred embodiment of the present invention will be described below. Matters other than the matters particularly referred to in the present specification and necessary for carrying out the present invention are based on the teaching for carrying out the invention described in the present specification and the common general knowledge as of the filing. It can be understood by those skilled in the art. The present invention can be implemented based on the contents disclosed in this specification and the common general technical knowledge in the field.

 <ガラスユニットの製造方法>
 ここに開示されるガラスユニットの製造方法は、ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板を用意する工程(A)と;Low-Eガラス板のLow-E層表面に保護シートを貼り付ける工程(B)と;保護シートが貼り付けられたLow-Eガラス板につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを実施する任意の工程(C)と;Low-Eガラス板から保護シートを除去する工程(D)と;上記Low-Eガラス板を用いてガラスユニットを組み立てる工程(E)と;を含む。この方法では、ここに開示される保護シート(表面保護シートともいう。)を用いる。以下、図1を参照しながら説明する。
<Glass unit manufacturing method>
The method for manufacturing a glass unit disclosed herein includes a step (A) of preparing a Low-E glass plate including a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate; A step (B) of attaching a protective sheet to the surface of the Low-E layer of the above; and at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling for the Low-E glass plate to which the protective sheet is attached. And an optional step (C) for carrying out one of the steps; a step (D) for removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate; and a step (E) for assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate. .. In this method, the protective sheet disclosed herein (also referred to as a surface protective sheet) is used. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIG.

 まず、工程(A)において、図1の(A)に示すように、ガラス基板110と、ガラス基板110上に積層されたLow-E層120とを備えるLow-Eガラス板100を用意する(S10)。Low-Eガラス板100は、ガラス基板110の一方の表面にLow-E層120を形成することによって用意される。Low-E層は、金属層や、金属酸化物層等の酸化物層、窒化ケイ素層等の窒化物層等の層を含み、通常、多層構造を有し、スパッタリング等の公知または慣用の方法で形成される。Low-E層の各層を構成する材料としては、TiO2、ZrO2、SiXY、ZnOX、Ag、NiCrOX、SnO2等が挙げられる。赤外線反射層としては、Ag層が好ましく用いられる。一態様に係るLow-E層において、Ag層は典型的にはZnOX層に挟まれている。Low-E層の最外面(保護シートが貼り付けられる表面)の材料は、TiO2、ZrO2、ZnOX、NiCrOX、SnO2等の酸化物、SiXY等の窒化物であることが多く、通常はAg等の金属ではない。Low-E層は、目的、要求特性に応じて5層以上、例えば10層以上、さらには15層以上の多層構造を有するものであり得る。各層の厚さは特に限定されず、通常は0~1000Åであり、凡そ10~700Åが適当であり、例えば凡そ30~300Åである。Low-E層の厚さ(総厚)は、凡そ10nm~1000nm(例えば凡そ50~500nm)程度であり得る。ガラス基板のサイズは特に限定されず、一辺(幅)の長さが例えば凡そ2m以上程度であり、最近では2.6mを超えるもの、さらには凡そ3m以上(例えば凡そ3.3m以上)の大面積のものが用いられている。 First, in step (A), as shown in FIG. 1A, a Low-E glass plate 100 including a glass substrate 110 and a Low-E layer 120 laminated on the glass substrate 110 is prepared ( S10). The Low-E glass plate 100 is prepared by forming a Low-E layer 120 on one surface of a glass substrate 110. The Low-E layer includes a metal layer, an oxide layer such as a metal oxide layer, a layer such as a nitride layer such as a silicon nitride layer, and usually has a multilayer structure, and a known or common method such as sputtering. Is formed by. Examples of the material forming each layer of the Low-E layer include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Si x N y , ZnO x , Ag, NiCrO x , and SnO 2 . An Ag layer is preferably used as the infrared reflective layer. In the Low-E layer according to one embodiment, the Ag layer is typically sandwiched between ZnO x layers. The material of the outermost surface of the Low-E layer (the surface to which the protective sheet is attached) should be an oxide such as TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , ZnO x , NiCrO x , SnO 2 or a nitride such as Si x N y. However, it is usually not a metal such as Ag. The Low-E layer may have a multilayer structure of 5 layers or more, for example, 10 layers or more, and further 15 layers or more, depending on the purpose and required characteristics. The thickness of each layer is not particularly limited and is usually 0 to 1000 Å, and about 10 to 700 Å is suitable, for example, about 30 to 300 Å. The thickness (total thickness) of the Low-E layer may be about 10 nm to 1000 nm (eg, about 50 to 500 nm). The size of the glass substrate is not particularly limited, and the length of one side (width) is, for example, about 2 m or more, and more than 2.6 m recently, and further, about 3 m or more (for example, about 3.3 m or more). The thing of the area is used.

 工程(B)では、図1の(B)に示すように、ガラス基板110に形成されたLow-E層120表面に保護シート200を貼り付ける(S20)。保護シート200は、典型的には、上記表面に剥離可能に貼り付けられる。ここで、「剥離可能に貼り付ける」とは、剥離除去が意図または予定されている貼付けを意味し、多くの場合、保護シート(粘着シート)を剥離した後の被着体表面が貼付け前と基本的に同じ状態を維持し得る貼付けをいう。保護性の観点から、保護シート200のサイズはLow-E層120表面と同程度とすることが好ましい。保護対象面に対して、2枚以上の保護シートを部分的に重ね合わせるなどして被覆してもよい。保護シート200でLow-E層120表面を覆うことにより、Low-E層120の腐食等を防止または抑制することができる。 In the step (B), as shown in FIG. 1B, the protective sheet 200 is attached to the surface of the Low-E layer 120 formed on the glass substrate 110 (S20). The protective sheet 200 is typically releasably attached to the surface. Here, "removably attached" means attachment intended or intended to be removed by peeling, and in many cases, the surface of the adherend after peeling the protective sheet (adhesive sheet) is the same as before attachment. Basically, it refers to pasting that can maintain the same state. From the viewpoint of protection, the size of the protective sheet 200 is preferably about the same as the surface of the Low-E layer 120. The surface to be protected may be covered by partially overlapping two or more protective sheets. By covering the surface of the Low-E layer 120 with the protective sheet 200, corrosion or the like of the Low-E layer 120 can be prevented or suppressed.

 工程(B)の後、工程(C)として、保護シート200が貼り付けられたLow-Eガラス板100につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの工程が任意に実施され得る(S30)。加工は、保護シート200が貼り付けられたLow-Eガラス板100の切断、エッジシーム等であり得る。切断手段、切断後のサイズは、目的に応じて適切に設定され特に制限はない。保護シート200は、Low-Eガラス板100の切断後もLow-E層120表面に貼り付けられた状態であり得る。切断されたLow-Eガラス板100は、典型的には水等によって洗浄される。洗浄工程では、水に加えて、任意に、洗剤(界面活性剤を含む)が使用され得る。上記輸送、保管、切断等の加工処理、水洗等の洗浄、各種ハンドリングの間、図1の(C)で示すように、Low-E層120は、保護シート200がその上に存在することによって損傷や摩耗、劣化、腐食等から保護される。 After the step (B), as the step (C), at least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling is performed on the Low-E glass sheet 100 to which the protective sheet 200 is attached. It can be implemented arbitrarily (S30). The processing may be cutting, edge seam, or the like of the Low-E glass plate 100 to which the protective sheet 200 is attached. The cutting means and the size after cutting are appropriately set according to the purpose and are not particularly limited. The protective sheet 200 may remain attached to the surface of the Low-E layer 120 even after cutting the Low-E glass plate 100. The cut Low-E glass plate 100 is typically washed with water or the like. In the washing step, in addition to water, a detergent (including a surfactant) can be optionally used. During the above-mentioned transportation, storage, processing such as cutting, washing such as water washing, and various handlings, as shown in FIG. 1C, the Low-E layer 120 is formed by the protective sheet 200 being present thereon. Protected from damage, wear, deterioration and corrosion.

 次いで、工程(D)において、Low-Eガラス板100から保護シート200を除去する(図1の(D) S40)。保護シート200は、保護目的を達成した後、被着体であるLow-Eガラス板100から除去される。ここに開示される保護シート200は、後述するようにLow-Eガラス板100表面で視認しやすいので、Low-Eガラス板100に対して保護シート200の有無の判別がしやすく、保護シート200の除去作業性に優れる。保護シート200が除去されたLow-Eガラス板100は、通常、加熱炉内で熱処理され、焼き戻しされる。その後、図1の(E)に示すように、当該Low-Eガラス板100を用いてガラスユニット300が作製される(工程(E) S50)。ガラスユニット300は、典型的には、遮熱性または断熱性ガラスユニットであり、少なくとも一方がLow-Eガラス板100である一対のガラス板を用意し、Low-Eガラス板100のLow-E層120表面を内側に向けてペアガラスとすることで作製され得る。図中の符号320,340は、ガラスユニット300を構成する他のガラス板、スペーサをそれぞれ表す。スペーサ340は、Low-Eガラス板100と他のガラス板320との間に配置されて、ガラス板100,320間に空間を作出する。なお、ここに開示される方法において、保護シートに加えて、公知ないし慣用の粉末または液体コーティングを併用してもよい。 Next, in the step (D), the protective sheet 200 is removed from the Low-E glass plate 100 ((D) S40 in FIG. 1). The protective sheet 200 is removed from the Low-E glass plate 100, which is the adherend, after achieving the protective purpose. Since the protective sheet 200 disclosed herein is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate 100 as described later, it is easy to determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet 200 with respect to the Low-E glass plate 100, and the protective sheet 200 It has excellent workability in removing. The Low-E glass plate 100 from which the protective sheet 200 has been removed is usually heat-treated in a heating furnace and tempered. Then, as shown in FIG. 1E, a glass unit 300 is manufactured using the Low-E glass plate 100 (step (E) S50). The glass unit 300 is typically a heat-shielding or heat-insulating glass unit. A pair of glass plates, at least one of which is the Low-E glass plate 100, is prepared, and the Low-E layer of the Low-E glass plate 100 is prepared. It can be made by making a pair of glass with the surface 120 facing inward. Reference numerals 320 and 340 in the figure respectively represent other glass plates and spacers that constitute the glass unit 300. The spacer 340 is disposed between the Low-E glass plate 100 and the other glass plate 320 to create a space between the glass plates 100 and 320. In the method disclosed herein, a known or commonly used powder or liquid coating may be used in combination with the protective sheet.

 また、ここに開示されるガラスユニットの製造方法では、工程(B)の後から工程(D)の前に、Low-Eガラス板100の検査工程を含み得る。この態様において、保護シート200は透明性を有するものであり得る。そのため、Low-Eガラス板100に貼り付けた状態で、保護シート200越しにLow-Eガラス板100を検査することが可能である。この検査工程は、典型的には工程(C)が実施されているなかの適当なタイミングで実施され得る。検査の内容は特に限定されず、Low-Eガラス板100表面と保護シート200との間における水等の異物の有無、Low-Eガラス板100表面における欠陥や損傷の有無等の検査であり得る。検査は、検査者による目視観察が好ましく、あるいは各種の検査装置や検査機器を用いた検査であってもよい。このような検査を実施することにより、Low-Eガラス板表面に水等の異物が存在する場合には、保護シートを貼り直したり取り換えたりして欠陥の発生を未然に予防することができる。また、欠陥や損傷の発生を早期に発見し、対処することができる。 Also, the glass unit manufacturing method disclosed herein may include an inspection step of the Low-E glass plate 100 after the step (B) and before the step (D). In this aspect, the protective sheet 200 may be transparent. Therefore, it is possible to inspect the Low-E glass plate 100 through the protective sheet 200 while being attached to the Low-E glass plate 100. This inspection step can be typically performed at an appropriate timing while step (C) is being performed. The content of the inspection is not particularly limited, and may be the presence or absence of foreign matter such as water between the surface of the Low-E glass plate 100 and the protective sheet 200, and the presence or absence of defects or damage on the surface of the Low-E glass plate 100. .. The inspection is preferably visual observation by an inspector, or may be an inspection using various inspection devices or inspection devices. By carrying out such an inspection, when foreign matter such as water is present on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects by reattaching or replacing the protective sheet. Moreover, the occurrence of defects and damages can be detected and dealt with at an early stage.

 <表面保護方法>
 ここに開示される表面保護方法は、ここに開示される保護シート(表面保護シートともいう。)を用いる表面保護方法であり、典型的には、Low-Eガラス板の表面の一部または全部を保護する方法に関する。ここに開示される保護方法は、Low-Eガラス板の表面に保護シートを貼り付ける工程(貼付け工程)を含むことによって特徴づけられる。
<Surface protection method>
The surface protection method disclosed herein is a surface protection method using a protection sheet (also referred to as a surface protection sheet) disclosed herein, and typically, a part or all of the surface of a Low-E glass plate. Regarding how to protect. The protection method disclosed herein is characterized by including a step (sticking step) of sticking a protective sheet on the surface of the Low-E glass plate.

 また、ここに開示される表面保護方法は、上記Low-Eガラス板から保護シートを除去する工程(除去工程)をさらに含み得る。さらに、貼付け工程および除去工程の間に、保護シートが貼り付けられた物品につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの工程を任意に含んでもよい。 Further, the surface protection method disclosed herein may further include a step (removal step) of removing the protection sheet from the Low-E glass plate. Further, between the attaching step and the removing step, the article to which the protective sheet is attached may optionally include at least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling.

 ここに開示される表面保護方法の好適例は、上述のガラスユニットの製造方法に記載のとおりであり、本方法における貼付け工程および除去工程は、上記製造方法における工程(B)および(D)にそれぞれ対応する。表面保護方法におけるその他の事項については、特に限定されるものではないが、上述のガラスユニットの製造方法の説明を参酌して当業者に理解され得るので、ここでは詳細な説明は省略する。 Suitable examples of the surface protection method disclosed herein are as described in the above-mentioned method for manufacturing a glass unit, and the attaching step and the removing step in this method are performed in steps (B) and (D) in the above-mentioned manufacturing method. Corresponds to each. Other matters in the surface protection method are not particularly limited, but since they can be understood by those skilled in the art in consideration of the above description of the method for manufacturing the glass unit, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

 <保護シートの構成>
 本明細書において「粘着剤」とは、前述のように、室温付近の温度域において柔らかい固体(粘弾性体)の状態を呈し、圧力により簡単に被着体に接着する性質を有する材料をいう。ここでいう粘着剤は、「C. A. Dahlquist, “Adhesion : Fundamentals and Practice”, McLaren & Sons, (1966) P. 143」に定義されているとおり、一般的に、複素引張弾性率E(1Hz)<10dyne/cmを満たす性質を有する材料(典型的には、25℃において上記性質を有する材料)であり得る。
 また、本明細書における保護シートの概念には、粘着シート、粘着テープ、粘着ラベル、粘着フィルム等と称されるものが包含され得る。なお、ここに開示される保護シートは、ロール状であってもよく、枚葉状であってもよい。あるいは、さらに種々の形状に加工された形態のシートであってもよい。
<Structure of protective sheet>
As used herein, the term "adhesive" refers to a material that is in the state of a soft solid (viscoelastic body) in a temperature range near room temperature and has a property of easily adhering to an adherend by pressure. .. The adhesive used herein generally has a complex tensile modulus E * (1 Hz) as defined in “C. A. Dahlquist, “Adhesion: Fundamentals and Practice”, McLaren & Sons, (1966) P. 143”. It may be a material having a property satisfying <10 7 dyne/cm 2 (typically, a material having the above property at 25° C.).
Further, the concept of the protective sheet in the present specification may include what is called an adhesive sheet, an adhesive tape, an adhesive label, an adhesive film and the like. The protective sheet disclosed herein may be in a roll shape or a sheet shape. Alternatively, it may be a sheet having a form further processed into various shapes.

 ここに開示される保護シートは、典型的には基材層(支持基材)上に粘着剤層を有する。一形態例に係る保護シートの断面構造を図2に示す。この保護シート10は、シート状の基材層1の一方の面1Aに粘着剤層2が設けられた構成を有し、粘着剤層2の表面2Aを被着体に貼り付けて使用される。保護シート10を表面保護シートとして用いる場合、粘着剤層2の表面2Aは保護対象物に貼り付けられる。基材層1の背面1B(一方の面1Aとは反対側の面)は、保護シート10の背面でもあり、保護シート10の外表面を構成している。使用前(すなわち、被着体への貼付け前)の保護シート10は、粘着剤層2の表面(接着面、すなわち被着体への貼付け面)2Aが、少なくとも該粘着剤層側が剥離面となっている剥離ライナー(図示せず)によって保護された形態であり得る。あるいは、基材層1の他方の面(背面)1Bが剥離面となっており、保護シート10がロール状に巻回されることにより該背面に粘着剤層2が当接してその表面(接着面)2Aが保護された形態の保護シート10であってもよい。 The protective sheet disclosed herein typically has a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on a base material layer (supporting base material). FIG. 2 shows a cross-sectional structure of the protective sheet according to the one example. This protective sheet 10 has a structure in which a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 is provided on one surface 1A of a sheet-shaped base material layer 1, and the surface 2A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 is attached to an adherend for use. .. When the protective sheet 10 is used as a surface protective sheet, the surface 2A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 is attached to the object to be protected. The back surface 1B of the base material layer 1 (the surface opposite to the one surface 1A) is also the back surface of the protective sheet 10 and constitutes the outer surface of the protective sheet 10. The protective sheet 10 before use (that is, before being adhered to an adherend) has a surface (adhesive surface, that is, a surface to be adhered to an adherend) 2A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2, and a release surface at least on the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer side. It may be in a form protected by a release liner (not shown). Alternatively, the other surface (back surface) 1B of the base material layer 1 is a release surface, and when the protective sheet 10 is wound in a roll, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2 comes into contact with the back surface and its surface (adhesion) The surface 2A may be the protective sheet 10 in a protected form.

 剥離ライナーとしては、慣用の剥離紙等を使用することができ、特に限定されない。例えば、プラスチックフィルムや紙等のライナー基材の表面に剥離処理層を有する剥離ライナー、フッ素系ポリマー(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン等)やポリオレフィン系樹脂の低接着性材料からなる剥離ライナー等を用いることができる。上記剥離処理層は、例えば、シリコーン系、長鎖アルキル系、フッ素系、硫化モリブデン等の各種の剥離処理剤により上記ライナー基材を表面処理して形成されたものであり得る。 As the release liner, a conventional release paper or the like can be used and is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to use a release liner having a release treatment layer on the surface of a liner substrate such as a plastic film or paper, or a release liner made of a low adhesion material such as a fluoropolymer (polytetrafluoroethylene) or a polyolefin resin. it can. The release treatment layer may be formed by surface-treating the liner substrate with various release treatment agents such as silicone-based, long-chain alkyl-based, fluorine-based, and molybdenum sulfide.

 ここに開示される保護シートの幅は凡そ1.5m以上であり得る。このような幅広の保護シートは、大面積のLow-Eガラス板に対して、一枚または少ない枚数で保護機能を達成することができる。また、ここに開示される保護シートは、後述するように大面積でLow-Eガラス板に貼り付けられた態様であっても、Low-Eガラス板と見分けやすい。上記Low-Eガラス板の保護用途においては、例えば凡そ2m以上、さらには凡そ2.6m以上の幅を有する保護シートが好ましく用いられ得る。保護シートの幅は、2.6m超(例えば3m以上、さらには凡そ3.3m以上)であり得る。保護シートの幅の上限は特に限定されず、生産性、取扱い性等の観点から、凡そ5m以下が適当であり、例えば凡そ4m以下であり得る。なお、長尺の保護シートの長さ(長さ方向の距離)は上記幅と同じかそれ以上である。 The width of the protective sheet disclosed here may be approximately 1.5 m or more. Such a wide protective sheet can achieve a protective function for a large area Low-E glass plate with one sheet or a small number of sheets. Further, the protective sheet disclosed herein is easily distinguishable from the Low-E glass plate even if it is attached to the Low-E glass plate in a large area as described later. For protecting the Low-E glass plate, a protective sheet having a width of, for example, about 2 m or more, and further, about 2.6 m or more can be preferably used. The width of the protective sheet can be greater than 2.6 m (eg, 3 m or more, and even about 3.3 m or more). The upper limit of the width of the protective sheet is not particularly limited, and from the viewpoint of productivity, handleability, etc., it is suitable to be about 5 m or less, and for example, about 4 m or less. The length of the long protective sheet (distance in the length direction) is the same as or larger than the width.

 なお、ここに開示される保護シートは、例えば、その平面(シート面)において、長辺と短辺とを有することによって特定されるシートであり得る。長辺は短辺よりも長い辺であり、短辺は長辺よりも短い辺と定義される。また例えば、短辺は長辺にほぼ直交する辺であり得る。保護シートの長さ方向は長辺に沿う方向であり、幅方向は、該長さ方向に直交する方向である。したがって、本明細書において「幅」は、長さ方向に直交する方向の長さと定義される。長尺状、帯状、長方形状と称される保護シートは、ここに開示される保護シートの典型例である。長辺はほぼ直線状に延びる線分である一方、短辺は直線に限定されず、曲線、折れ線等であってもよい。例えば、長尺の保護シートの長さ(長さ方向の距離)は上記幅と同じかそれ以上である。 The protective sheet disclosed herein may be a sheet specified by having long sides and short sides in its plane (sheet surface), for example. The long side is longer than the short side, and the short side is defined as the side shorter than the long side. Also, for example, the short side may be a side substantially orthogonal to the long side. The length direction of the protective sheet is a direction along the long side, and the width direction is a direction orthogonal to the length direction. Therefore, in this specification, "width" is defined as the length in the direction orthogonal to the length direction. The protective sheet called a long shape, a belt shape, and a rectangular shape is a typical example of the protective sheet disclosed herein. The long side is a line segment that extends substantially linearly, while the short side is not limited to a straight line and may be a curved line, a polygonal line, or the like. For example, the length (distance in the length direction) of the long protective sheet is equal to or more than the width.

 ここに開示される保護シートの厚さは特に限定されず、取扱い性や軽量性等の観点から、凡そ1000μm以下(典型的には凡そ300μm以下、例えば凡そ150μm以下)とすることが適当である。一態様において、保護シートの厚さは、好ましくは凡そ120μm以下、より好ましくは凡そ100μm以下、さらに好ましくは凡そ75μm以下、例えば60μm未満であり得る。また、保護シートの厚さは、典型的には20μm超、好ましくは30μm超、より好ましくは40μm超、例えば45μm超であり得る。
 なお、本明細書において保護シートの厚さは、粘着剤層および基材層の厚さを含むが、剥離ライナーの厚さは含まない。
The thickness of the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and from the viewpoint of handleability, lightness, etc., it is suitable to be about 1000 μm or less (typically about 300 μm or less, for example, about 150 μm or less). .. In one aspect, the thickness of the protective sheet may preferably be about 120 μm or less, more preferably about 100 μm or less, even more preferably about 75 μm or less, for example less than 60 μm. Also, the thickness of the protective sheet may typically be above 20 μm, preferably above 30 μm, more preferably above 40 μm, for example above 45 μm.
In this specification, the thickness of the protective sheet includes the thicknesses of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the base material layer, but does not include the thickness of the release liner.

 ここに開示される保護シートを構成する基材層の厚さは特に限定されない。上記基材層の厚さは、例えば凡そ800μm以下(典型的には凡そ250μm以下)であり得る。一態様において、基材層(典型的には、非発泡の樹脂フィルム)の厚さは、好ましくは凡そ150μm以下、より好ましくは凡そ100μm以下、さらに好ましくは65μm未満、例えば55μm未満であり得る。基材層の厚さが小さくなると、保護シートの被着体形状への追従性が高まり、浮き剥がれが抑制される傾向にある。また、被着体の保護、ハンドリング性等の観点から、基材層の厚さは、典型的には凡そ10μm以上、好ましくは凡そ25μm以上、より好ましくは30μm超、さらに好ましくは40μm超、例えば45μm超であり得る。 The thickness of the base material layer constituting the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited. The thickness of the base material layer may be, for example, about 800 μm or less (typically about 250 μm or less). In one aspect, the thickness of the substrate layer (typically a non-foamed resin film) can be preferably about 150 μm or less, more preferably about 100 μm or less, even more preferably less than 65 μm, for example less than 55 μm. When the thickness of the base material layer is small, the conformability of the protective sheet to the shape of the adherend is enhanced, and the peeling off tends to be suppressed. From the viewpoint of protection of the adherend, handling property, etc., the thickness of the base material layer is typically about 10 μm or more, preferably about 25 μm or more, more preferably more than 30 μm, further preferably more than 40 μm, for example, It can be above 45 μm.

 ここに開示される保護シートを構成する粘着剤層の厚さは特に限定されない。被着体への糊残りを防止する観点から、上記粘着剤層の厚さは、凡そ50μm以下、凡そ30μm以下が適当であり、凡そ15μm以下が好ましく、凡そ8μm以下(例えば6μm未満)がより好ましい。他の一態様では、剥離性等の観点から、粘着剤層の厚さは凡そ5μm以下であることが適当であり、凡そ4μm以下であってもよく、例えば3μm以下であり得る。また、接着性の観点から、粘着剤層の厚さは、凡そ0.5μm以上とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ1μm以上、より好ましくは2μm超である。粘着剤層の厚さは、3μm超であってもよく、例えば4μm超であってもよい。 The thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer forming the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of preventing adhesive residue on the adherend, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is appropriately about 50 μm or less and about 30 μm or less, preferably about 15 μm or less, and more preferably about 8 μm or less (for example, less than 6 μm). preferable. In another aspect, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is appropriately about 5 μm or less, may be about 4 μm or less, and may be, for example, 3 μm or less, from the viewpoint of peelability and the like. Further, from the viewpoint of adhesiveness, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is appropriately about 0.5 μm or more, preferably about 1 μm or more, and more preferably more than 2 μm. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have a thickness of more than 3 μm, for example, more than 4 μm.

 <保護シートの視認性>
 ここに開示される保護シートは、(a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域(以下、便宜上「視認領域」ともいう。)をシート面の少なくとも一部に有することによって特徴づけられる。視認領域を有する保護シートはLow-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすく、その有無を簡単に判別することができる。
<Visibility of protective sheet>
The protective sheet disclosed herein has a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more (hereinafter, for convenience. It is characterized by having a "visual recognition area") on at least a part of the sheet surface. The protective sheet having the visible area is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, and the presence or absence thereof can be easily determined.

 上記視認領域の配置や形状、サイズ、シート面全体に占める割合は特に限定されない。例えば、保護シートのシート面全体が視認領域であってもよく、シート面の一部が視認領域であってもよい。シート面において視認領域と透明性領域(後述)とからなるパターンを有する保護シートは、視認領域を有する保護シートの一例である。保護シートのシート面における視認領域の面積割合は、凡そ1%以上(例えば凡そ5%以上)であり、凡そ10%以上とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ30%以上、より好ましくは凡そ50%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ70%以上、特に好ましくは凡そ90%以上(典型的には100%)である。特に好ましい一態様では、保護シートのシート面全体が視認領域である。 -The layout, shape, size, and ratio of the visible area to the entire sheet surface are not particularly limited. For example, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet may be the visible area, or a part of the sheet surface may be the visible area. A protective sheet having a pattern of a visible area and a transparent area (described later) on the sheet surface is an example of a protective sheet having a visible area. The area ratio of the visible region on the sheet surface of the protective sheet is about 1% or more (for example, about 5% or more), about 10% or more, preferably about 30% or more, and more preferably about 10% or more. It is 50% or more, more preferably about 70% or more, particularly preferably about 90% or more (typically 100%). In one particularly preferred embodiment, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible area.

 上記視認領域において、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率(可視光領域の最低透過率)は特に限定されず、凡そ95%以下であることが適当である。一態様において、上記視認領域における可視光領域の最低透過率は凡そ90%以下であり得る。このような視認領域を有する保護シートはLow-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすく、その有無を簡単に判別することができる。上記視認領域における可視光領域の最低透過率は、好ましくは凡そ80%以下であり、例えば凡そ70%以下であってもよく、凡そ60%以下であってもよく、凡そ50%以下であってもよい。保護シートのシート面全体が視認領域である態様においては、保護シートの可視光領域の最低透過率は上記の範囲や値をとり得る。 In the above visible region, the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm (minimum transmittance in the visible light region) is not particularly limited, and it is suitable that it is approximately 95% or less. In one aspect, the minimum transmittance of the visible region in the visible region may be about 90% or less. The protective sheet having such a visible region is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, and the presence or absence thereof can be easily discriminated. The minimum transmittance of the visible region in the visible region is preferably about 80% or less, for example, about 70% or less, about 60% or less, or about 50% or less. Good. In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible region, the minimum transmittance in the visible light region of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.

 上記視認領域におけるヘイズ値は特定の範囲に限定されない。上記視認領域におけるヘイズ値は凡そ1以上(例えば凡そ5以上)とすることが適当である。一態様において、上記視認領域におけるヘイズ値は凡そ10以上(例えば凡そ11以上)であり得る。所定以上のヘイズ値とする保護シートはLow-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすく、その有無を簡単に判別することができる。他の一態様では、上記ヘイズ値は凡そ15以上(例えば凡そ20以上)であってもよく、50超(例えば凡そ80以上、さらには凡そ90以上)であってもよい。保護シートのシート面全体が視認領域である態様においては、保護シートのヘイズ値は上記の範囲や値をとり得る。  The haze value in the above visible area is not limited to a specific range. It is appropriate that the haze value in the visible region is about 1 or more (for example, about 5 or more). In one aspect, the haze value in the visible region may be about 10 or more (eg, about 11 or more). The protective sheet having a haze value of a predetermined value or more is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, and the presence or absence thereof can be easily discriminated. In another aspect, the haze value may be about 15 or more (eg, about 20 or more), and may be more than 50 (eg, about 80 or more, and even about 90 or more). In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible region, the haze value of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.

 ここで「ヘイズ値」とは、測定対象に可視光を照射したときの全透過光に対する拡散透過光の割合をいう。くもり価ともいう。ヘイズ値は、以下の式で表すことができる。
   Th=Td/Tt×100
 上記式において、Thはヘイズ値であり、Tdは散乱光線透過率、Ttは全光線透過率である。ヘイズ値は、例えば、基材層や粘着剤層の組成や厚さ等の選択によって調節することができる。
Here, the “haze value” refers to the ratio of diffuse transmitted light to the total transmitted light when the measurement target is irradiated with visible light. Also called cloudiness value. The haze value can be expressed by the following formula.
Th=Td/Tt×100
In the above formula, Th is the haze value, Td is the scattered light transmittance, and Tt is the total light transmittance. The haze value can be adjusted, for example, by selecting the composition and thickness of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.

 保護シートの視認領域における全光線透過率は特定の範囲に限定されるものではないが、Low-Eガラス板上での判別性の観点から、凡そ95%以下であることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ90%以下であり、例えば凡そ80%以下であってもよく、凡そ70%以下であってもよい。保護シートのシート面全体が視認領域である態様においては、保護シートの全光線透過率は上記の範囲や値をとり得る。 The total light transmittance in the visible region of the protective sheet is not limited to a specific range, but from the viewpoint of the discriminability on the Low-E glass plate, it is appropriate that it is approximately 95% or less, and preferably Is about 90% or less, for example, about 80% or less, or about 70% or less. In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the visible region, the total light transmittance of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.

 好ましい一態様では、上記視認領域は着色領域である。着色領域は視認性に優れるので、シート面に着色領域を設けることで、より優れた保護シート判別性が得られやすい。着色の態様は特に限定されず、例えば、保護シートのシート面の少なくとも一部が着色領域である態様が挙げられる。具体的には、保護シートのシート面全体が着色領域であってもよく、シート面の一部が着色領域であってもよい。シート面において着色部分と非着色部分とからなるパターンを有する保護シートは、着色領域を有する保護シートの一例である。 In a preferred aspect, the visible area is a colored area. Since the colored area is excellent in visibility, providing the colored area on the surface of the sheet makes it easier to obtain superior protection sheet discrimination. The coloring aspect is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aspect in which at least a part of the sheet surface of the protective sheet is a colored region. Specifically, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet may be the colored area, or a part of the sheet surface may be the colored area. A protective sheet having a pattern of colored portions and non-colored portions on the sheet surface is an example of a protective sheet having colored regions.

 一態様に係る保護シートは、シート面の少なくとも一部(典型的には全体)が着色されている。着色部分(着色領域でもある。)は、均一に着色されていることが判別性の点から好ましい。好ましい一態様では、保護シートは、そのシート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている。これにより、例えば、保護シートの一部(例えば小片)が千切れ等によりLow-Eガラス板に残存しても保護シートの有無の判別がしやすい。ここでいう「均一」とは目視レベルの均一性をいう。シート面の全体が同じ色を同じ濃さで有することは、シート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている構成の典型例である。 At least a part (typically the whole) of the protective sheet according to one aspect is colored. It is preferable that the colored portion (which is also a colored region) is uniformly colored from the viewpoint of discriminating property. In a preferred aspect, the protective sheet is colored almost uniformly over the entire sheet surface. Thereby, for example, even if a part (for example, a small piece) of the protective sheet remains on the Low-E glass plate due to tearing or the like, it is easy to determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet. The term “uniform” as used herein means the uniformity at the visual level. The fact that the entire sheet surface has the same color and the same darkness is a typical example of a configuration in which the entire sheet surface is colored almost uniformly.

 保護シートのシート面における視認領域のパターンとしては、直線状や曲線状のストライプパターンが挙げられる。例えば、波状のストライプパターンを採用し得る。波状の例としては、サインウェーブや疑似サインウェーブ、円弧波等の曲線状のものや、ジグザグ状、三角波等の非曲線状のものが挙げられる。波状パターンは、同形または異形の2種以上の波をそれらの位相をずらした状態で、あるいは形状やパターンを反転させる等して、重ねて形成されたものであってもよい。上記パターンの他の例としては、例えば、弧状、円状、楕円状、直線状のパターンが挙げられる。 As a pattern of the visible area on the sheet surface of the protective sheet, a linear or curved stripe pattern can be mentioned. For example, a wavy stripe pattern may be adopted. Examples of the wavy shape include a curved shape such as a sine wave, a pseudo sine wave, and an arc wave, and a non-curved shape such as a zigzag shape and a triangular wave. The wavy pattern may be formed by overlapping two or more kinds of waves of the same shape or different shapes with their phases shifted, or by inverting the shape or pattern. Other examples of the above pattern include, for example, arc-shaped, circular, elliptical, and linear patterns.

 保護シートのシート面における視認領域のパターンの他の例としては、格子状のパターンが挙げられる。ここで格子状パターンとは、典型的には、互いに交差する2つのストライプ状パターン部を含むパターンを指す。格子状パターンは、斜方格子や正方格子、三角格子、六角格子等の各種の格子形状を包含する。上記パターンのさらに他の例としては、ドット状や水玉状のパターン、四角形状や三角形状等の特定の形状を有する複数の着色部を間隔をおいて配列してなるパターンが挙げられる。 As another example of the pattern of the visible area on the sheet surface of the protective sheet, a grid pattern can be cited. Here, the lattice pattern typically refers to a pattern including two stripe pattern portions that intersect each other. The lattice pattern includes various lattice shapes such as an orthorhombic lattice, a square lattice, a triangular lattice, and a hexagonal lattice. As still another example of the above pattern, a dot-shaped or polka-dot-shaped pattern, or a pattern in which a plurality of colored portions having a specific shape such as a quadrangle or a triangle are arranged at intervals is cited.

 また、保護シートのシート面における視認領域(典型的には着色領域)は標章であってもよい。ここで標章とは、典型的には、色彩と文字等(すなわち、文字、図形もしくは記号またはこれらの結合)とが結合したものであり得る。文字、記号には、上記文字等が種々の程度に図案化されたものを包含する。上記文字等により表わされる情報としては、製品名称、製造者名称、仕様(Low-Eや低VOC(volatile organic compounds)、省エネルギー、環境負荷、温室効果ガス排出低減、それらを意味する他の表現を包含する。)、使用方法、リサイクル関連情報、製造年月日、製品番号(ロット番号)、使用可能期限、ロゴマーク、イメージキャラクター、マスコットキャラクター、製品構成要素(粘着剤、基材等)の材質または種類、含有成分の種類やその含有量等が挙げられる。これらの標章は1種を単独で、または2種以上を組み合わせて用いられ得る。これらの情報を表す文字等は、着色の色彩と結合することにより、当該情報を看者に対してより効果的に伝達する標章となり得る。 The visible area (typically the colored area) on the sheet surface of the protective sheet may be a mark. Here, the mark may typically be a combination of a color and a character (that is, a character, a figure or a symbol, or a combination thereof). Characters and symbols include those in which the above-mentioned characters and the like are designed in various degrees. As the information represented by the above characters, the product name, manufacturer name, specifications (Low-E and low VOC (volatile organic compounds), energy saving, environmental load, reduction of greenhouse gas emissions, and other expressions that mean them ), usage method, recycling related information, manufacturing date, product number (lot number), expiration date, logo mark, image character, mascot character, material of product components (adhesive, base material, etc.) Further, the kind, the kind of the contained component, the content thereof and the like can be mentioned. These marks may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Characters and the like representing these pieces of information can be a mark that more effectively conveys the information to the viewer by being combined with coloring.

 保護シートの着色領域の色は特に限定されず、例えば、黒色、灰色、白色、赤色、青色、黄色、緑色、黄緑色、橙色、紫色、金色、銀色、パール色等の1種または2種以上であり得る。保護シート越しの被着体視認性の観点から、灰色、赤色、青色、黄色、緑色、黄緑色、橙色、紫色が好ましい。特に好ましい一態様では、保護シートは、青色および/または緑色に着色されている。青色や緑色は、赤色や黄色と比べて比較的目立たない配色でLow-Eガラス板上で十分な視認性が得られ、また周辺環境とも調和しやすい。
 なお、ここに開示される技術において、青色とは可視スペクトルの波長域が360nm以上480nm未満である色をいい、緑色とは可視スペクトルの波長域が480nm以上560nm未満である色をいう。
The color of the colored area of the protective sheet is not particularly limited, and for example, one or more of black, gray, white, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, purple, gold, silver, pearl, etc. Can be From the viewpoint of the adherend visibility through the protective sheet, gray, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, and purple are preferable. In a particularly preferred aspect, the protective sheet is colored blue and/or green. The colors of blue and green are relatively unnoticeable compared to red and yellow, and they have sufficient visibility on the Low-E glass plate and are easy to harmonize with the surrounding environment.
In the technology disclosed herein, blue means a color having a visible spectrum wavelength range of 360 nm or more and less than 480 nm, and green means a color having a visible spectrum wavelength range of 480 nm or more and less than 560 nm.

 保護シートの着色には、典型的には適当な着色剤が用いられる。着色剤としては、従来公知の顔料や染料を用いることができる。顔料としては、例えば、炭酸亜鉛、酸化亜鉛、硫化亜鉛、タルク、カオリン、炭酸カルシウム、酸化チタン、シリカ、フッ化リチウム、フッ化カルシウム、硫酸バリウム、アルミナ、ジルコニア、酸化鉄系、水酸化鉄系、酸化クロム系、水酸化クロム系、スピネル型焼成系、クロム酸系、クロムバーミリオン系、紺青系、コバルトブルー系、アルミニウム粉末系、ブロンズ粉末系、銀粉末系、リン酸カルシウム等の無機顔料や、フタロシアニン系、アゾ系、縮合アゾ系、アゾレーキ系、アントラキノン系、ペリレン・ペリノン系、フラボン、インジゴ系、チオインジゴ系、イソインドリノン系、アゾメチン系、ジオキサジン系、キナクリドン系、アニリンブラック系、トリフェニルメタン系、カーボンブラック系等の有機顔料が挙げられる。染料としては、例えば、アゾ系染料、アントラキノン、キノフタロン、スチリル、ジフェニルメタン、トリフェニルメタン、オキサジン、トリアジン、キサンタン、メタン、アゾメチン、アクリジン、ジアジンが挙げられる。着色剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 An appropriate coloring agent is typically used for coloring the protective sheet. As the colorant, conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used. Examples of the pigment include zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, zinc sulfide, talc, kaolin, calcium carbonate, titanium oxide, silica, lithium fluoride, calcium fluoride, barium sulfate, alumina, zirconia, iron oxides, iron hydroxides. Inorganic pigments such as chromium oxide type, chromium hydroxide type, spinel type firing type, chromic acid type, chrome vermilion type, navy blue type, cobalt blue type, aluminum powder type, bronze powder type, silver powder type, calcium phosphate, etc., Phthalocyanine, azo, condensed azo, azo lake, anthraquinone, perylene/perinone, flavone, indigo, thioindigo, isoindolinone, azomethine, dioxazine, quinacridone, aniline black, triphenylmethane And organic pigments such as carbon black. Examples of the dye include azo dyes, anthraquinone, quinophthalone, styryl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, oxazine, triazine, xanthan, methane, azomethine, acridine, and diazine. The colorants may be used alone or in appropriate combination of two or more.

 上記着色は、粘着剤層や基材層、あるいはそれらとは異なる着色層に、適当な着色剤を含ませることによって実現される。好ましい一態様では、保護シートを構成する基材層および粘着剤層のうち少なくとも一方が着色されている。具体的には、基材層および粘着剤層の両方が着色されている態様、基材層は着色されていて粘着剤層は着色されていない態様、基材層は着色されておらず粘着剤層は着色されている態様が挙げられる。なかでも、基材層が着色されている態様が、粘着特性への影響が生じないため好ましい。なお、本明細書において非着色の基材層および粘着剤層は、それぞれ無色透明の基材層および粘着剤層であり得る。無色透明の基材層および粘着剤層は、全光線透過率が85%超(例えば90%超)であり、可視光領域の最低透過率が85%超(例えば90%超)であり、かつヘイズ値が20以下(例えば10以下)であり得る。 The above coloring is realized by including an appropriate coloring agent in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the base material layer, or a coloring layer different from them. In a preferred embodiment, at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer forming the protective sheet is colored. Specifically, both the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are colored, the base material layer is colored and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not colored, and the base material layer is not colored. The layer may be colored. Among them, the embodiment in which the base material layer is colored is preferable because it does not affect the adhesive property. In addition, in this specification, a non-colored base material layer and an adhesive layer may be a colorless transparent base material layer and an adhesive layer, respectively. The colorless transparent base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer have a total light transmittance of more than 85% (eg, more than 90%), a minimum transmittance in the visible light region of more than 85% (eg, more than 90%), and The haze value can be 20 or less (eg, 10 or less).

 保護シートは、例えば、基材層の少なくとも一方の表面に着色層を設けることによって着色されたものであってもよい。そのような着色層は、典型的には、着色剤およびバインダを含有する着色層形成用組成物を、支持基材に塗布して形成することができる。着色剤としては、従来公知の顔料や染料を用いることができ、上述の着色剤の1種または2種以上を用いることができる。バインダとしては、塗料または印刷の分野において公知の材料を特に制限なく使用することができる。例えば、ポリウレタン、フェノール樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、尿素メラミン樹脂、ポリメタクリル酸メチルなどが例示される。なお、基材層の両面にそれぞれ着色層を配置した構成において、それらの着色層の構成は、同一であってもよく、異なってもよい。 The protective sheet may be colored by providing a colored layer on at least one surface of the base material layer. Such a coloring layer can be typically formed by applying a coloring layer-forming composition containing a coloring agent and a binder to a supporting substrate. As the colorant, a conventionally known pigment or dye can be used, and one kind or two or more kinds of the above-mentioned colorants can be used. As the binder, materials known in the field of paints or printing can be used without particular limitation. For example, polyurethane, phenol resin, epoxy resin, urea melamine resin, polymethylmethacrylate, etc. are exemplified. In addition, in the configuration in which the colored layers are arranged on both sides of the base material layer, the configurations of the colored layers may be the same or different.

 着色層形成用組成物は、例えば、溶剤型、紫外線硬化型、熱硬化型等であり得る。着色層の形成は、従来より着色層の形成に採用されている手段を特に制限なく採用して行うことができる。例えば、グラビア印刷、フレキソ印刷、オフセット印刷等の印刷により着色層(印刷層)を形成する方法を好ましく採用し得る。着色層は、全体が1層からなる単層構造であってもよく、2層、3層またはそれ以上のサブ着色層を含む多層構造であってもよい。着色層全体の厚さは、1μm~10μm程度が適当であり、1μm~7μm程度が好ましく、例えば1μm~5μm程度とすることができる。二層以上のサブ着色層を含む着色層において、各サブ着色層の厚さは1μm~2μm程度が好ましい。 The composition for forming a colored layer may be, for example, a solvent type, an ultraviolet curing type, a thermosetting type, or the like. The formation of the colored layer can be carried out by using the means conventionally used for forming the colored layer without particular limitation. For example, a method of forming a colored layer (printing layer) by printing such as gravure printing, flexographic printing and offset printing can be preferably adopted. The coloring layer may have a single-layer structure consisting of one layer or a multi-layer structure including two layers, three layers or more sub-coloring layers. The total thickness of the colored layer is appropriately about 1 μm to 10 μm, preferably about 1 μm to 7 μm, and for example, about 1 μm to 5 μm. In a colored layer including two or more sub-colored layers, the thickness of each sub-colored layer is preferably about 1 μm to 2 μm.

 <保護シートの透過性>
 ここに開示される保護シートは、典型的には透明性領域(透明性を有する領域)を有する。これによって、Low-Eガラス板に貼り付けた状態で、保護シート越しにLow-Eガラス板を検査することができる。ここでいう透明性は、保護シート越しに反対側の状態を視認できる程度の透明性をいい、半透明や有色透明を包含する概念である。また、保護シートにおける透過性は、シート面に直交する方向(換言すると、保護シート厚さ方向)の透過性である。上記透過性は、例えば全光線透過率によって特徴づけられ得る。具体的には、本明細書において「透明性を有する」とは全光線透過率が3%以上であることを指す。したがって、本明細書においては、全光線透過率が3%未満の保護シート、基材層(例えば樹脂フィルム)や粘着剤層は、透明性を有しないものに分類される。
<Permeability of protective sheet>
The protective sheet disclosed herein typically has a transparent region (a region having transparency). With this, the Low-E glass plate can be inspected through the protective sheet while being attached to the Low-E glass plate. The term "transparency" as used herein means a degree of transparency that allows the state of the opposite side to be visually recognized through the protective sheet, and is a concept that includes translucency and colored transparency. Further, the transparency of the protective sheet is the permeability in the direction orthogonal to the sheet surface (in other words, the thickness direction of the protective sheet). The transparency can be characterized by, for example, total light transmittance. Specifically, in the present specification, “having transparency” means that the total light transmittance is 3% or more. Therefore, in the present specification, a protective sheet having a total light transmittance of less than 3%, a base material layer (for example, a resin film), or an adhesive layer is classified as having no transparency.

 上記透明性領域の配置や形状、サイズ、シート面全体に占める割合は特に限定されない。例えば、保護シートのシート面全体が透明性領域であってもよく、シート面の一部が透明性領域であってもよい。シート面において視認領域と透明性領域とからなるパターンを有する保護シートは、透明性領域を有する保護シートの一例である。好ましい一態様では、透明性領域と前述の視認領域とは同じ領域であり得る。保護シートのシート面における透明性領域の面積割合は、凡そ1%以上(例えば凡そ5%以上)であり、凡そ10%以上とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ30%以上、より好ましくは凡そ50%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ70%以上、特に好ましくは凡そ90%以上(典型的には100%)である。特に好ましい一態様では、保護シートのシート面全体が透明性領域である。この態様では、保護シートのシート面全体が透明性領域であり、かつ視認領域である。 The arrangement, shape, size, and ratio of the transparent area to the entire sheet surface are not particularly limited. For example, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet may be the transparent area, or a part of the sheet surface may be the transparent area. A protective sheet having a pattern of visible areas and transparent areas on the sheet surface is an example of a protective sheet having transparent areas. In a preferable aspect, the transparent region and the above-mentioned visible region may be the same region. The area ratio of the transparent region on the sheet surface of the protective sheet is about 1% or more (for example, about 5% or more), about 10% or more is appropriate, preferably about 30% or more, more preferably It is about 50% or more, more preferably about 70% or more, particularly preferably about 90% or more (typically 100%). In one particularly preferred embodiment, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is the transparent area. In this aspect, the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent area and a visible area.

 上記透明性領域における全光線透過率は、上述のように凡そ3%以上であり、例えば凡そ5%以上(典型的には凡そ10%以上)であり得る。保護シート越しの被着体視認性の観点から、透明性領域における全光線透過率は凡そ20%以上(例えば凡そ30%以上)であることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ40%以上、より好ましくは凡そ50%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ60%以上、特に好ましくは凡そ70%以上であり、凡そ80%以上(例えば凡そ90%以上)であってもよい。保護シートのシート面全体が透明性領域である態様においては、保護シートの全光線透過率は上記の範囲や値をとり得る。 The total light transmittance in the transparent region is about 3% or more as described above, and may be, for example, about 5% or more (typically about 10% or more). From the viewpoint of the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet, it is appropriate that the total light transmittance in the transparent region is about 20% or more (eg, about 30% or more), preferably about 40% or more, and more preferably about 40% or more. Is about 50% or more, more preferably about 60% or more, particularly preferably about 70% or more, and may be about 80% or more (for example, about 90% or more). In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent region, the total light transmittance of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.

 上記透明性領域における可視光領域の最低透過率は特に限定されず、通常、凡そ2%以上であり、例えば凡そ5%以上であり、凡そ10%以上(例えば凡そ20%以上)であることが適当である。可視光領域に対応する波長450~800nmの範囲における透過率の最低値を所定値以上とすることで、保護シート越しの被着体視認性は向上する。好ましい一態様では、上記可視光領域の最低透過率は凡そ30%以上であり、より好ましくは凡そ40%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ50%以上(例えば凡そ60%以上)である。保護シートのシート面全体が透明性領域である態様においては、保護シートの可視光領域の最低透過率は上記の範囲や値をとり得る。 The minimum transmittance of the visible region in the transparent region is not particularly limited, and is usually about 2% or more, for example, about 5% or more, and about 10% or more (for example, about 20% or more). Appropriate. By setting the minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm corresponding to the visible light region to a predetermined value or more, the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet is improved. In a preferred embodiment, the minimum transmittance in the visible light region is about 30% or more, more preferably about 40% or more, even more preferably about 50% or more (for example, about 60% or more). In a mode in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent region, the minimum transmittance in the visible light region of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.

 上記透明性領域におけるヘイズ値は特定の範囲に限定されない。通常、上記透明性領域のヘイズ値は凡そ99以下(例えば90以下)である。透明性や、視認性に影響を及ぼす拡散や反射を抑制する観点から、上記ヘイズ値は凡そ50以下であることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ30以下、より好ましくは凡そ20以下であり、凡そ10以下(例えば凡そ5以下)であってもよい。保護シートのシート面全体が透明性領域である態様においては、保護シートのヘイズ値は上記の範囲や値をとり得る。 The haze value in the transparent area is not limited to a specific range. Usually, the haze value of the transparent region is about 99 or less (for example, 90 or less). From the viewpoint of suppressing transparency and diffusion and reflection that affect visibility, the haze value is suitably about 50 or less, preferably about 30 or less, more preferably about 20 or less, and It may be 10 or less (for example, about 5 or less). In the aspect in which the entire sheet surface of the protective sheet is a transparent region, the haze value of the protective sheet can take the above range or value.

 保護シートやその各領域の全光線透過率、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率およびヘイズ値は、JIS K7136:2000に準拠して、市販の透過率計(例えば、商品名「HAZEMETER HM-150」、村上色彩技術研究所社製)を使用して測定することができる。後述の基材層(支持基材)の全光線透過率、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率およびヘイズ値も同様の方法で測定される。後述の実施例においても同様の方法で測定される。 The total light transmittance of the protective sheet and each region thereof, the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm, and the haze value are in accordance with JIS K7136:2000, and a commercially available transmittance meter (for example, a product name “HAZEMETER HM-150”). Manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory Co., Ltd.). The total light transmittance, the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm, and the haze value of the base material layer (supporting base material) described later are also measured by the same method. The same method is used in the examples described below.

 <粘着剤層の表面特性>
 ここに開示される技術においては、特に限定されるものではないが、粘着剤層の表層部分が特定の特性を有することが好ましい。粘着剤表層部分の性質は、ナノインデンテーション法による計測から機械的特性として精度よく特徴づけられる。具体的には、一態様に係る粘着剤層の表面硬さは0.3MPa以上であり得る。表面硬さが0.3MPa以上である粘着剤層を用いることで、貼付け後の保護シートは、経時粘着力が抑制され、被着体からの除去作業性に優れる。粘着剤層の表層部分の硬さを高めることで、粘着力が所定以下に制限されるとともに経時的な粘着力の上昇量も制限され、全体として、除去作業性を損なわないレベルまで経時粘着力が抑制されると考えられる。経時粘着力抑制と良好な接着性とのバランスにおいて経時粘着力抑制を重視する場合、粘着剤層の表面硬さは、好ましくは0.4MPa以上(例えば0.6MPa以上、さらには0.7MPa以上)、より好ましくは0.8MPa以上(例えば1.2MPa以上、さらには2MPa以上)である。上記表面硬さの上限は、接着性の観点から、5MPa以下とすることが適当であり、例えば3MPa以下、さらには2.7MPa以下であり得る。上述のバランスにおいて、浮き剥がれ防止や被着体との密着を重視する場合、表面硬さは、好ましくは2MPa未満、より好ましくは1.2MPa未満、さらに好ましくは0.8MPa未満、特に好ましくは0.4MPa未満である。
<Surface characteristics of adhesive layer>
The technique disclosed herein is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the surface layer portion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has specific characteristics. The properties of the surface layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be accurately characterized as mechanical properties by measurement by the nanoindentation method. Specifically, the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to one aspect may be 0.3 MPa or more. By using the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a surface hardness of 0.3 MPa or more, the protective sheet after attachment has a suppressed adhesive strength over time and is excellent in workability for removing from the adherend. By increasing the hardness of the surface layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the adhesive force is limited to a predetermined value or less and the amount of increase in the adhesive force with time is also limited, and the adhesive force with time to a level that does not impair the removal workability as a whole. Is thought to be suppressed. When importance is attached to the suppression of the adhesive strength over time in the balance between suppression of the adhesive strength over time and good adhesiveness, the surface hardness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.4 MPa or more (for example, 0.6 MPa or more, further 0.7 MPa or more). ), more preferably 0.8 MPa or more (for example, 1.2 MPa or more, further 2 MPa or more). The upper limit of the surface hardness is appropriately 5 MPa or less from the viewpoint of adhesiveness, and can be, for example, 3 MPa or less, and further 2.7 MPa or less. In the above-mentioned balance, when importance is attached to prevention of floating and peeling and adhesion with an adherend, the surface hardness is preferably less than 2 MPa, more preferably less than 1.2 MPa, further preferably less than 0.8 MPa, particularly preferably 0 MPa. It is less than 4 MPa.

 上記態様に係る粘着剤層は、経時粘着力抑制と被着体への接着性との二元性から2態様に分類され得る。一実施形態(第1実施形態)に係る粘着剤層の表面硬さは0.3MPa以上0.7MPa未満である。この態様では、上記表面硬さの下限は、好ましくは0.32MPa以上、より好ましくは0.34MPa以上、さらに好ましくは0.35MPa以上であり、その上限は、好ましくは0.55MPa未満、より好ましくは0.45MPa未満、さらに好ましくは0.4MPa未満、特に好ましくは0.38MPa未満である。他の一実施形態(第2実施形態)に係る粘着剤層の表面硬さが0.7MPa以上5MPa以下である。この態様では、上記表面硬さの下限は、好ましくは0.8MPa以上、より好ましくは0.9MPa以上(例えば1.2MPa以上、さらには2MPa以上)であり、その上限は、好ましくは4MPa以下、より好ましくは3MPa以下、さらに好ましくは2.7MPa以下、特に好ましくは2.5MPa以下である。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the above aspect can be classified into two aspects from the duality of suppression of adhesive strength over time and adhesiveness to an adherend. The surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to one embodiment (first embodiment) is 0.3 MPa or more and less than 0.7 MPa. In this aspect, the lower limit of the surface hardness is preferably 0.32 MPa or more, more preferably 0.34 MPa or more, further preferably 0.35 MPa or more, and the upper limit thereof is preferably less than 0.55 MPa, more preferably Is less than 0.45 MPa, more preferably less than 0.4 MPa, particularly preferably less than 0.38 MPa. The surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to another embodiment (second embodiment) is 0.7 MPa or more and 5 MPa or less. In this aspect, the lower limit of the surface hardness is preferably 0.8 MPa or more, more preferably 0.9 MPa or more (for example, 1.2 MPa or more, further 2 MPa or more), and the upper limit thereof is preferably 4 MPa or less, It is more preferably 3 MPa or less, still more preferably 2.7 MPa or less, and particularly preferably 2.5 MPa or less.

 好ましい一態様に係る粘着剤層は、所定の深度までの押込み深さ[nm]に対する荷重[μN]の比で表わされるナノインデンテーション法による負荷曲線傾き(以下、単に「負荷曲線傾き」ともいう。)が0.7×10-2μN/nm以上である。上記負荷曲線傾き[μN/nm]から、粘着剤層表層部分における弾性(圧縮弾性率)に相当する情報が得られる。適度な弾性を有することで経時粘着力が抑制され、優れた除去作業性を好ましく実現し得る。負荷曲線傾きは、より好ましくは0.73×10-2μN/nm以上、さらに好ましくは0.75×10-2μN/nm以上、特に好ましくは0.78×10-2μN/nm以上である。負荷曲線傾きは、接着性の観点から、7×10-2μN/nm以下、例えば5×10-2μN/nm以下、さらには4.5×10-2μN/nm以下である。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to a preferred embodiment is a load curve slope (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “load curve slope”) obtained by a nanoindentation method, which is represented by a ratio of a load [μN] to an indentation depth [nm] up to a predetermined depth. .) is 0.7×10 −2 μN/nm or more. Information corresponding to elasticity (compressive elastic modulus) in the surface layer portion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be obtained from the slope of the load curve [μN/nm]. By having an appropriate elasticity, the adhesive force with time is suppressed, and excellent removal workability can be preferably realized. The gradient of the load curve is more preferably 0.73×10 -2 μN/nm or more, further preferably 0.75×10 -2 μN/nm or more, and particularly preferably 0.78×10 -2 μN/nm or more. is there. The slope of the load curve is 7×10 −2 μN/nm or less, for example, 5×10 −2 μN/nm or less, and further 4.5×10 −2 μN/nm or less from the viewpoint of adhesiveness.

 また、上記第1実施形態に係る粘着剤層の負荷曲線傾きは、0.7×10-2μN/nm以上1.2×10-2μN/nm未満である。この態様では、負荷曲線傾きの下限は、好ましくは0.75×10-2μN/nm以上、より好ましくは0.8×10-2μN/nm以上(例えば0.85×10-2μN/nm以上)であり、その上限は、好ましくは1.1×10-2μN/nm未満、より好ましくは1.0×10-2μN/nm未満、さらに好ましくは0.95×10-2μN/nm未満(例えば0.8×10-2μN/nm未満)である。上記第2実施形態に係る粘着剤層は、負荷曲線傾きが1.2×10-2μN/nm以上7×10-2μN/nm以下である。この態様では、負荷曲線傾きの下限は、好ましくは1.4×10-2μN/nm以上(例えば1.8×10-2μN/nm以上)であり、2×10-2μN/nm以上(例えば3×10-2μN/nm以上)であってもよい。その上限は、好ましくは5×10-2μN/nm以下、より好ましくは4.5×10-2μN/nm以下(例えば4×10-2μN/nm以下)である。上記の数値範囲は、経時粘着力抑制と良好な接着性とを考慮して適切に決定される。 Moreover, the load curve gradient of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the first embodiment is 0.7×10 −2 μN/nm or more and less than 1.2×10 −2 μN/nm. In this aspect, the lower limit of the load curve slope is preferably 0.75×10 -2 μN/nm or more, more preferably 0.8×10 -2 μN/nm or more (for example, 0.85×10 -2 μN/nm). nm or more), and the upper limit is preferably less than 1.1×10 −2 μN/nm, more preferably less than 1.0×10 −2 μN/nm, and further preferably 0.95×10 −2 μN. /Nm (eg less than 0.8×10 -2 μN/nm). The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the second embodiment has a load curve gradient of 1.2×10 −2 μN/nm or more and 7×10 −2 μN/nm or less. In this aspect, the lower limit of the load curve slope is preferably 1.4×10 −2 μN/nm or more (for example, 1.8×10 −2 μN/nm or more), and 2×10 −2 μN/nm or more. (For example, 3×10 −2 μN/nm or more). The upper limit is preferably 5×10 −2 μN/nm or less, more preferably 4.5×10 −2 μN/nm or less (for example, 4×10 −2 μN/nm or less). The above numerical range is appropriately determined in consideration of the suppression of adhesive strength over time and good adhesiveness.

 ここに開示される粘着剤層は、ナノインデンテーション法による除荷曲線の最小荷重が0μN未満であることが好ましい。除荷時に圧子にかかる荷重が負の方向であることは、粘着剤層に押し込まれた圧子が引き抜かれ難いことを意味し、ひいては粘着剤が凝集力を有することを示唆する。このような粘着剤層は、被着体表面に対する濡れが進みにくく、経時粘着力が上昇し難い。除荷曲線の最小荷重は、より好ましくは-0.1μN以下であり、例えば-0.5μN以下(典型的には-0.6μN未満、さらには-0.8μN未満)であってもよく、-1μN以下、-2μN以下であってもよい。また、除荷曲線の最小荷重が低いことは、圧子に対する吸着性(接着力)を評価していることでもあり得る。この要素の軽剥離性への影響を考慮して、除荷曲線の最小荷重は-8μN以上とすることが適当であり、好ましくは-5μN以上、より好ましくは-3μN以上であり、例えば-2μN以上(より具体的には-2.0μN以上、典型的には-1.8μN以上)、-1μN以上であってもよい。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein preferably has a minimum load of an unloading curve by the nanoindentation method of less than 0 μN. The fact that the load applied to the indenter in the unloading direction is in the negative direction means that the indenter pushed into the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is difficult to be pulled out, and thus the pressure-sensitive adhesive has a cohesive force. In such an adhesive layer, it is difficult for the adherend surface to wet the surface of the adherend, and it is difficult for the adhesive strength to increase with time. The minimum load of the unloading curve is more preferably −0.1 μN or less, for example −0.5 μN or less (typically less than −0.6 μN, or even less than −0.8 μN), It may be -1 μN or less and -2 μN or less. Further, the fact that the minimum load of the unloading curve is low may be that the adsorbability (adhesive force) to the indenter is evaluated. Considering the influence of this element on the light peeling property, it is appropriate that the minimum load of the unloading curve is -8 μN or more, preferably -5 μN or more, more preferably -3 μN or more, for example -2 μN. Or more (more specifically, −2.0 μN or more, typically −1.8 μN or more), or −1 μN or more.

 また、上記第1実施形態に係る粘着剤層の除荷曲線の最小荷重は、-8μN以上-1μN未満である。この態様では、上記除荷曲線の最小荷重の下限は、好ましくは-5μN以上、より好ましくは-3μN以上であり、その上限は、好ましくは-1.5μN未満、より好ましくは-1.8μN未満、さらに好ましくは-2μN未満である。上記第2実施形態に係る粘着剤層は、上記除荷曲線の最小荷重が-1μN以上0μN以下である。この態様では、上記除荷曲線の最小荷重の下限は、好ましくは-0.5μN以上、より好ましくは-0.4μN以上(例えば-0.3μN以上、より具体的には-0.3μN超、さらには-0.25μN以上)であり、-0.2μN以上(例えば-0.15μN以上)であってもよい。その上限は、好ましくは-0.1μN以下であり、例えば-0.15μN以下、-0.2μN以下であってもよい。 The minimum load of the unloading curve of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the first embodiment is -8 μN or more and less than -1 μN. In this aspect, the lower limit of the minimum load of the unloading curve is preferably −5 μN or more, more preferably −3 μN or more, and the upper limit is preferably less than −1.5 μN, more preferably less than −1.8 μN. , And more preferably less than −2 μN. In the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to the second embodiment, the minimum load on the unloading curve is −1 μN or more and 0 μN or less. In this aspect, the lower limit of the minimum load of the unloading curve is preferably −0.5 μN or more, more preferably −0.4 μN or more (eg, −0.3 μN or more, more specifically −0.3 μN or more, Further, it may be −0.25 μN or more) and may be −0.2 μN or more (eg, −0.15 μN or more). The upper limit is preferably −0.1 μN or less, and may be, for example, −0.15 μN or less, −0.2 μN or less.

 他の一態様に係る粘着剤層の表面硬さは0.5MPa以下であり得る。表面硬さが0.5MPa以下である粘着剤層を用いることで、保護シートは被着体表面によく密着し、被着体との間からの水の滲入を防ぐことができる。好ましい一態様では、粘着剤層の表面硬さは0.45MPa未満であり、より好ましくは0.4MPa未満(典型的には0.38MPa未満、例えば0.35MPa未満)であり、例えば0.3MPa未満であってもよい。上記表面硬さの下限は、特に限定されず、凡そ0.1MPa以上とすることが適当であり、軽剥離性や、経時粘着力の上昇抑制等の観点から、好ましくは0.2MPa以上、より好ましくは0.25MPa以上(典型的には0.3MPa以上、例えば0.32MPa以上、さらには0.34MPa以上)である。 The surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to another aspect may be 0.5 MPa or less. By using the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a surface hardness of 0.5 MPa or less, the protective sheet adheres well to the surface of the adherend and can prevent the infiltration of water from the space between the adherend and the adherend. In a preferred embodiment, the surface hardness of the adhesive layer is less than 0.45 MPa, more preferably less than 0.4 MPa (typically less than 0.38 MPa, eg less than 0.35 MPa), eg 0.3 MPa. It may be less than. The lower limit of the surface hardness is not particularly limited, and it is suitable to be about 0.1 MPa or more, and preferably 0.2 MPa or more, more preferably from the viewpoint of light peelability and suppression of increase in adhesive strength with time. The pressure is preferably 0.25 MPa or more (typically 0.3 MPa or more, for example 0.32 MPa or more, further 0.34 MPa or more).

 好ましい一態様に係る粘着剤層は、所定の深度までの押込み深さ[nm]に対する荷重[μN]の比で表わされるナノインデンテーション法による負荷曲線傾き(以下、単に「負荷曲線傾き」ともいう。)が1.2×10-2μN/nm未満である。上記負荷曲線傾き[μN/nm]から、粘着剤層表層部分における弾性(圧縮弾性率)に相当する情報が得られる。被着体表面への密着性の観点から、負荷曲線傾きは、より好ましくは1.1×10-2μN/nm未満、さらに好ましくは1.0×10-2μN/nm未満、特に好ましくは0.95×10-2μN/nm未満(例えば0.8×10-2μN/nm未満)である。負荷曲線傾きの下限は、特に限定されず、凡そ0.5×10-2μN/nm以上とすることが適当であり、適度な弾性を有して糊残り等を防止する観点から、好ましくは0.6×10-2μN/nm以上、より好ましくは0.7×10-2μN/nm以上、さらに好ましくは0.75×10-2μN/nm以上、特に好ましくは0.8×10-2μN/nm以上(例えば0.85×10-2μN/nm以上)である。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to a preferred aspect is a load curve slope by a nanoindentation method represented by a ratio of a load [μN] to an indentation depth [nm] up to a predetermined depth (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “load curve slope”). .) is less than 1.2×10 −2 μN/nm. Information corresponding to elasticity (compressive elastic modulus) in the surface layer portion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be obtained from the slope of the load curve [μN/nm]. From the viewpoint of adhesion to the surface of the adherend, the slope of the load curve is more preferably less than 1.1×10 −2 μN/nm, further preferably less than 1.0×10 −2 μN/nm, and particularly preferably It is less than 0.95×10 -2 μN/nm (for example, less than 0.8×10 -2 μN/nm). The lower limit of the slope of the load curve is not particularly limited, and it is suitable to be about 0.5×10 −2 μN/nm or more, and preferably from the viewpoint of having an appropriate elasticity and preventing adhesive residue and the like. 0.6×10 -2 μN/nm or more, more preferably 0.7×10 -2 μN/nm or more, further preferably 0.75×10 -2 μN/nm or more, particularly preferably 0.8×10 It is −2 μN/nm or more (for example, 0.85×10 −2 μN/nm or more).

 ここに開示される粘着剤層は、ナノインデンテーション法による除荷曲線の最小荷重が-8μN以上であることが好ましい。除荷時に圧子にかかる荷重が所定以上であることは、粘着剤層に押し込まれた圧子が引き抜かれやすいことを意味し、ひいては粘着剤の凝集力が制限されていることを示唆する。このような粘着剤層は、被着体表面に対する濡れが進みやすく、被着体表面に密着しやすい。除荷曲線の最小荷重は、より好ましくは-5μN以上、さらに好ましくは-3μN以上(例えば-2.5μN以上)である。除荷曲線の最小荷重は、特に限定されず凡そ0μN未満であることが適当である。粘着剤が硬い場合にも、粘着剤層に押し込まれた圧子は引き抜かれやすくなり、除荷曲線の最小荷重は高い範囲(例えば0μN付近)となり得る。そのようなことを考慮し、適度な柔らかさと濡れ性とを得る観点から、除荷曲線の最小荷重は、好ましくは-0.3μN以下(典型的には-0.6μN未満、さらには-0.8μN未満)、より好ましくは-1μN以下、さらに好ましくは-1.5μN以下、特に好ましくは-2μN以下(例えば-2.5μN以下)である。 The adhesive layer disclosed herein preferably has a minimum load of -8 μN or more on the unloading curve by the nanoindentation method. The fact that the load applied to the indenter at the time of unloading is more than a predetermined value means that the indenter pushed into the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is easy to be pulled out, which suggests that the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is limited. Such an adhesive layer easily wets the surface of the adherend and easily adheres to the surface of the adherend. The minimum load of the unloading curve is more preferably −5 μN or more, further preferably −3 μN or more (eg −2.5 μN or more). The minimum load of the unloading curve is not particularly limited and it is suitable that it is approximately less than 0 μN. Even when the pressure-sensitive adhesive is hard, the indenter pushed into the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is easily pulled out, and the minimum load of the unloading curve can be in a high range (for example, around 0 μN). In consideration of such matters, from the viewpoint of obtaining appropriate softness and wettability, the minimum load of the unloading curve is preferably −0.3 μN or less (typically less than −0.6 μN, and further −0). Less than 0.8 μN), more preferably −1 μN or less, still more preferably −1.5 μN or less, and particularly preferably −2 μN or less (eg −2.5 μN or less).

 粘着剤層の表面硬さ、負荷曲線傾きおよび除荷曲線の最小荷重は、ナノインデンテーション法に基づき、粘着剤層の表面(接着面)から該粘着剤層に向けて微小圧子を、粘着剤層の厚さ6%に相当する深さ(深度6%ともいう。粘着剤層厚さが10μmの場合、600nm)および深さ300nm(深度300nm)のうち浅い方の深さまで押し込み(例えば、粘着剤層厚さが10μmの場合は300nm、粘着剤層厚さが2μmの場合は120nmまで押し込み)、次いで引き抜く操作を行い、このとき上記圧子に加わる荷重(縦軸)の推移を接着面を基準とする圧子の変位(横軸)に対してプロットすることで得られる負荷(押し込み)-除荷(引き抜き)曲線から求められる。粘着剤層の表面硬さ[MPa]は、深度6%および深さ300nmのうち浅い方の深度まで押し込んだときの負荷曲線の最大荷重(Pmax)[μN]を圧子の接触投影面積(A)で除すことにより求められる。負荷曲線傾き[μN/nm]は、Pmax[μN]を押込み深さ(D)[nm]で除すことにより求められる。すなわち、粘着剤層の表面硬さおよび負荷曲線傾きは下式より算出される。
   表面硬さ[MPa]=Pmax/A
   負荷曲線傾き[μN/nm]=Pmax[μN]/D[nm]
 除荷曲線の最小荷重[μN]は、除荷曲線の最小値である。
 上記ナノインデンテーション法において、粘着剤層の厚さ6%に相当する深さか、あるいは深さ300nmで測定を実施することにより、例えば後述する実施例のように薄い粘着剤層についても、粘着剤層を支持する基材層等の影響を受けることなく、該粘着剤層表層部分の挙動を的確に評価することができる。なお、上記深さを大きくすると、基材層の影響を検出する可能性があり、また装置(典型的には圧子サイズ)の制限もある。一方、薄厚の粘着剤層では深度が6%未満では応力が小さく有意差を検出し難くなる傾向がある。よって、ここに開示される技術では、深度6%および300nmのうち浅い方の深さを最適深度として採用する。
The surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the load curve slope, and the minimum load of the unloading curve are determined based on the nanoindentation method by applying a minute indenter from the surface (adhesive surface) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. A depth corresponding to a layer thickness of 6% (also referred to as a depth of 6%. 600 nm when the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer thickness is 10 μm) and a depth of 300 nm (a depth of 300 nm) are pushed to a shallower depth (for example, adhesiveness). When the adhesive layer thickness is 10 μm, push it to 300 nm, and when the adhesive layer thickness is 2 μm, push it to 120 nm), and then pull it out. At this time, the transition of the load (vertical axis) applied to the indenter is based on the adhesive surface. It is obtained from the load (push-in)-unload (pull-out) curve obtained by plotting against the displacement (horizontal axis) of the indenter. The surface hardness [MPa] of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is the maximum projected load (Pmax) [μN] of the load curve when the depth is 6% and the depth of 300 nm is the shallower of the contact projection area (A). It is calculated by dividing by. The load curve slope [μN/nm] is obtained by dividing Pmax [μN] by the indentation depth (D) [nm]. That is, the surface hardness and the load curve slope of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are calculated by the following equations.
Surface hardness [MPa]=Pmax/A
Load curve slope [μN/nm]=Pmax [μN]/D [nm]
The minimum load [μN] of the unloading curve is the minimum value of the unloading curve.
In the nanoindentation method, by performing the measurement at a depth corresponding to a thickness of 6% of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or a depth of 300 nm, the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be used even for a thin pressure-sensitive adhesive layer as in Examples described later. The behavior of the surface layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be accurately evaluated without being affected by the base material layer supporting the layer. If the depth is increased, the influence of the base material layer may be detected, and the device (typically indenter size) is also limited. On the other hand, in the case of a thin pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, if the depth is less than 6%, the stress tends to be small and it becomes difficult to detect a significant difference. Therefore, in the technique disclosed herein, the shallower depth of 6% and 300 nm is adopted as the optimum depth.

 上記の表面硬さ、負荷曲線傾きおよび除荷曲線の最小荷重は、ナノインデンテーション法に基づき、例えば、Hysitron社製のTriboindenterを用いて、以下の条件で測定することができる。
  [測定条件]
 使用圧子:Berkovich(三角錐)型ダイヤモンド圧子
 測定方法:単一押し込み測定
 測定温度:室温(25℃)
 押込み深さ設定:粘着剤層厚さの6%または300nm
 押込み速度:100nm/秒
 引抜き速度:100nm/秒
The surface hardness, the load curve slope, and the minimum load of the unloading curve can be measured based on the nanoindentation method, for example, using a Triboindenter manufactured by Hysitron under the following conditions.
[Measurement condition]
Indenter used: Berkovich (triangular pyramid) diamond indenter Measuring method: Single indentation measuring temperature: Room temperature (25°C)
Indentation depth setting: 6% of adhesive layer thickness or 300 nm
Pushing speed: 100 nm/sec Pulling speed: 100 nm/sec

 上記の表面硬さ、負荷曲線傾きおよび除荷曲線の最小荷重は、粘着剤に含まれるポリマーの組成(モノマー組成)やガラス転移温度(Tg)、分子量、架橋剤の種類や添加量等により調節することができる。上記特性の調節に利用し得る他の要素としては、ゲル分率、上記ポリマーの重合方法、重合条件等が挙げられる。 The surface hardness, the slope of the load curve, and the minimum load of the unloading curve are adjusted by the composition of the polymer (monomer composition), the glass transition temperature (Tg), the molecular weight, and the type and addition amount of the crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive. can do. Other factors that can be used for adjusting the above properties include gel fraction, polymerization method of the above polymers, polymerization conditions and the like.

 なお、深度6%としたときの表面硬さ、負荷曲線傾きおよび除荷曲線の最小荷重を、それぞれ深度6%表面硬さ、深度6%負荷曲線傾きおよび深度6%除荷曲線の最小荷重という。また、深度300nmとしたときの表面硬さ、負荷曲線傾きおよび除荷曲線の最小荷重を、それぞれ深度300nm表面硬さ、深度300nm負荷曲線傾きおよび深度300nm除荷曲線の最小荷重という。ここに開示される技術において、表面硬さは、深度6%表面硬さおよび深度300nm表面硬さを包含する。また、負荷曲線傾きは、深度6%負荷曲線傾きおよび深度300nm負荷曲線傾きを包含する。さらに、除荷曲線の最小荷重は、深度6%除荷曲線の最小荷重および深度300nm除荷曲線の最小荷重を包含する。 The surface hardness, the load curve slope and the minimum load of the unloading curve when the depth is 6% are referred to as the depth 6% surface hardness, the depth 6% load curve slope and the minimum load of the depth 6% unloading curve, respectively. .. In addition, the surface hardness, the load curve slope and the minimum load of the unloading curve when the depth is 300 nm are referred to as the depth 300 nm surface hardness, the depth 300 nm load curve slope, and the minimum load of the depth 300 nm unloading curve, respectively. In the technology disclosed herein, surface hardness includes 6% depth surface hardness and 300 nm depth surface hardness. Further, the load curve slope includes a depth 6% load curve slope and a depth 300 nm load curve slope. Further, the minimum load of the unloading curve includes the minimum load of the 6% depth unloading curve and the minimum load of the 300 nm depth unloading curve.

 <粘着剤層>
 ここに開示される粘着剤層を構成する粘着剤の種類は特に限定されない。上記粘着剤層は、例えば、アクリル系、ポリエステル系、ウレタン系、ポリエーテル系、ゴム系、シリコーン系、ポリアミド系、フッ素系等の各種ポリマー(粘着成分としてのポリマー、あるいは粘着性ポリマーともいう。)から選択される1種または2種以上をベースポリマー(ポリマー成分のなかの主成分、すなわち50重量%以上を占める成分。)として含む粘着剤組成物から形成された粘着剤層であり得る。ここに開示される技術は、例えば、アクリル系粘着剤層やゴム系粘着剤層を備えた保護シートの形態で好ましく実施され得る。
<Adhesive layer>
The type of the pressure-sensitive adhesive that constitutes the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is, for example, various polymers such as acryl-based, polyester-based, urethane-based, polyether-based, rubber-based, silicone-based, polyamide-based, and fluorine-based polymers (also referred to as a pressure-sensitive adhesive polymer or a pressure-sensitive adhesive polymer). It can be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing as a base polymer (a main component among polymer components, that is, a component occupying 50% by weight or more) selected from the above. The technology disclosed herein can be preferably implemented in the form of a protective sheet provided with, for example, an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer or a rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.

 ここで「アクリル系粘着剤層」とは、アクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする粘着剤層を指す。同様に、「ゴム系粘着剤層」とは、ゴム系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする粘着剤層を指す。「アクリル系ポリマー」とは、一分子中に少なくともひとつの(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するモノマー(以下、これを「アクリル系モノマー」ということがある。)を主構成単量体成分(モノマーの主成分、すなわちアクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマーの総量のうち50重量%以上を占める成分)とするポリマーを指す。また、本明細書中において「(メタ)アクリロイル基」とは、アクリロイル基およびメタクリロイル基を包括的に指す意味である。同様に、「(メタ)アクリレート」とは、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートを包括的に指す意味である。 The term "acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer" as used herein refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having an acrylic polymer as a base polymer. Similarly, the “rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive layer” refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a rubber-based polymer as a base polymer. “Acrylic polymer” means a monomer having at least one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule (hereinafter, this may be referred to as “acrylic monomer”) as a main constituent monomer component (mainly monomer). Component, that is, a component which accounts for 50% by weight or more of the total amount of monomers constituting the acrylic polymer). In addition, in the present specification, the term “(meth)acryloyl group” means a generic term for an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group. Similarly, the term "(meth)acrylate" is used to mean a generic term for acrylate and methacrylate.

 (アクリル系ポリマー)
 上記アクリル系ポリマーとしては、例えば、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート(以下「モノマーA」ともいう。)を含み、該アルキル(メタ)アクリレートと共重合性を有する他のモノマー(以下「モノマーB」ともいう。)をさらに含み得るモノマー原料の重合物が好ましい。上記アクリル系ポリマーは、典型的には、上記モノマー原料に含まれるモノマー成分の組成に対応する共重合組成を有する。
(Acrylic polymer)
The acrylic polymer includes, for example, an alkyl (meth)acrylate (hereinafter also referred to as “monomer A”) and another monomer having copolymerizability with the alkyl (meth)acrylate (hereinafter also referred to as “monomer B”). The polymer of the monomer raw material which can further include .) is preferable. The acrylic polymer typically has a copolymerization composition corresponding to the composition of the monomer component contained in the monomer raw material.

 モノマーAとしては、次の一般式(1)で表わされるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートを好ましく使用し得る。
   CH=C(R)COOR       (1)
 ここで、上記式(1)中のRは、水素原子またはメチル基である。また、Rは、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基である。以下、このような炭素原子数の範囲を「C1-20」と表すことがある。重合反応性や重合安定性等の観点から、RがC1-16のアルキル基であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく、RがC1-12(典型的にはC1-10、例えばC1-8)のアルキル基であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートがより好ましい。
As the monomer A, an alkyl(meth)acrylate represented by the following general formula (1) can be preferably used.
CH 2 =C(R 1 )COOR 2 (1)
Here, R 1 in the above formula (1) is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 2 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Hereinafter, such a range of the number of carbon atoms may be represented as “C 1-20 ”. From the viewpoint of polymerization reactivity and polymerization stability, an alkyl (meth)acrylate in which R 2 is a C 1-16 alkyl group is preferable, and R 2 is C 1-12 (typically C 1-10 , for example, Alkyl (meth)acrylate, which is a C 1-8 ) alkyl group, is more preferable.

 RがC1-20のアルキル基であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えばメチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、s-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘプチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、n-オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ノニル(メタ)アクリレート、イソノニル(メタ)アクリレート、n-デシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ウンデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ラウリル(メタ)アクリレート、トリデシル(メタ)アクリレート、テトラデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘプタデシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクタデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ノナデシル(メタ)アクリレート、エイコシル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。このようなアルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Examples of the alkyl(meth)acrylate in which R 2 is a C 1-20 alkyl group include, for example, methyl(meth)acrylate, ethyl(meth)acrylate, propyl(meth)acrylate, isopropyl(meth)acrylate, n-butyl(meth)acrylate. ) Acrylate, isobutyl(meth)acrylate, s-butyl(meth)acrylate, t-butyl(meth)acrylate, pentyl(meth)acrylate, isopentyl(meth)acrylate, hexyl(meth)acrylate, heptyl(meth)acrylate, 2 -Ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate, isononyl (meth)acrylate, n-decyl (meth)acrylate, isodecyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (Meth)acrylate, lauryl (meth)acrylate, tridecyl (meth)acrylate, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate, pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, hexadecyl (meth)acrylate, heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate, nonadecyl (meth) ) Acrylate, eicosyl (meth)acrylate and the like. Such alkyl (meth)acrylates may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 ここに開示される技術は、モノマーAとしてのアルキルアクリレートが上記全モノマー成分中の凡そ50重量%以上(より好ましくは凡そ75重量%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ90重量%以上、例えば凡そ95重量%以上)を占める態様で好ましく実施され得る。上記アルキルアクリレートとしては、上記式(1)中のRがC1-20のアルキル基であるアルキルアクリレートが好ましく、RがC1-12(さらに好ましくはC1-10、特に好ましくはC1-8)のアルキル基であるアルキルアクリレートがより好ましい。ここに開示される技術は、上記アルキルアクリレートが、上記式(1)中のRがC2-8(典型的にはC4-8)のアルキル基であるアルキルアクリレートである態様でも好ましく実施され得る。アルキルアクリレートは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。2種以上のアルキルアクリレートを用いる場合、アクリル系ポリマーのTgを最適範囲に調節する等の理由から、RがC4-20(より好ましくはC4-10、さらに好ましくはC4-8)のアルキル基であるアルキルアクリレートA1と、C1-3(より好ましくはC1-2、例えばC)のアルキル基であるアルキルアクリレートA2とを併用してもよい。その場合、アルキルアクリレートA1とアルキルアクリレートA2との重量比(A1:A2)は特に限定されず、通常は凡そ5:95~95:5であり、凡そ10:90~90:10とすることが適当であり、例えば凡そ15:85~85:15である。 The technique disclosed herein is such that the alkyl acrylate as the monomer A is about 50% by weight or more (more preferably about 75% by weight or more, further preferably about 90% by weight or more, for example, about 95% by weight, based on the total monomer components. The above can be preferably carried out. The alkyl acrylate is preferably an alkyl acrylate in which R 2 in the above formula (1) is a C 1-20 alkyl group, and R 2 is C 1-12 (more preferably C 1-10 , particularly preferably C 1 ). Alkyl acrylate which is an alkyl group of 1-8 ) is more preferable. The technique disclosed herein is also preferably carried out in an embodiment in which the alkyl acrylate is an alkyl acrylate in which R 2 in the formula (1) is a C 2-8 (typically C 4-8 ) alkyl group. Can be done. The alkyl acrylates may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds of alkyl acrylates are used, R 2 is C 4-20 (more preferably C 4-10 , further preferably C 4-8 ) for the reason that the Tg of the acrylic polymer is adjusted to the optimum range. The alkyl acrylate A1 which is an alkyl group of 1 and the alkyl acrylate A2 which is a C 1-3 (more preferably C 1-2 , for example C 2 ) alkyl group may be used in combination. In that case, the weight ratio (A1:A2) of the alkyl acrylate A1 and the alkyl acrylate A2 is not particularly limited, and is usually about 5:95 to 95:5, and about 10:90 to 90:10. It is suitable, for example, about 15:85 to 85:15.

 好ましい一態様では、上記モノマー成分は、モノマーAとして1種または2種以上のアルキルメタクリレートを含む。アルキルメタクリレートを用いることにより、所望の粘着剤硬さを実現し得るベースポリマーを好ましく設計することができる。上記アルキルメタクリレートとしては、上記式(1)中のRがC1-10のアルキル基であるアルキルメタクリレートが好ましく、RがC1-4(さらに好ましくはCまたはC2-4)のアルキル基であるアルキルメタクリレートがより好ましい。上記アルキルメタクリレートは、好ましくはアルキルアクリレートと併用され得る。アルキルメタクリレートとアルキルアクリレートとを併用する場合、1種または2種以上のアルキルメタクリレート(例えばC2-4アルキルメタクリレート)の重量CAMと、1種または2種以上のアルキルアクリレートの重量CAAとの比(CAM:CAA)は特に限定されず、一態様では、通常は凡そ1:9~9:1であり、凡そ2:8~8:2とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ3:7~7:3、より好ましくは凡そ4:6~6:4である。他の一態様では、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの総量(CAM+CAA)に占めるアルキルメタクリレート(例えばCアルキルメタクリレート、すなわちメチルメタクリレート(MMA))の重量CAMは、通常は凡そ30重量%以下、凡そ20重量%以下が適当であり、好ましくは凡そ10重量%以下、より好ましくは凡そ7重量%以下である。一方、その下限は、通常は凡そ0.1重量%以上、凡そ1重量%以上が適当であり、好ましくは凡そ2重量%以上(例えば凡そ3重量%以上)である。
 なお、ここに開示される技術は、モノマー成分がモノマーAとしてアルキルメタクリレートを実質的に含まない態様で実施することができ、アルキルメタクリレートを使用する態様においては、例えばC1-3アルキルメタクリレート(典型的にはMMA)を含まない態様で実施することができる。
In a preferred embodiment, the monomer component contains, as the monomer A, one kind or two or more kinds of alkyl methacrylate. By using alkyl methacrylate, it is possible to preferably design a base polymer that can achieve a desired adhesive hardness. The above-mentioned alkyl methacrylate is preferably an alkyl methacrylate in which R 2 in the above formula (1) is a C 1-10 alkyl group, and R 2 is a C 1-4 (more preferably C 1 or C 2-4 ) Alkyl methacrylate, which is an alkyl group, is more preferable. The alkyl methacrylates can preferably be used in combination with alkyl acrylates. When the alkyl methacrylate and the alkyl acrylate are used in combination, the weight C AM of one or more kinds of alkyl methacrylate (for example, C 2-4 alkyl methacrylate) and the weight C AA of one or more kinds of alkyl acrylate are used. The ratio (C AM :C AA ) is not particularly limited, and in one embodiment, it is usually about 1:9 to 9:1, and it is suitable to be about 2:8 to 8:2, preferably about It is 3:7 to 7:3, more preferably about 4:6 to 6:4. In another aspect, the weight C AM of alkyl methacrylate (eg, C 1 alkyl methacrylate, or methyl methacrylate (MMA)) in the total amount of alkyl (meth)acrylate (C AM +C AA ) is usually about 30 wt% or less. Approximately 20% by weight or less is suitable, preferably approximately 10% by weight or less, more preferably approximately 7% by weight or less. On the other hand, the lower limit is usually about 0.1% by weight or more and about 1% by weight or more, and preferably about 2% by weight or more (for example, about 3% by weight or more).
The technique disclosed herein can be carried out in a mode in which the monomer component does not substantially contain alkyl methacrylate as the monomer A. In the mode in which the alkyl methacrylate is used, for example, C 1-3 alkyl methacrylate (typically Specifically, it can be carried out in a mode not including MMA).

 他の好ましい一態様では、アクリル系ポリマーは、アルキル基の炭素原子数が4~9のアルキルアクリレート(以下、モノマーmともいう。)を含み、必要に応じて他のモノマーを含み得るモノマー原料の重合物である。アクリル系ポリマーは、対応する組成(モノマー組成)のモノマー原料を公知の方法で重合させることにより合成することができる。 In another preferred embodiment, the acrylic polymer contains an alkyl acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms (hereinafter, also referred to as a monomer m A ), and may contain another monomer as necessary. It is a polymer of. The acrylic polymer can be synthesized by polymerizing a monomer raw material having a corresponding composition (monomer composition) by a known method.

 モノマーmの非限定的な例として、n-ブチルアクリレート(BA)、n-へキシルアクリレート、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート(2EHA)、n-オクチルアクリレート、n-ノニルアクリレートおよびイソノニルアクリレート(iNA)が挙げられる。アルキル基中に-(CH-構造を含むアルキルアクリレートが好ましく、アルキル基中に-(CH-構造を含むアルキルアクリレートがより好ましい。モノマーmの好適例として、2EHA,BAおよびiNAが挙げられる。モノマーmは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Non-limiting examples of the monomer m A include n-butyl acrylate (BA), n-hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), n-octyl acrylate, n-nonyl acrylate and isononyl acrylate (iNA). Can be mentioned. An alkyl acrylate having a —(CH 2 ) 3 — structure in the alkyl group is preferable, and an alkyl acrylate having a —(CH 2 ) 4 — structure in the alkyl group is more preferable. Suitable examples of monomers m A, 2EHA, include BA and iNA. As the monomer m A , one type can be used alone, or two or more types can be used in combination.

 モノマーmの使用量は、典型的には、アクリル系ポリマーの合成に用いられるモノマー原料全体の40重量%以上である。モノマー組成中にモノマーmを40重量%以上の割合で含むことは、アクリル系ポリマーを含む粘着剤層の柔軟性や低温特性向上の観点から有利である。かかる観点から、モノマーmの割合は、45重量%以上とすることが好ましく、50重量%以上(例えば50重量%超)としてもよい。また、モノマー組成中におけるモノマーmの割合を99.9重量%以下とすることにより、アクリル系ポリマーを含む粘着剤層に適度な凝集性を付与しやすくなる。かかる観点から、上記モノマーmの割合は、95重量%以下とすることが好ましく、90重量%以下とすることがより好ましく、85重量%以下としてもよい。一態様において、上記モノマーmの割合を80重量%未満としてもよく、70重量%未満(例えば65重量%以下)としてもよい。 The amount of monomer m A is typically at least 40 wt% of the total monomer raw material used in the synthesis of the acrylic polymer. Comprise a monomer m A in a proportion of more than 40 wt% in the monomer composition is advantageous in terms of flexibility and low-temperature characteristics improve pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer. From this viewpoint, the ratio of the monomers m A is preferably 45 wt% or more, may be 50 wt% or more (e.g., 50 wt.%). Further, by the ratio of monomer m A in the monomer in the composition and 99.9 wt% or less, it becomes easy to impart moderate cohesiveness to the adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer. From this viewpoint, the proportion of the monomers m A is preferably 95 wt% or less, more preferably 90 wt% or less, may be 85 wt% or less. In one embodiment, it may be less than 80 wt% the proportion of the monomers m A, may be less than 70 wt% (e.g. 65 wt% or less).

 ここに開示される技術におけるアクリル系ポリマーは、モノマーBとしてカルボキシ基含有モノマー(以下、モノマーmともいう。)を含むモノマー組成を有していてもよい。すなわち、アクリル系ポリマーにはモノマーmが共重合されていてもよい。モノマーmは、アクリル系ポリマーに架橋点を導入したり、アクリル系ポリマーを含む粘着剤層の凝集力を高めたりするために役立ち得る。モノマーmは、また、アクリル系ポリマーを含む粘着剤層と基材層との密着性(投錨性)を高めることで非糊残り性の向上に役立ち得る。カルボキシ基含有モノマーとしては、例えばアクリル酸、メタクリル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、カルボキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルボキシペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、1-[2-(メタクリロイルオキシ)エチル]コハク酸等のエチレン性不飽和モノカルボン酸;マレイン酸、フマル酸、イタコン酸、シトラコン酸等のエチレン性不飽和ジカルボン酸およびその無水物(例えば無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸);等が挙げられる。カルボキシ基含有モノマーは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 The acrylic polymer in the technique disclosed herein may have a monomer composition containing a carboxy group-containing monomer (hereinafter, also referred to as a monomer m B ) as the monomer B. That is, the monomer m B may be copolymerized with the acrylic polymer. The monomer m B can be useful for introducing a cross-linking point in the acrylic polymer and for enhancing the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing the acrylic polymer. The monomer m B can also help improve the non-adhesive residue property by increasing the adhesiveness (anchoring property) between the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer and the base material layer. Examples of the carboxy group-containing monomer include ethylene such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, carboxyethyl(meth)acrylate, carboxypentyl(meth)acrylate, and 1-[2-(methacryloyloxy)ethyl]succinic acid. And unsaturated monocarboxylic acids; ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as maleic acid, fumaric acid, itaconic acid and citraconic acid and anhydrides thereof (eg maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride); and the like. The carboxy group-containing monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 モノマーmを用いる場合、モノマー組成中におけるモノマーmの割合は特に限定されない。モノマーmの割合は、例えば0.05重量%以上とすることができ、0.1重量%以上が適当であり、重合安定性や分散安定性の観点から0.5重量%以上が好ましく、1重量%以上がより好ましい。また、剥離強度(粘着力)の過度な上昇を抑制する観点から、モノマーmの割合は凡そ20重量%以下(好ましくは凡そ10重量%以下、典型的には凡そ7重量%以下)が適当であり、凡そ5重量%以下がより好ましく、凡そ4重量%以下(例えば3重量%以下)がさらに好ましい。 When the monomer m B is used, the proportion of the monomer m B in the monomer composition is not particularly limited. The proportion of the monomer m B can be, for example, 0.05% by weight or more, suitably 0.1% by weight or more, and preferably 0.5% by weight or more from the viewpoint of polymerization stability and dispersion stability. It is more preferably 1% by weight or more. From the viewpoint of suppressing an excessive increase in peel strength (adhesive force), the proportion of the monomer m B is preferably about 20% by weight or less (preferably about 10% by weight or less, typically about 7% by weight or less). Is about 5% by weight or less, more preferably about 4% by weight or less (for example, 3% by weight or less).

 ここに開示される技術におけるアクリル系ポリマーには、該アクリル系ポリマーのガラス転移温度(Tg)の調節等を目的として、モノマーAとして、アルキル基の炭素原子数が4~20であってホモポリマーのTgが-50℃以上であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレート(以下、モノマーmともいう。)が共重合されていてもよい。ここで、上述したモノマーmに属するモノマーは、モノマーmのカテゴリーからは除かれる。モノマーmは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。モノマーmとしては、ホモポリマーのTgが-40℃~+60℃の範囲にあるものが好ましく、-30℃~+40℃(例えば-20℃~+30℃)の範囲にあるものがより好ましい。好ましく使用し得るモノマーmの非限定的な例として、n-ブチルメタクリレート(BMA)、2-エチルヘキシルメタクリレートおよびラウリルアクリレートが挙げられる。 The acrylic polymer in the technology disclosed herein is a homopolymer in which the alkyl group has 4 to 20 carbon atoms as the monomer A for the purpose of adjusting the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic polymer, and the like. Alkyl (meth)acrylate having Tg of −50° C. or higher (hereinafter, also referred to as monomer m C ) may be copolymerized. Here, the above-mentioned monomers belonging to the monomer m A are excluded from the category of the monomer m C. As the monomer m C , one type can be used alone, or two or more types can be used in combination. The monomer m C preferably has a homopolymer Tg in the range of −40° C. to +60° C., more preferably in the range of −30° C. to +40° C. (eg, −20° C. to +30° C.). Non-limiting examples of preferably used monomers m C include n-butyl methacrylate (BMA), 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate and lauryl acrylate.

 モノマーmを用いる場合、モノマー組成中におけるモノマーmの割合は特に限定されない。モノマーmの割合は、例えば1重量%以上とすることができ、5重量%以上としてもよく、10重量%以上としてもよく、さらには15重量%以上としてもよい。一態様において、モノマーmの効果をよりよく発揮させる観点から、モノマー組成中におけるモノマーmの割合は、20重量%以上としてもよく、25重量%以上としてもよく、30重量%以上としてもよく、さらには35重量%以上(例えば40重量%以上)としてもよい。また、モノマー組成中におけるモノマーmの割合は60重量%未満とすることができ、柔軟性や低温特性向上の観点から、凡そ55重量%以下(典型的には凡そ50重量%以下、例えば凡そ45重量%以下)とすることが適当である。いくつかの態様において、上記モノマーmの割合は30重量%未満であってもよく、20重量%未満でもよく、10重量%未満(例えば5重量%未満、さらには1重量%未満)でもよい。 When the monomer m C is used, the proportion of the monomer m C in the monomer composition is not particularly limited. The proportion of the monomer m C may be, for example, 1% by weight or more, may be 5% by weight or more, may be 10% by weight or more, and may be 15% by weight or more. In one embodiment, from the viewpoint of better effective of monomers m C, the ratio of the monomers m C in the monomer in the composition may be more than 20 wt%, may be more than 25 wt%, even more than 30 wt% It may be 35 wt% or more (for example, 40 wt% or more). The proportion of the monomer m C in the monomer composition can be less than 60% by weight, and from the viewpoint of improving flexibility and low-temperature characteristics, it is approximately 55% by weight or less (typically approximately 50% by weight or less, for example, approximately 45% by weight or less) is suitable. In some embodiments, the proportion of the monomer m C may be less than 30% by weight, less than 20% by weight, less than 10% by weight (eg less than 5% by weight, even less than 1% by weight). ..

 ここに開示される技術におけるアクリル系ポリマーには、必要に応じて、モノマーm,m,m以外のモノマー(モノマーm)がモノマーAとして共重合されていてもよい。モノマーmとしては、モノマーmと共重合可能な各種のモノマーを、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 In the acrylic polymer in the technique disclosed herein, a monomer (monomer m D ) other than the monomers m A , m B , and m C may be copolymerized as the monomer A, if necessary. As the monomer m D , various monomers copolymerizable with the monomer m A can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 モノマーmとしては、例えば、上記一般式(1)で表わされるアルキル(メタ)アクリレート(モノマーmD1)(ただし、モノマーmまたはモノマーmに該当するものを除く。)を用いることができる。モノマーmD1として使用し得るアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの具体例としては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ラウリル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。モノマーmD1は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 As the monomer m D , for example, an alkyl(meth)acrylate represented by the above general formula (1) (monomer m D1 ) (excluding those corresponding to the monomer m A or the monomer m C ) can be used. .. Specific examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate that can be used as the monomer m D1 include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, and lauryl (meth)acrylate. The monomer m D1 can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 モノマーmとして使用可能な化合物の例には、以下のような官能基含有モノマー(モノマーB)が含まれ得る。このような官能基含有モノマーは、アクリル系ポリマーに架橋点を導入したり、アクリル系ポリマーの凝集力を高めたりするために役立ち得る。
 水酸基含有モノマー:例えば2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、6-ヒドロキシヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、8-ヒドロキシオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、10-ヒドロキシデシル(メタ)アクリレート、12-ヒドロキシラウリル(メタ)アクリレート、(4-ヒドロキシメチルシクロヘキシル)メチルアクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート類;ビニルアルコール、アリルアルコール等の不飽和アルコール類。
 アミド基含有モノマー:例えば(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ブチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メチロール(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メチロールプロパン(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ブトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、ジアセトン(メタ)アクリルアミド。
 イミド基含有モノマー:例えばN-イソプロピルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド、イタコンイミド。
 アミノ基含有モノマー:例えばアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、N,N-ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート。
 エポキシ基を有するモノマー:例えばグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、メチルグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、アリルグリシジルエーテル。
 シアノ基含有モノマー:例えばアクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリル。
 ケト基含有モノマー:例えばジアセトン(メタ)アクリルアミド、ジアセトン(メタ)アクリレート、ビニルメチルケトン、ビニルエチルケトン、アリルアセトアセテート、ビニルアセトアセテート。
 窒素原子含有環を有するモノマー:例えばN-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-メチルビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルピリジン、N-ビニルピペリドン、N-ビニルピリミジン、N-ビニルピペラジン、N-ビニルピラジン、N-ビニルピロール、N-ビニルイミダゾール、N-ビニルオキサゾール、N-ビニルモルホリン、N-ビニルカプロラクタム、N-(メタ)アクリロイルモルホリン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピロリドン。
 アルコキシシリル基含有モノマー:例えば3-(メタ)アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-(メタ)アクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-(メタ)アクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-(メタ)アクリロキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン。
Examples of the compound that can be used as the monomer m D may include the following functional group-containing monomers (monomer B). Such a functional group-containing monomer can be useful for introducing a cross-linking point into the acrylic polymer and increasing the cohesive force of the acrylic polymer.
Hydroxyl group-containing monomer: For example, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, Hydroxyalkyl (such as 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth)acrylate and (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl)methyl acrylate) (Meth)acrylates; unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol and allyl alcohol.
Amide group-containing monomer: For example, (meth)acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl(meth)acrylamide, N,N-diethyl(meth)acrylamide, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl(meth)acrylamide, N-butyl(meth)acrylamide , N-methylol(meth)acrylamide, N-methylolpropane(meth)acrylamide, N-methoxymethyl(meth)acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl(meth)acrylamide, diacetone(meth)acrylamide.
Imido group-containing monomer: for example, N-isopropylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, itacone imide.
Amino group-containing monomer: For example, aminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth)acrylate, t-butylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate.
Monomers having epoxy groups: for example, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, methylglycidyl (meth)acrylate, allylglycidyl ether.
Cyano group-containing monomer: for example, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile.
Keto group-containing monomer: For example, diacetone (meth)acrylamide, diacetone (meth)acrylate, vinyl methyl ketone, vinyl ethyl ketone, allyl acetoacetate, vinyl acetoacetate.
Monomers having nitrogen atom-containing ring: N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-methylvinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpiperidone, N-vinylpyrimidine, N-vinylpiperazine, N-vinylpyrazine, N-vinyl Pyrrole, N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazole, N-vinylmorpholine, N-vinylcaprolactam, N-(meth)acryloylmorpholine, N-(meth)acryloylpyrrolidone.
Alkoxysilyl group-containing monomer: for example, 3-(meth)acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(meth)acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-(meth)acryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-(meth)acryloxy Propylmethyldiethoxysilane.

 モノマーmとして使用し得る化合物の他の例として、酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル等のビニルエステル系モノマー;スチレン、置換スチレン(α-メチルスチレン等)、ビニルトルエン等の芳香族ビニル化合物;シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチルシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロペンチルジ(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート等の非芳香族性環含有(メタ)アクリレート;アリール(メタ)アクリレート(例えばフェニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート)、アリールオキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート(例えばフェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート)、アリールアルキル(メタ)アクリレート(例えばベンジル(メタ)アクリレート)等の芳香族性環含有(メタ)アクリレート;エチレン、プロピレン、イソプレン、ブタジエン、イソブチレン等のオレフィン系モノマー;塩化ビニル、塩化ビニリデン等の塩素含有モノマー;2-(メタ)アクリロキシエチルイソシアネート等のイソシアネート基含有モノマー;メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、エトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等のアルコキシ基含有モノマー;メチルビニルエーテル、エチルビニルエーテル、イソブチルビニルエーテル等のビニルエーテル系モノマー;等が挙げられる。 Other examples of the compound that can be used as the monomer m D include vinyl ester-based monomers such as vinyl acetate and vinyl propionate; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene, substituted styrenes (α-methylstyrene) and vinyltoluene; cyclohexyl ( Non-aromatic ring-containing (meth)acrylates such as (meth)acrylate, t-butylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, cyclopentyl di(meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate; aryl (meth)acrylates (eg phenyl (meth)acrylate) , Benzyl (meth)acrylate, aryloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate (eg phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate), arylalkyl (meth)acrylate (eg benzyl (meth)acrylate), etc. Olefin-based monomers such as ethylene, propylene, isoprene, butadiene and isobutylene; chlorine-containing monomers such as vinyl chloride and vinylidene chloride; isocyanate group-containing monomers such as 2-(meth)acryloxyethyl isocyanate; methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate Alkoxy group-containing monomers such as ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate; vinyl ether type monomers such as methyl vinyl ether, ethyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether; and the like.

 モノマーmとして使用し得る化合物のさらに他の例として、多官能モノマーが挙げられる。多官能モノマーの具体例としては、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、メチレンビスアクリルアミド、等の、1分子中に2以上の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する化合物が挙げられる。このような多官能モノマーを使用する場合、その使用量は特に制限されないが、全モノマー成分の2重量%以下(より好ましくは1重量%以下)とすることが適当である。 Still another example of the compound that can be used as the monomer m D is a polyfunctional monomer. Specific examples of the polyfunctional monomer include 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa. Examples thereof include compounds having two or more (meth)acryloyl groups in one molecule, such as (meth)acrylate and methylenebisacrylamide. When such a polyfunctional monomer is used, the amount used is not particularly limited, but it is suitable to be 2% by weight or less (more preferably 1% by weight or less) of the total monomer components.

 モノマーmの使用量は、モノマー組成の40重量%を超えないように設定することが適当であり、20重量%を超えないことが好ましく、10重量%を超えないことがより好ましい。モノマーmを使用しなくてもよい。ここに開示される技術は、モノマーmの使用量がモノマー組成の0重量%以上5重量%未満である態様で好ましく実施され得る。ここで、モノマーmの使用量がモノマー組成の0重量%であるとは、少なくとも意図的にはモノマーmを使用しないことを意味する。 The amount of the monomer m D used is appropriately set so as not to exceed 40% by weight of the monomer composition, preferably does not exceed 20% by weight, and more preferably does not exceed 10% by weight. The monomer m D may not be used. The technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out in an embodiment in which the amount of the monomer m D used is 0% by weight or more and less than 5% by weight of the monomer composition. Here, that the amount of the monomer m D used is 0 wt% of the monomer composition means that the monomer m D is not used at least intentionally.

 特に限定するものではないが、全モノマー成分に占めるモノマーA(アルキル(メタ)アクリレート)の割合は、例えば凡そ50重量%以上とすることができ、凡そ60重量%以上とすることが適当であり、凡そ70重量%以上が好ましく、凡そ80重量%以上がより好ましく、凡そ85重量%以上がさらに好ましい。モノマーAを所定量以上含むことにより、所望の粘着特性を有する保護シートが好適に実現され得る。ここに開示される技術は、例えば、全モノマー成分に占めるモノマーAの割合が凡そ90重量%以上である態様で好ましく実施され得る。一態様において、モノマーAの割合は凡そ95重量%以上であってもよく、凡そ97重量%以上であってもよい。このようなアクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする粘着剤組成物は、該組成物から形成される粘着剤層(ひいては、該粘着剤層を有する保護シート)の耐候性の観点から有利となり得る。また、モノマーAとモノマーBとを併用する態様において、該モノマーBの効果を適切に発揮する観点から、全モノマー成分に占めるモノマーAの割合は、例えば99.9重量%以下とすることができ、99.5重量%以下が好ましく、99重量%以下がより好ましく、あるいは凡そ97重量%以下(例えば95重量%以下)であってもよい。 Although not particularly limited, the proportion of the monomer A (alkyl (meth)acrylate) in all the monomer components can be, for example, about 50% by weight or more, and about 60% by weight or more is suitable. It is preferably about 70% by weight or more, more preferably about 80% by weight or more, and even more preferably about 85% by weight or more. By including the monomer A in a predetermined amount or more, a protective sheet having desired adhesive properties can be preferably realized. The technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out, for example, in a mode in which the proportion of the monomer A in all the monomer components is about 90% by weight or more. In one embodiment, the proportion of the monomer A may be about 95% by weight or more, or about 97% by weight or more. Such a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing an acrylic polymer as a base polymer can be advantageous from the viewpoint of weather resistance of a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from the composition (and by extension, a protective sheet having the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer). Further, in a mode in which the monomer A and the monomer B are used in combination, the ratio of the monomer A in all the monomer components can be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less from the viewpoint of appropriately exerting the effect of the monomer B. , Preferably 99.5% by weight or less, more preferably 99% by weight or less, or about 97% by weight or less (for example, 95% by weight or less).

 アクリル系ポリマーに上述のような官能基含有モノマーが共重合されている場合、アクリル系ポリマーを構成する全モノマー成分に占める官能基含有モノマーの割合は、凡そ0.1重量%以上(典型的には凡そ0.5重量%以上、例えば凡そ1重量%以上)とすることが好ましく、また、凡そ40重量%以下(典型的には凡そ30重量%以下、例えば凡そ20重量%以下)とすることが好ましい。例えば、アクリル系モノマーに水酸基含有モノマーが共重合されている場合、上記全モノマー成分に占める水酸基含有モノマーの割合は、所望の凝集力を得る観点から、凡そ0.001重量%以上(典型的には凡そ0.01重量%以上、例えば凡そ0.1重量%以上)とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ1重量%以上、より好ましくは凡そ3重量%以上であり、また、凡そ10重量%以下(典型的には凡そ7重量%以下、例えば凡そ5重量%以下)とすることが適当である。 When the above-mentioned functional group-containing monomer is copolymerized with the acrylic polymer, the proportion of the functional group-containing monomer in all the monomer components constituting the acrylic polymer is about 0.1% by weight or more (typically Is preferably about 0.5% by weight or more, for example about 1% by weight or more), and about 40% by weight or less (typically about 30% by weight or less, for example about 20% by weight or less). Is preferred. For example, when a hydroxyl group-containing monomer is copolymerized with an acrylic monomer, the proportion of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in all the above monomer components is about 0.001% by weight or more (typically from the viewpoint of obtaining a desired cohesive force). Is about 0.01% by weight or more, for example about 0.1% by weight or more), preferably about 1% by weight or more, more preferably about 3% by weight or more, and about 10% by weight. % Or less (typically about 7% by weight or less, for example, about 5% by weight or less) is suitable.

 (ゴム系ポリマー)
 他の好ましい一態様では、粘着剤層はゴム系粘着剤層であり得る。上記ベースポリマーの例としては、天然ゴム;スチレンブタジエンゴム(SBR);ポリイソプレン;ブテン(1-ブテン、およびcis-もしくはtrans-2-ブテンを指す。)および/または2-メチルプロペン(イソブチレン)を主モノマーとするブテン系ポリマー;A-B-A型ブロック共重合体ゴムおよびその水素化物、例えばスチレン-ブタジエン-スチレンブロック共重合体ゴム(SBS)、スチレン-イソプレン-スチレンブロック共重合体ゴム(SIS)、スチレン-イソブチレン-スチレンブロック共重合体ゴム(SIBS)、スチレン-ビニル・イソプレン-スチレンブロック共重合体ゴム(SVIS)、SBSの水素化物であるスチレン-エチレン-ブチレン-スチレンブロック共重合体ゴム(SEBS)、SISの水素化物であるスチレン-エチレン-プロピレン-スチレンブロック共重合体ゴム(SEPS);等の種々のゴム系ポリマーが挙げられる。これらのゴム系ポリマーは、1種を単独で、あるいは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
(Rubber polymer)
In another preferable aspect, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be a rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Examples of the base polymer include natural rubber; styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR); polyisoprene; butene (1-butene, and cis- or trans-2-butene) and/or 2-methylpropene (isobutylene). Butene-based polymer having as a main monomer; ABA type block copolymer rubber and hydrogenated products thereof, for example, styrene-butadiene-styrene block copolymer rubber (SBS), styrene-isoprene-styrene block copolymer rubber (SIS), styrene-isobutylene-styrene block copolymer rubber (SIBS), styrene-vinyl-isoprene-styrene block copolymer rubber (SVIS), styrene-ethylene-butylene-styrene block copolymer weight which is a hydride of SBS. Various rubber-based polymers such as a united rubber (SEBS) and a styrene hydride of styrene-ethylene-propylene-styrene block copolymer rubber (SEPS); These rubber-based polymers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 (ベースポリマーのTg)
 ここに開示される粘着剤層のベースポリマー(アクリル系粘着剤層の場合はアクリル系ポリマー)のTgは特に限定されない。上記ベースポリマーのTgは、例えば凡そ0℃以下であり得る。好ましい一態様では、粘着剤層のベースポリマーのTgが凡そ-5℃以下である。かかるTgを有するベースポリマーによると、被着体に対する密着性に優れた粘着剤層が好適に形成され得る。ベースポリマーのTgが凡そ-15℃以下(より好ましくは凡そ-20℃以下、例えば凡そ-25℃以下)である態様によると、より良好な効果が実現され得る。他の好ましい一態様では、被着体との接着性の観点から、粘着剤層のベースポリマーのTgは凡そ-35℃以下であり、より好ましくは凡そ-40℃以下、さらに好ましくは凡そ-45℃以下(例えば凡そ-50℃未満、さらには凡そ-52℃以下、あるいは凡そ-55℃以下)である。また、ベースポリマーのTgは、-70℃以上とすることが適当であり、粘着剤の凝集性等の観点から、好ましくは凡そ-65℃以上、より好ましくは-60℃以上、さらに好ましくは-55℃以上(例えば凡そ-50℃以上)であり、凡そ-35℃以上であってもよい。ベースポリマーのTgは、モノマー組成(すなわち、該ポリマーの合成に使用するモノマーの種類や使用量比)を適宜変えることにより調整することができる。
(Tg of base polymer)
The Tg of the base polymer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein (acrylic polymer in the case of the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) is not particularly limited. The Tg of the base polymer can be, for example, about 0° C. or lower. In a preferred embodiment, the Tg of the base polymer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is about -5°C or lower. According to the base polymer having such Tg, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having excellent adhesion to an adherend can be preferably formed. According to the embodiment in which the Tg of the base polymer is about −15° C. or lower (more preferably about −20° C. or lower, for example, about −25° C. or lower), a better effect can be realized. In another preferred embodiment, from the viewpoint of adhesiveness to an adherend, the Tg of the base polymer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is about −35° C. or lower, more preferably about −40° C. or lower, and further preferably about −45. C. or lower (for example, about −50° C. or lower, further about −52° C. or lower, or about −55° C. or lower). The Tg of the base polymer is suitably -70°C or higher, and from the viewpoint of cohesiveness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, etc., it is preferably about -65°C or higher, more preferably -60°C or higher, and even more preferably -. The temperature is 55° C. or higher (eg, about −50° C. or higher), and may be about −35° C. or higher. The Tg of the base polymer can be adjusted by appropriately changing the monomer composition (that is, the type of monomer used in the synthesis of the polymer and the ratio of the amounts used).

 本明細書において、ポリマーのTgとは、該ポリマーを構成する各モノマーの単独重合体(ホモポリマー)のTgおよび該モノマーの重量分率(重量基準の共重合割合)に基づいてフォックス(Fox)の式から求められる値をいう。Foxの式とは、以下に示すように、共重合体のTgと、該共重合体を構成するモノマーのそれぞれを単独重合したホモポリマーのガラス転移温度Tgiとの関係式である。
   1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi)
 上記Foxの式において、Tgは共重合体のガラス転移温度(単位:K)、Wiは該共重合体におけるモノマーiの重量分率(重量基準の共重合割合)、Tgiはモノマーiのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度(単位:K)を表す。
In the present specification, the Tg of a polymer means a Fox based on the Tg of a homopolymer of each monomer constituting the polymer and the weight fraction of the monomer (copolymerization ratio on a weight basis). The value obtained from the formula. The Fox equation is a relational expression between Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of a homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer, as shown below.
1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi)
In the above Fox equation, Tg is the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of the copolymer, Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio on a weight basis), and Tgi is a homopolymer of the monomer i. Represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of.

 Tgの算出に使用するホモポリマーのガラス転移温度としては、公知資料に記載の値を用いるものとする。例えば、以下に挙げるモノマーについては、該モノマーのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度として、以下の値を使用する。
    2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート    -70℃
    n-ヘキシルアクリレート       -65℃
    n-オクチルアクリレート       -65℃
    イソノニルアクリレート        -60℃
    n-ノニルアクリレート        -58℃
    n-ブチルアクリレート        -55℃
    エチルアクリレート          -20℃
    ラウリルアクリレート           0℃
    2-エチルヘキシルメタクリレート   -10℃
    メチルアクリレート            8℃
    n-ブチルメタクリレート        20℃
    メチルメタクリレート         105℃
    アクリル酸              106℃
    メタクリル酸             228℃
    酢酸ビニル               32℃
    スチレン               100℃
As the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer used for calculation of Tg, the value described in publicly known data shall be used. For example, for the monomers listed below, the following values are used as the glass transition temperature of homopolymers of the monomers.
2-ethylhexyl acrylate -70°C
n-hexyl acrylate -65°C
n-octyl acrylate -65°C
Isononyl acrylate -60℃
n-nonyl acrylate-58℃
n-Butyl acrylate -55°C
Ethyl acrylate -20℃
Lauryl acrylate 0℃
2-ethylhexyl methacrylate -10°C
Methyl acrylate 8℃
n-butyl methacrylate 20°C
Methyl methacrylate 105°C
Acrylic acid 106℃
Methacrylic acid 228°C
Vinyl acetate 32°C
Styrene 100°C

 上記で例示した以外のモノマーのホモポリマーのTgについては、「Polymer Handbook」(第3版、John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989)に記載の数値を用いるものとする。本文献に複数種類の値が記載されているモノマーについては、最も高い値を採用する。上記Polymer HandbookにもホモポリマーのTgが記載されていない場合には、日本国特許出願公開2007-51271号公報に記載の測定方法により得られる値を用いるものとする。 Regarding the Tg of homopolymers of monomers other than those exemplified above, the values described in the "Polymer Handbook" (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989) shall be used. For monomers for which multiple types of values are described in this document, the highest value is adopted. When the Tg of the homopolymer is not described in the above Polymer Handbook, the value obtained by the measuring method described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-51271 shall be used.

 (ベースポリマーの合成)
 ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)を得る方法は特に限定されない。例えば、溶液重合法、エマルション重合法、塊状重合法、懸濁重合法等の、公知の重合方法を適宜採用することができる。あるいは、UV等の光を照射して行う光重合(典型的には、光重合開始剤の存在下で行われる。)や、β線、γ線等の放射線を照射して行う放射線重合等の活性エネルギー線照射重合を採用してもよい。ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)は、例えば、上述のような組成のモノマー原料のエマルション重合により得られる。例えば、エマルション重合法におけるモノマー供給方式としては、全モノマー原料を一度に供給する一括仕込み方式、連続供給(滴下)方式、分割供給(滴下)方式等を適宜採用することができる。モノマー成分の一部または全部をあらかじめ水および界面活性剤と混合して乳化し、その乳化液を重合容器に供給してもよい。
(Synthesis of base polymer)
The method for obtaining the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) is not particularly limited. For example, a known polymerization method such as a solution polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a bulk polymerization method, or a suspension polymerization method can be appropriately adopted. Alternatively, photopolymerization performed by irradiating light such as UV (typically, performed in the presence of a photopolymerization initiator), radiation polymerization performed by irradiating radiation such as β-ray or γ-ray. Active energy ray irradiation polymerization may be adopted. The base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) is obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization of a monomer raw material having the above composition. For example, as a monomer supply method in the emulsion polymerization method, a batch charging method of supplying all the monomer raw materials at once, a continuous supply (dropping) method, a divided supply (dropping) method, and the like can be appropriately adopted. Part or all of the monomer components may be previously mixed with water and a surfactant to emulsify, and the emulsion may be supplied to the polymerization vessel.

 重合温度は、使用するモノマーおよび溶媒の種類、重合開始剤の種類等に応じて適宜選択することができる。重合温度は、凡そ20℃以上とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ40℃以上、より好ましくは凡そ50℃以上であり、凡そ60℃以上としてもよく、凡そ65℃以上、さらには凡そ70℃以上としてもよい。また、重合温度は、凡そ170℃以下(典型的には凡そ140℃以下)とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ95℃以下(例えば凡そ85℃以下)である。エマルション重合では、重合温度を凡そ95℃以下(例えば凡そ85℃以下)とすることが好ましい。 The polymerization temperature can be appropriately selected according to the type of monomer and solvent used, the type of polymerization initiator, and the like. The polymerization temperature is appropriately about 20°C or higher, preferably about 40°C or higher, more preferably about 50°C or higher, about 60°C or higher, about 65°C or higher, and further about 70°C. It may be set to ℃ or higher. The polymerization temperature is appropriately about 170° C. or lower (typically about 140° C. or lower), and preferably about 95° C. or lower (eg, about 85° C. or lower). In emulsion polymerization, the polymerization temperature is preferably about 95° C. or lower (for example, about 85° C. or lower).

 溶液重合に用いる溶媒(重合溶媒)は、従来公知の有機溶媒から適宜選択することができる。例えば、トルエン等の芳香族化合物類(典型的には芳香族炭化水素類)や、酢酸エチル等の酢酸エステル類、ヘキサンやシクロヘキサン等の脂肪族または脂環式炭化水素類等が好ましく用いられる。 The solvent (polymerization solvent) used for solution polymerization can be appropriately selected from conventionally known organic solvents. For example, aromatic compounds such as toluene (typically aromatic hydrocarbons), acetic acid esters such as ethyl acetate, and aliphatic or alicyclic hydrocarbons such as hexane and cyclohexane are preferably used.

 重合開始剤としては、アゾ系開始剤、過酸化物系開始剤、過酸化物と還元剤とを組み合わせたレドックス系開始剤等が例示されるが、これらに限定されない。重合開始剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
 アゾ系開始剤の例としては、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス[N-(2-カルボキシエチル)-2-メチルプロピオンアミジン]ハイドレート、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオンアミジン)二硫酸塩、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオンアミジン)ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオンアミジン)ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス[2-(5-メチル-2-イミダゾリン-2-イル)プロパン]ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス(N,N’-ジメチレンイソブチルアミジン)ジヒドロクロライド等が挙げられる。
 過酸化物系開始剤の例としては、過硫酸カリウム、過硫酸アンモニウム等の過硫酸塩;ベンゾイルペルオキシド、t-ブチルハイドロペルオキシド、ジ-t-ブチルペルオキシド、ジクミルペルオキシド、ジラウロイルペルオキシド、ジ-n-オクタノイルペルオキシド、ジ(4-メチルベンゾイル)ペルオキシド、t-ブチルペルオキシベンゾエート、t-ブチルペルオキシソブチレート、t-ヘキシルペルオキシピバレート、t-ブチルペルオキシピバレート、ジ(2-エチルヘキシル)ペルオキシジカーボネート、ジ(4-t-ブチルシクロヘキシル)ペルオキシジカーボネート、ジ-sec-ブチルペルオキシジカーボネート、t-ブチルペルオキシネオデカノエート、1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチルペルオキシ2-エチルヘキサノエート、1,1-ビス(t-ブチルペルオキシ)-3,3,5-トリメチルシクロヘキサン、1,1-ビス(t-ブチルペルオキシ)シクロドデカン、1,1-ビス(t-ヘキシルペルオキシ)シクロヘキサン、過酸化水素等が挙げられる。
 レドックス系開始剤の例としては、過酸化物とアスコルビン酸との組み合わせ(過酸化水素水とアスコルビン酸との組み合わせ等)、過酸化物と鉄(II)塩との組み合わせ(過酸化水素水と鉄(II)塩との組み合わせ等)、過硫酸塩と亜硫酸水素ナトリウムとの組み合わせ、等が挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerization initiator include, but are not limited to, an azo initiator, a peroxide initiator, and a redox initiator in which a peroxide and a reducing agent are combined. The polymerization initiators may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Examples of azo initiators are 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis[N-(2-carboxyethyl)-2-methylpropionamidine]hydrate, 2,2′. -Azobis(2-methylpropionamidine) disulfate, 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine) dihydrochloride, 2,2'- Examples thereof include azobis[2-(5-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)propane]dihydrochloride and 2,2′-azobis(N,N′-dimethyleneisobutylamidine)dihydrochloride.
Examples of peroxide-based initiators include persulfates such as potassium persulfate and ammonium persulfate; benzoyl peroxide, t-butyl hydroperoxide, di-t-butyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, dilauroyl peroxide, di-n. -Octanoyl peroxide, di(4-methylbenzoyl) peroxide, t-butyl peroxybenzoate, t-butyl peroxysobutyrate, t-hexyl peroxypivalate, t-butyl peroxypivalate, di(2-ethylhexyl)peroxydi Carbonate, di(4-t-butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate, di-sec-butylperoxydicarbonate, t-butylperoxy neodecanoate, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutylperoxy 2-ethylhexano Ate, 1,1-bis(t-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, 1,1-bis(t-butylperoxy)cyclododecane, 1,1-bis(t-hexylperoxy)cyclohexane, Hydrogen peroxide and the like can be mentioned.
Examples of the redox type initiator include a combination of peroxide and ascorbic acid (a combination of hydrogen peroxide solution and ascorbic acid, etc.), a combination of a peroxide and an iron (II) salt (a hydrogen peroxide solution and Iron (II) salt and the like), persulfate and sodium bisulfite, and the like.

 重合開始剤の使用量は、該開始剤の種類やモノマーの種類(モノマー成分の組成)、重合条件等に応じて適宜選択することができる。重合開始剤の使用量は、例えばモノマー原料100重量部に対して凡そ0.0005~1重量部であり、0.001~0.5重量部程度の範囲とすることが適当であり、0.002~0.3重量部の範囲とすることが好ましく、0.005~0.1重量部の範囲とすることがより好ましい。 The amount of the polymerization initiator used can be appropriately selected depending on the type of the initiator, the type of the monomer (composition of the monomer components), the polymerization conditions, and the like. The amount of the polymerization initiator used is, for example, about 0.0005 to 1 part by weight, preferably about 0.001 to 0.5 part by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the monomer raw material. The amount is preferably 002 to 0.3 parts by weight, more preferably 0.005 to 0.1 parts by weight.

 エマルション重合には、必要に応じて、従来公知の各種の連鎖移動剤(分子量調節剤あるいは重合度調節剤としても把握され得る。)を使用することができる。連鎖移動剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。連鎖移動剤としては、n-ドデシルメルカプタン、t-ドデシルメルカプタン、グリシジルメルカプタン、2-メルカプトエタノール、メルカプト酢酸、チオグリコール酸、チオグリコール酸2-エチルヘキシル、2,3-ジメルカプト-1-プロパノール等のメルカプタン類を好ましく用いることができる。連鎖移動剤を使用する場合、その使用量は、全モノマー成分100重量部に対して、例えば0.01~1重量部程度とすることができ、0.02~0.1重量部とすることが好ましく、0.03~0.07重量部とすることがより好ましい。ここに開示される技術は、連鎖移動剤を使用しない態様でも好ましく実施され得る。 In the emulsion polymerization, various conventionally known chain transfer agents (which can be understood as a molecular weight modifier or a polymerization degree modifier) can be used as necessary. The chain transfer agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Examples of chain transfer agents include mercaptans such as n-dodecyl mercaptan, t-dodecyl mercaptan, glycidyl mercaptan, 2-mercaptoethanol, mercaptoacetic acid, thioglycolic acid, 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, and 2,3-dimercapto-1-propanol. Classes can be preferably used. When a chain transfer agent is used, the amount thereof may be, for example, about 0.01 to 1 part by weight, and may be 0.02 to 0.1 part by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of all the monomer components. Is preferred, and more preferably 0.03 to 0.07 parts by weight. The technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out even in a mode without using a chain transfer agent.

 エマルション重合に使用する界面活性剤(乳化剤)は特に制限されず、公知のアニオン性界面活性剤、ノニオン性界面活性剤等を用いることができる。ラジカル重合性官能基を有する界面活性剤を用いてもよい。以下、ラジカル重合性官能基を有する界面活性剤を反応性(重合性)界面活性剤ともいう。これに対して、ラジカル重合性官能基を有しない一般的な界面活性剤を非反応性(非重合性)界面活性剤ということがある。界面活性剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。界面活性剤の使用量は、全モノマー成分100重量部に対して凡そ0.1重量部以上(例えば凡そ0.5重量部以上)とすることが好ましく、また、全モノマー成分100重量部に対して凡そ10重量部以下(例えば凡そ5重量部以下)とすることが好ましい。 The surfactant (emulsifier) used for emulsion polymerization is not particularly limited, and known anionic surfactants, nonionic surfactants and the like can be used. You may use the surfactant which has a radically polymerizable functional group. Hereinafter, the surfactant having a radically polymerizable functional group is also referred to as a reactive (polymerizable) surfactant. On the other hand, a general surfactant having no radically polymerizable functional group may be referred to as a non-reactive (non-polymerizable) surfactant. The surfactants may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The amount of the surfactant used is preferably about 0.1 parts by weight or more (eg, about 0.5 parts by weight or more) based on 100 parts by weight of all the monomer components, and 100 parts by weight of all the monomer components. It is preferable that the total amount be about 10 parts by weight or less (for example, about 5 parts by weight or less).

 非反応性の界面活性剤の例としては、ラウリル硫酸ナトリウム、ラウリル硫酸アンモニウム、ドデシルベンゼンスルホン酸ナトリウム、ポリオキシエチレンラウリル硫酸ナトリウム、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエーテル硫酸ナトリウム、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル硫酸アンモニウム、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル硫酸ナトリウム、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルスルホコハク酸ナトリウム等のアニオン系乳化剤;ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレン脂肪酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンポリオキシプロピレンブロックポリマー等のノニオン系乳化剤;等が挙げられる。 Examples of non-reactive surfactants include sodium lauryl sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate, sodium polyoxyethylene lauryl sulfate, sodium polyoxyethylene alkyl ether ether, ammonium polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfate, polyoxy Anionic emulsifiers such as sodium ethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfate and sodium polyoxyethylene alkyl sulfosuccinate; nonionics such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ether, polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene block polymer System emulsifiers; and the like.

 反応性界面活性剤は、ラジカル重合性官能基を有するものであればよく、特に限定されない。例えば、上述のようなアニオン性界面活性剤やノニオン性界面活性剤にラジカル重合性官能基が導入された構造の反応性界面活性剤であり得る。上記ラジカル重合性官能基の例としては、ビニル基、プロペニル基、イソプロペニル基、ビニルエーテル基(ビニルオキシ基)、アリルエーテル基(アリルオキシ基)等が挙げられる。ここでいうプロペニル基の概念には、1-プロペニル基(CH-CH=CH-)および2-プロペニル基(CH=CH-CH-;アリル基と称されることもある。)が含まれる。 The reactive surfactant is not particularly limited as long as it has a radically polymerizable functional group. For example, it may be a reactive surfactant having a structure in which a radically polymerizable functional group is introduced into the above-mentioned anionic surfactant or nonionic surfactant. Examples of the radically polymerizable functional group include a vinyl group, a propenyl group, an isopropenyl group, a vinyl ether group (vinyloxy group), an allyl ether group (allyloxy group) and the like. The concept of the propenyl group as used herein includes a 1-propenyl group (CH 3 —CH═CH—) and a 2-propenyl group (CH 2 ═CH—CH 2 —; sometimes referred to as an allyl group). included.

 アニオン性の反応性界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン(アリルオキシメチル)アルキルエーテル硫酸塩(例えばアンモニウム塩)、ポリオキシエチレンノニルプロペニルフェニルエーテル硫酸塩(例えばアンモニウム塩)、アルキルアリルスルホコハク酸塩(例えばナトリウム塩)、メタクリロキシポリオキシプロピレン硫酸エステル塩(例えばナトリウム塩)、ポリオキシアルキレンアルケニルエーテル硫酸塩(例えば、上記アルケニル基の末端がイソプロペニル基であるアンモニウム塩)等が挙げられる。アニオン性の反応性界面活性剤が塩を形成している場合、該塩は、例えばナトリウム塩等の金属塩であってもよく、アンモニウム塩やアミン塩等の非金属塩であってもよい。
 ノニオン性の反応性界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレンノニルプロペニルフェニルエーテル等が挙げられる。
Examples of the anionic reactive surfactant include polyoxyethylene (allyloxymethyl) alkyl ether sulfate (for example, ammonium salt), polyoxyethylene nonylpropenyl phenyl ether sulfate (for example, ammonium salt), alkylallyl sulfosuccinic acid. Examples thereof include salts (for example, sodium salt), methacryloxy polyoxypropylene sulfate ester salt (for example, sodium salt), polyoxyalkylene alkenyl ether sulfate (for example, ammonium salt in which the terminal of the alkenyl group is an isopropenyl group), and the like. When the anionic reactive surfactant forms a salt, the salt may be a metal salt such as sodium salt or a non-metal salt such as ammonium salt or amine salt.
Examples of the nonionic reactive surfactant include polyoxyethylene nonylpropenyl phenyl ether.

 特に限定するものではないが、いくつかの態様において、オキシエチレン鎖を有する反応性界面活性剤を好ましく使用し得る。ここでオキシエチレン鎖とは、オキシエチレン単位の繰返し構造、すなわち-(CO)-で表される構造部分を指す。nはオキシエチレン単位の繰返し数を示す。例えば、この繰返し数nが5~30(例えば8~25)程度である反応性界面活性剤が好ましい。 Although not particularly limited, in some embodiments, a reactive surfactant having an oxyethylene chain may be preferably used. Here, the oxyethylene chain refers to a repeating structure of oxyethylene units, that is, a structural portion represented by —(C 2 H 4 O) n —. n represents the number of repeating oxyethylene units. For example, a reactive surfactant having a repeating number n of about 5 to 30 (for example, 8 to 25) is preferable.

 エマルション重合時の重合安定性等の観点から、いくつかの態様において、プロペニル基を有する反応性界面活性剤を好ましく採用し得る。プロペニル基を有し、且つオキシエチレン鎖を有する反応性界面活性剤が特に好ましい。 From the viewpoint of polymerization stability during emulsion polymerization, in some embodiments, a reactive surfactant having a propenyl group can be preferably adopted. Reactive surfactants having a propenyl group and an oxyethylene chain are particularly preferred.

 乳化性能等の観点から、いくつかの態様において、アニオン性の反応性界面活性剤(例えば、オキシエチレン鎖を有するアニオン性反応性界面活性剤)を好ましく採用し得る。アニオン性の反応性界面活性剤が塩を形成している場合、該塩としては、非金属塩が好ましく、なかでもアンモニウム塩が好ましい。
 ノニオン性の反応性界面活性剤を使用する場合は、他の界面活性剤、例えばアニオン性の反応性界面活性剤、アニオン性の非反応性界面活性剤、ノニオン性の非反応性界面活性剤等と併用することにより、より好適な結果が実現され得る。
In some aspects, an anionic reactive surfactant (for example, an anionic reactive surfactant having an oxyethylene chain) can be preferably used from the viewpoint of emulsification performance and the like. When the anionic reactive surfactant forms a salt, the salt is preferably a non-metal salt, and particularly preferably an ammonium salt.
When using a nonionic reactive surfactant, other surfactants such as anionic reactive surfactant, anionic non-reactive surfactant, nonionic non-reactive surfactant, etc. When used in combination with, more preferable results can be realized.

 ラジカル重合性官能基を有する反応性界面活性剤の存在下でモノマー原料をエマルション重合させることにより、上記反応性界面活性剤が反応してベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)に取り込まれ得る。ベースポリマーに取り込まれた反応性界面活性剤は、粘着剤層内での移動が制限されるため、粘着剤層の表面にブリードアウトしにくい。したがって、反応性界面活性剤の使用により、粘着剤層の表面への低分子量化合物のブリードアウトを抑制することができる。このことは低汚染性の観点から好ましい。より優れた低汚染性を実現する観点から、エマルション重合時の界面活性剤として反応性界面活性剤のみを用いる態様を好ましく採用し得る。 By subjecting the monomer raw material to emulsion polymerization in the presence of a reactive surfactant having a radically polymerizable functional group, the reactive surfactant can react and be incorporated into a base polymer (eg, acrylic polymer). The reactive surfactant incorporated in the base polymer is less likely to bleed out on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer because its movement within the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is limited. Therefore, the use of the reactive surfactant can suppress the bleed-out of the low molecular weight compound to the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. This is preferable from the viewpoint of low contamination. From the viewpoint of achieving a more excellent low contamination property, an embodiment in which only a reactive surfactant is used as a surfactant during emulsion polymerization can be preferably adopted.

 ここに開示される保護シートの粘着剤層は、種々の形態の粘着剤組成物から形成された粘着剤層であり得る。上記粘着剤組成物の形態としては、例えば、有機溶媒中に粘着剤(粘着成分)を含む形態の組成物(溶剤型粘着剤組成物)、粘着剤の少なくとも一部が水性溶媒に分散した形態の組成物(水分散型粘着剤組成物)、紫外線や放射線等の活性エネルギー線により硬化して粘着剤を形成するように調製された組成物(活性エネルギー線硬化型粘着剤組成物)、加熱溶融状態で塗工され、室温付近まで冷えると粘着剤を形成するホットメルト型粘着剤組成物等が挙げられる。
 環境負荷軽減の観点から、水分散型粘着剤組成物を好ましく採用し得る。かかる水分散型粘着剤組成物の一好適例として、アクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとして含む水分散型粘着剤組成物(アクリル系水分散型粘着剤組成物、典型的にはアクリル系エマルション型粘着剤組成物)が挙げられる。また、粘着特性の観点からは溶剤型粘着剤組成物が好ましい。溶剤の使用を必要としないホットメルト型粘着剤組成物は、生産プロセスにおける取扱い性に優れる点で有利である。
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the protective sheet disclosed herein may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from various forms of pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions. As the form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, for example, a composition in which a pressure-sensitive adhesive (pressure-sensitive adhesive component) is contained in an organic solvent (solvent-type pressure-sensitive adhesive composition), a form in which at least a part of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is dispersed in an aqueous solvent Composition (water-dispersible pressure-sensitive adhesive composition), composition prepared to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive by curing with active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays and radiation (active energy ray-curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition), heating Examples thereof include hot-melt pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions which are applied in a molten state and form a pressure-sensitive adhesive when cooled to around room temperature.
From the viewpoint of reducing environmental load, a water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be preferably used. As a preferred example of such a water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing an acrylic polymer as a base polymer (acrylic water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, typically acrylic emulsion-type pressure-sensitive adhesive) Composition). From the viewpoint of adhesive properties, solvent-based adhesive compositions are preferred. The hot-melt pressure-sensitive adhesive composition that does not require the use of a solvent is advantageous in that it is easy to handle in the production process.

 (架橋剤)
 ここに開示される技術において、粘着剤層を形成するために用いられる粘着剤組成物は、架橋剤を含むことが好ましい。架橋剤の使用により、粘着剤層の表面硬さを適切に調節することができる。使用する架橋剤の種類は特に制限されず、従来公知の架橋剤から適宜選択することができる。
(Crosslinking agent)
In the technique disclosed herein, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition used for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer preferably contains a crosslinking agent. By using the crosslinking agent, the surface hardness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted. The type of crosslinking agent used is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known crosslinking agents.

 架橋剤の具体例としては、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、メラミン系架橋剤、過酸化物系架橋剤、尿素系架橋剤、金属アルコキシド系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤、金属塩系架橋剤、カルボジイミド系架橋剤、ヒドラジン系架橋剤、アミン系架橋剤、シランカップリング剤等が挙げられる。これらは1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。例えば、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、イソシアネート系架橋剤およびエポキシ系架橋剤からなる群から選択される1種または2種以上の使用が好ましい。なかでも、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤がより好ましい。水分散型粘着剤組成物を用いる態様では、水に溶解または分散可能な架橋剤が好ましく、水に溶解可能な(すなわち水溶性の)架橋剤が特に好ましい。 Specific examples of the crosslinking agent include oxazoline-based crosslinking agents, aziridine-based crosslinking agents, isocyanate-based crosslinking agents, epoxy-based crosslinking agents, melamine-based crosslinking agents, peroxide-based crosslinking agents, urea-based crosslinking agents, metal alkoxide-based crosslinking agents. , A metal chelate-based crosslinking agent, a metal salt-based crosslinking agent, a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent, a hydrazine-based crosslinking agent, an amine-based crosslinking agent, and a silane coupling agent. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. For example, it is preferable to use one kind or two or more kinds selected from the group consisting of an oxazoline type crosslinking agent, an aziridine type crosslinking agent, an isocyanate type crosslinking agent and an epoxy type crosslinking agent. Of these, oxazoline-based crosslinking agents, isocyanate-based crosslinking agents, and epoxy-based crosslinking agents are more preferable. In the embodiment using the water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a water-soluble or dispersible crosslinking agent is preferable, and a water-soluble (that is, water-soluble) crosslinking agent is particularly preferable.

 オキサゾリン系架橋剤としては、1分子内に1個以上のオキサゾリン基を有するものを特に制限なく使用することができる。水分散型粘着剤組成物においては、水に溶解または分散可能なオキサゾリン系架橋剤の使用が好ましい。
 オキサゾリン基は、2-オキサゾリン基、3-オキサゾリン基、4-オキサゾリン基のいずれでもよい。2-オキサゾリン基を有するオキサゾリン系架橋剤を好ましく使用し得る。例えば、2-ビニル-2-オキサゾリン、2-ビニル-4-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-ビニル-5-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-4-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-5-エチル-2-オキサゾリン等の付加重合性オキサゾリンと他のモノマーとを共重合させて得られた水溶性共重合体または水分散型共重合体を、オキサゾリン系架橋剤として使用することができる。
 オキサゾリン系架橋剤の市販品としては、例えば日本触媒社製の商品名「エポクロスWS-500」、「エポクロスWS-700」、「エポクロスK-2010E」、「エポクロスK-2020E」、「エポクロスK-2030E」等が挙げられる。
As the oxazoline-based cross-linking agent, one having one or more oxazoline groups in one molecule can be used without particular limitation. In the water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, it is preferable to use an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water.
The oxazoline group may be any of a 2-oxazoline group, a 3-oxazoline group and a 4-oxazoline group. An oxazoline-based crosslinking agent having a 2-oxazoline group can be preferably used. For example, 2-vinyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-4-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-2-oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-4- A water-soluble copolymer or a water-dispersible copolymer obtained by copolymerizing an addition-polymerizable oxazoline such as methyl-2-oxazoline and 2-isopropenyl-5-ethyl-2-oxazoline with another monomer , And can be used as an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent.
Examples of commercially available products of the oxazoline-based cross-linking agent include trade names “Epocros WS-500”, “Epocros WS-700”, “Epocros K-2010E”, “Epocros K-2020E”, and “Epocros K-” manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd. 2030E” and the like.

 アジリジン系架橋剤の例としては、トリメチロールプロパントリス[3-(1-アジリジニル)プロピオネート]、トリメチロールプロパントリス[3-(1-(2-メチル)アジリジニルプロピオネート)]等が挙げられる。アジリジン系架橋剤の市販品としては、例えば、日本触媒社製の商品名「ケミタイトPZ-33」、「ケミタイトDZ-22E」等が挙げられる。 Examples of the aziridine crosslinking agent include trimethylolpropane tris[3-(1-aziridinyl)propionate] and trimethylolpropane tris[3-(1-(2-methyl)aziridinylpropionate)]. To be Examples of commercially available products of the aziridine crosslinking agent include "Chemite PZ-33" and "Chemite DZ-22E" manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.

 イソシアネート系架橋剤の例としては、2官能以上の多官能イソシアネート化合物を用いることができる。例えば、トリレンジイソシアネート、キシレンジイソシアネート、ポリメチレンポリフェニルジイソシアネート、トリス(p-イソシアナトフェニル)チオホスフェート、ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート等の芳香族イソシアネート;イソホロンジイソシアネート等の脂環族イソシアネート;ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等の脂肪族イソシアネート;等が挙げられる。市販品としては、トリメチロールプロパン/トリレンジイソシアネート3量体付加物(東ソー社製、商品名「コロネートL」)、トリメチロールプロパン/ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート3量体付加物(東ソー社製、商品名「コロネートHL」)、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートのイソシアヌレート体(東ソー社製、商品名「コロネートHX」)等のイソシアネート付加物等を例示することができる。水分散型の粘着剤組成物においては、水に溶解または分散可能なイソシアネート系架橋剤の使用が好ましい。例えば、水溶性、水分散性または自己乳化型のイソシアネート系架橋剤を好ましく採用し得る。イソシアネート基がブロックされた、いわゆるブロックドイソシアネート型のイソシアネート系架橋剤を好ましく使用し得る。 As an example of the isocyanate cross-linking agent, a bifunctional or higher polyfunctional isocyanate compound can be used. For example, aromatic isocyanate such as tolylene diisocyanate, xylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl diisocyanate, tris(p-isocyanatophenyl)thiophosphate, diphenylmethane diisocyanate; alicyclic isocyanate such as isophorone diisocyanate; aliphatic such as hexamethylene diisocyanate Isocyanate; and the like. As commercial products, trimethylolpropane/tolylene diisocyanate trimer adduct (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name “Coronate L”), trimethylolpropane/hexamethylene diisocyanate trimer adduct (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name “ Coronate HL"), an isocyanurate of hexamethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name "Coronate HX") and the like can be exemplified. In the water-dispersed PSA composition, it is preferable to use an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water. For example, a water-soluble, water-dispersible or self-emulsifying type isocyanate crosslinking agent can be preferably used. A so-called blocked isocyanate type isocyanate cross-linking agent in which an isocyanate group is blocked can be preferably used.

 エポキシ系架橋剤としては、1分子中に2個以上のエポキシ基を有するものを特に制限なく用いることができる。1分子中に3~5個のエポキシ基を有するエポキシ系架橋剤が好ましい。水分散型粘着剤組成物においては、水に溶解または分散可能なエポキシ系架橋剤の使用が好ましい。
 エポキシ系架橋剤の具体例としては、N,N,N’,N’-テトラグリシジル-m-キシレンジアミン、1,3-ビス(N,N-ジグリシジルアミノメチル)シクロヘキサン、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ポリグリセロールポリグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。
 エポキシ系架橋剤の市販品としては、三菱ガス化学社製の商品名「TETRAD-X」、「TETRAD-C」、DIC社製の商品名「エピクロンCR-5L」、ナガセケムテックス社製の商品名「デナコールEX-512」、日産化学工業社製の商品名「TEPIC-G」等が挙げられる。
As the epoxy-based cross-linking agent, one having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule can be used without particular limitation. An epoxy-based cross-linking agent having 3 to 5 epoxy groups in one molecule is preferable. In the water-dispersed PSA composition, it is preferable to use an epoxy-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water.
Specific examples of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent include N,N,N′,N′-tetraglycidyl-m-xylenediamine, 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl)cyclohexane, 1,6-hexane. Examples thereof include diol diglycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, polyglycerol polyglycidyl ether and the like.
Commercially available epoxy crosslinking agents are trade names "TETRAD-X" and "TETRAD-C" manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Inc., trade names "Epiclone CR-5L" manufactured by DIC, and products manufactured by Nagase ChemteX. Examples include the name "Denacol EX-512" and the trade name "TEPIC-G" manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.

 カルボジイミド系架橋剤としては、カルボジイミド基を2個以上有する低分子化合物または高分子化合物を用いることができる。水分散型粘着剤組成物においては、水に溶解または分散可能なカルボジイミド系架橋剤の使用が好ましい。カルボジイミド系架橋剤の市販品としては、例えば、日清紡社製の「カルボジライトV-02」、「カルボジライトV-02-L2」、「カルボジライトV-04」等のカルボジライトVシリーズ(水溶液タイプ)や、「カルボジライトE-01」、「カルボジライトE-02」、「カルボジライトE-04」等のカルボジライトEシリーズ(水分散タイプ)等のカルボジライトシリーズが挙げられる。 As the carbodiimide cross-linking agent, a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound having two or more carbodiimide groups can be used. In the water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, it is preferable to use a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent that can be dissolved or dispersed in water. Examples of commercially available carbodiimide crosslinking agents include carbodilite V series (aqueous solution type) such as "carbodilite V-02", "carbodilite V-02-L2", and "carbodilite V-04" manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd. Carbodilite series such as carbodilite E series (water dispersion type) such as carbodilite E-01”, “carbodilite E-02”, and “carbodilite E-04” can be mentioned.

 ここに開示される粘着剤組成物における架橋剤の含有量(架橋剤の総量)は特に限定されず、ベースポリマーの組成や分子量を考慮して、架橋後において好適な特性が得られるように適宜設定することができる。特に限定するものではないが、ベースポリマー(典型的にはアクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対する架橋剤の使用量は、凡そ0.01重量部以上、凡そ0.1重量部以上が適当であり、好ましくは凡そ1重量部以上(例えば凡そ2重量部以上)である。また、接着性等の観点から、上記架橋剤の使用量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して凡そ15重量部以下(好ましくは凡そ10重量部以下、例えば凡そ5重量部以下)とすることが適当であり、被着体との密着性を高める観点から、好ましくは凡そ4重量部以下、より好ましくは3.5重量部未満、さらに好ましくは3重量部未満である。 The content of the cross-linking agent (total amount of the cross-linking agent) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and in consideration of the composition and the molecular weight of the base polymer, an appropriate property may be obtained after the cross-linking. Can be set. Although not particularly limited, it is appropriate that the amount of the crosslinking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (typically an acrylic polymer) is about 0.01 parts by weight or more, and about 0.1 parts by weight or more, It is preferably about 1 part by weight or more (for example, about 2 parts by weight or more). From the viewpoint of adhesiveness and the like, the amount of the cross-linking agent used is about 15 parts by weight or less (preferably about 10 parts by weight or less, for example, about 5 parts by weight or less) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It is suitable, and from the viewpoint of enhancing the adhesion to the adherend, it is preferably about 4 parts by weight or less, more preferably less than 3.5 parts by weight, further preferably less than 3 parts by weight.

 (リン酸エステル)
 ここに開示される粘着剤組成物(ひいては粘着剤層)は、リン酸エステルを含んでもよい。リン酸エステルとしては、例えば、ラウリルリン酸、ラウリルリン酸塩等のアルキルリン酸エステルや、オキシエチレン鎖を有するリン酸エステル、その塩が挙げられる。上記塩は、例えば、上記リン酸エステルのナトリウム塩、カリウム塩、バリウム塩、トリエタノールアミン塩等であり得る。以下、特記しない限り「リン酸エステル」は塩を含む意味で用いる。なかでも、オキシエチレン鎖を有するリン酸エステルを用いることがより好ましい。オキシエチレン鎖を有するリン酸エステルは、主に粘着力の経時上昇を抑制しつつ(すなわち、粘着力の安定性を向上させつつ)、粘着剤層と被着体表面との間で水や酸、アルカリ等の腐食誘発成分の進入を防止し得る。ここで、オキシエチレン鎖とは、少なくとも1つのエチレンオキシド(EO)単位を含み、他のオキシアルキレン単位(例えば、炭素原子数3~6程度のオキシアルキレン単位)をさらに含み得る鎖状の構造部分をいう。オキシエチレン鎖を有するリン酸エステルの一好適例として、EO単位またはその繰返しにより構成されたオキシエチレン鎖を有するリン酸エステルが挙げられる。例えば、以下の一般式(a)で表わされるリン酸エステルまたはその塩を好ましく採用し得る。
(Phosphate ester)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (and thus the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) disclosed herein may contain a phosphoric acid ester. Examples of the phosphoric acid ester include alkyl phosphoric acid esters such as lauryl phosphoric acid and lauryl phosphate, phosphoric acid esters having an oxyethylene chain, and salts thereof. The salt may be, for example, a sodium salt, a potassium salt, a barium salt, a triethanolamine salt or the like of the phosphoric acid ester. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, “phosphate ester” is used to include a salt. Above all, it is more preferable to use a phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain. The phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain mainly suppresses an increase in the adhesive force with time (that is, improves the stability of the adhesive force), while at the same time adding water or acid between the adhesive layer and the surface of the adherend. It is possible to prevent entry of corrosion-inducing components such as alkali. Here, the oxyethylene chain refers to a chain-like structural portion that contains at least one ethylene oxide (EO) unit and may further contain another oxyalkylene unit (for example, an oxyalkylene unit having about 3 to 6 carbon atoms). Say. One preferable example of the phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain is a phosphoric acid ester having an oxyethylene chain constituted by EO units or repeating thereof. For example, a phosphoric acid ester represented by the following general formula (a) or a salt thereof can be preferably adopted.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

 上記一般式(a)中のR1は-OHまたは-(OCH2CH2nOR3であり、R2は-(OCH2CH2mOR4を表わす。nおよびmは、EOの付加モル数を表す。EO付加モル数nは、1~30の整数であり、典型的には1~20程度の整数であり、好ましくは1~10程度の整数であり、例えば1~8程度の整数であり得る。EO付加モル数nは、1~6程度の整数であることが好ましく、1~4(例えば2~4)程度の整数であることがさらに好ましい。一般式(a)において、EO付加モル数mは、典型的には、EO付加モル数nと概ね同様の数であり得る。n,mは、同じであってもよく異なっていてよい。上記R3およびR4は、一価の有機基(典型的には炭化水素基)であり、例えば、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルキルアリール基およびアリールアルキル基から選択される基であり得る。R3、R4は、直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基、アリール基またはアルキルアリール基であることが好ましい。R3,R4は、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~30の有機基であり、炭素原子数6以上(好ましくは8以上、例えば11以上)の有機基であり得る。好ましい一態様では、R3,R4は、炭素原子数20以下、好ましくは18以下、例えば15以下の有機基であり得る。一般式(a)で表わされるリン酸エステルの塩は、例えば、これらのリン酸エステルのナトリウム塩、カリウム塩、バリウム塩、トリエタノールアミン塩等であり得る。リン酸エステルは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 In the general formula (a), R 1 is —OH or —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n OR 3 , and R 2 represents —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) m OR 4 . n and m represent the number of moles of EO added. The EO-added mole number n is an integer of 1 to 30, typically an integer of about 1 to 20, preferably an integer of about 1 to 10, and may be an integer of about 1 to 8, for example. The number of moles of EO added n is preferably an integer of about 1 to 6, and more preferably an integer of about 1 to 4 (eg, 2 to 4). In the general formula (a), the number EO-added moles m can typically be approximately the same as the number EO-added moles n. n and m may be the same or different. R 3 and R 4 are monovalent organic groups (typically hydrocarbon groups), and are, for example, each independently selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylaryl group and an arylalkyl group. Can be a group that is R 3 and R 4 are preferably linear or branched alkyl groups, aryl groups or alkylaryl groups. R 3 and R 4 are each independently an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and may be an organic group having 6 or more carbon atoms (preferably 8 or more, for example 11 or more). In a preferred embodiment, R 3 and R 4 may be an organic group having 20 or less carbon atoms, preferably 18 or less carbon atoms, for example 15 or less carbon atoms. The salt of the phosphoric acid ester represented by the general formula (a) may be, for example, sodium salt, potassium salt, barium salt, triethanolamine salt or the like of these phosphoric acid ester. The phosphate ester may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 上記リン酸エステルとしては、ポリオキシエチレントリデシルエーテルリン酸、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテルリン酸、ポリオキシエチレンオクタデシルエーテルリン酸等の、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル;ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテルリン酸、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテルリン酸、ポリオキシエチレンジノニルフェニルエーテルリン酸、ポリオキシエチレンジオクチルフェニルエーテルリン酸等の、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアリールリン酸エステル:等が挙げられる。一態様において、分子量が150~5000であるリン酸エステルを好ましく用いることができる。 Examples of the phosphoric acid ester include polyoxyethylene tridecyl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene octadecyl ether phosphoric acid, and the like; polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphoric acid ester; polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether phosphoric acid. , Polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene dinonyl phenyl ether phosphoric acid, polyoxyethylene dioctyl phenyl ether phosphoric acid, etc., and the like. In one aspect, a phosphoric acid ester having a molecular weight of 150 to 5000 can be preferably used.

 リン酸エステルの使用量は、ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対して、例えば凡そ0.05重量部以上とすることができ、凡そ0.1重量部以上とすることが好ましく、凡そ0.3重量部以上(例えば凡そ0.5重量部以上)とすることがより好ましい。また、被着体表面の低汚染性の観点から、リン酸エステルの使用量は、ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対して凡そ30重量部以下(例えば20重量部以下)とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ10重量部以下、より好ましくは凡そ5重量部以下、さらに好ましくは凡そ3重量部以下、特に好ましくは凡そ2重量部以下(例えば1重量部以下)である。 The amount of the phosphate ester used can be, for example, about 0.05 part by weight or more, and preferably about 0.1 part by weight or more, relative to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (eg, acrylic polymer). More preferably, it is about 0.3 parts by weight or more (for example, about 0.5 parts by weight or more). From the viewpoint of low contamination of the surface of the adherend, the amount of the phosphoric acid ester used is about 30 parts by weight or less (eg, 20 parts by weight or less) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (eg, acrylic polymer). It is suitable, and is preferably about 10 parts by weight or less, more preferably about 5 parts by weight or less, further preferably about 3 parts by weight or less, particularly preferably about 2 parts by weight or less (for example, 1 part by weight or less).

 (防錆剤)
 好ましい一態様に係る粘着剤層は防錆剤を含み得る。防錆剤としては、特に限定されず、例えば、アミン化合物、アゾール系化合物、亜硝酸塩類、安息香酸アンモニウム、フタル酸アンモニウム、ステアリン酸アンモニウム、パルミチン酸アンモニウム、オレイン酸アンモニウム、炭酸アンモニウム、ジシクロヘキシルアミン安息香酸塩、尿素、ウロトロピン、チオ尿素、カルバミン酸フェニル、シクロヘキシルアンモニウム-N-シクロヘキシルカルバメート(CHC)等が挙げられる。これらの防錆剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。なかでも、アミン系化合物、アゾール系化合物が好ましい。
(anti-rust)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to a preferred embodiment may contain a rust preventive agent. The rust preventive agent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include amine compounds, azole compounds, nitrites, ammonium benzoate, ammonium phthalate, ammonium stearate, ammonium palmitate, ammonium oleate, ammonium carbonate, and dicyclohexylamine benzoate. Examples thereof include acid salts, urea, urotropine, thiourea, phenyl carbamate, cyclohexyl ammonium-N-cyclohexyl carbamate (CHC) and the like. These rust preventives may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Of these, amine compounds and azole compounds are preferable.

 防錆剤(例えばアミン系化合物(アミン系防錆剤)やアゾール系化合物(アゾール系防錆剤))の含有量は特に限定されず、例えば、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して0.01重量部以上(典型的には0.05重量部以上)とすることができる。より良好な腐食等防止効果を得る観点から、上記含有量は、0.1重量部以上であってよく、0.3重量部以上でもよく、0.5重量部以上でもよい。一方、含有成分に起因する腐食等の防止や粘着剤の凝集力の観点から、防錆剤の含有量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して8重量部未満とすることが適当であり、6重量部以下としてもよく、好ましくは5重量部以下であり、例えば3重量部以下であってもよく、1重量部以下であってもよい。ここに開示される技術は、防錆剤を実質的に使用しない態様でも好ましく実施され得る。 The content of the rust preventive agent (for example, amine compound (amine rust preventive) or azole compound (azole rust preventive)) is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 0.01 part by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It can be more than 1 part (typically more than 0.05 part by weight). From the viewpoint of obtaining a better effect of preventing corrosion and the like, the content may be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.3 parts by weight or more, and 0.5 parts by weight or more. On the other hand, the content of the rust preventive agent is appropriately less than 8 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer from the viewpoints of preventing corrosion and the like due to the contained components and cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive. The amount may be not more than 5 parts by weight, preferably not more than 5 parts by weight, for example not more than 3 parts by weight, or not more than 1 part by weight. The technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out even in a mode in which a rust preventive agent is not substantially used.

 粘着剤層が着色されている態様において、粘着剤層は典型的には着色剤を含み得る。着色剤の種類は特に限定されず、例えば上述した着色剤の1種または2種以上を好ましく用いることができる。着色剤の配合量は特に限定されず、粘着剤層の0.3重量%以上とすることが適当であり、0.5重量%以上が好ましく、1.0重量%以上がより好ましい。着色剤の含有量は、例えば、10重量%未満とすることができ、5重量%未満が好ましく、3.5重量%未満がより好ましく、3.0重量%未満がさらに好ましい。ここに開示される技術は、粘着剤層が着色剤を実質的に含まない態様で好ましく実施することができる。この態様において、粘着剤層は着色されていないものであり得る。 In embodiments where the adhesive layer is colored, the adhesive layer may typically include a colorant. The kind of the colorant is not particularly limited, and for example, one kind or two or more kinds of the above-mentioned colorants can be preferably used. The amount of the colorant compounded is not particularly limited, and is appropriately 0.3% by weight or more of the adhesive layer, preferably 0.5% by weight or more, and more preferably 1.0% by weight or more. The content of the colorant can be, for example, less than 10% by weight, preferably less than 5% by weight, more preferably less than 3.5% by weight, still more preferably less than 3.0% by weight. The technique disclosed here can be preferably implemented in a mode in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer does not substantially contain a colorant. In this aspect, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be uncolored.

 粘着剤組成物には、必要に応じて、ロジン系粘着付与剤、テルペン系粘着付与剤、炭化水素系粘着付与剤等の公知の粘着付与剤を含有させることができる。剥離強度が高くなりすぎることを避ける観点から、粘着付与剤の使用量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して凡そ5重量部以下とすることが好ましく、凡そ1重量部以下とすることがより好ましい。ここに開示される保護シートは、ベースポリマーの組成やTg、粘着剤のゲル分率等を通じて粘着力を効果的に制御し得ることから、粘着付与剤を使用しない態様でも好ましく実施され得る。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may contain a known tackifier such as a rosin-based tackifier, a terpene-based tackifier, or a hydrocarbon-based tackifier, if necessary. From the viewpoint of preventing the peel strength from becoming too high, the amount of the tackifier used is preferably about 5 parts by weight or less, and more preferably about 1 part by weight or less, relative to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. .. The protective sheet disclosed herein can effectively control the adhesive force through the composition and Tg of the base polymer, the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, and the like, and thus can be preferably carried out even in a mode where no tackifier is used.

 上記粘着剤組成物(ひいては粘着剤層)は、必要に応じて、粘度調整剤(増粘剤等)、架橋助剤、可塑剤、軟化剤、充填剤、帯電防止剤、老化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、光安定剤、消泡剤等の、粘着剤組成物の分野において一般的な各種の任意添加剤を含有してもよい。また、上記任意添加剤として、ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)とは異なる任意のポリマー成分を用いてもよい。そのような任意ポリマーの含有量は、粘着剤組成物中、例えば凡そ10重量%以下、例えば凡そ1重量%以下)であり、ここに開示される粘着剤組成物は、上記任意ポリマーを実質的に含まないものであり得る。また、一態様に係る粘着剤組成物は、脂肪酸エステル等の可塑剤の含有量が例えばベースポリマー100重量部に対して10重量部未満(例えば1重量部未満)に制限されたものであり得る。典型的には、粘着剤組成物は可塑剤を実質的に含まないものであり得る。また、ここに開示される技術は、イオン性化合物(例えばイオン液体やアルカリ金属塩)等の帯電防止剤(導電剤であり得る。)を実質的に含まない態様で好ましく実施することができる。上記各種任意添加剤に関するその他の事項については、従来公知の各種添加剤や各種方法等を技術常識に基づき適宜採用することができ、特に本発明を特徴づけるものではないので、詳細な説明は省略する。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (and by extension, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) is, if necessary, a viscosity modifier (thickener, etc.), a cross-linking aid, a plasticizer, a softening agent, a filler, an antistatic agent, an antiaging agent, an ultraviolet ray. It may contain various optional additives generally used in the field of pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions, such as an absorber, an antioxidant, a light stabilizer and a defoaming agent. Further, as the above-mentioned optional additive, an arbitrary polymer component different from the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) may be used. The content of such an optional polymer is, for example, about 10% by weight or less, for example, about 1% by weight or less) in the PSA composition, and the PSA composition disclosed herein is substantially the same as the above optional polymer. May not be included in. Further, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect may be one in which the content of a plasticizer such as a fatty acid ester is limited to less than 10 parts by weight (for example, less than 1 part by weight) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. .. Typically, the adhesive composition may be substantially free of plasticizer. Further, the technology disclosed herein can be preferably implemented in a mode in which an antistatic agent (which may be a conductive agent) such as an ionic compound (for example, an ionic liquid or an alkali metal salt) is not substantially contained. Regarding other matters regarding the various optional additives, conventionally known various additives, various methods, and the like can be appropriately adopted based on common general technical knowledge, and do not particularly characterize the present invention, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

 ここに開示される技術において、粘着剤層の形成に水分散型粘着剤組成物を使用する態様では、粘着剤組成物は、例えば、界面活性剤を用いたエマルション重合により得られたアクリル系ポリマーの水分散液に、必要に応じて用いられる他の成分(例えば、架橋剤、リン酸エステル等)を混合することにより調製することができる。上記水分散液は、後述する水性液体を含むものであり得る。例えば、エマルション重合により得られた重合反応液や、該重合反応液に必要に応じてpH調整(例えば中和)、不揮発分含量の調整、粘度の調整等の処理を施したものを用いることができる。通常は、重合反応液にアンモニア水などの中和剤を加えてpHを適当な範囲(例えばpH6~9程度の範囲)に調整することにより、エマルションの分散安定性が向上し得る。 In the technique disclosed herein, in an embodiment in which a water-dispersed pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is used to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is, for example, an acrylic polymer obtained by emulsion polymerization using a surfactant. It can be prepared by mixing other components used as necessary (for example, a cross-linking agent, a phosphoric acid ester, etc.) with the water dispersion liquid. The above aqueous dispersion may contain the below-mentioned aqueous liquid. For example, it is preferable to use a polymerization reaction liquid obtained by emulsion polymerization, or one obtained by subjecting the polymerization reaction liquid to treatment such as pH adjustment (for example, neutralization), adjustment of non-volatile content, adjustment of viscosity, etc. as necessary. it can. Usually, the dispersion stability of the emulsion can be improved by adding a neutralizing agent such as aqueous ammonia to the polymerization reaction liquid to adjust the pH to an appropriate range (for example, a pH range of about 6 to 9).

 特に限定するものではないが、粘着剤組成物の不揮発分含量(NV;nonvolatile content)は、例えば、乾燥効率等の観点から凡そ20重量%以上(典型的には凡そ30重量%以上、好ましくは凡そ40重量%以上)とすることができ、また、塗工性等の観点から凡そ75重量%以下(典型的には凡そ70重量%以下、好ましくは凡そ60重量%以下)とすることができる。 Although not particularly limited, the nonvolatile content (NV; nonvolatile content) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is, for example, about 20% by weight or more (typically about 30% by weight or more, preferably from the viewpoint of drying efficiency). It can be about 40% by weight or more), and can be about 75% by weight or less (typically about 70% by weight or less, preferably about 60% by weight or less) from the viewpoint of coatability and the like. ..

 基材層となる支持基材上に粘着剤層を設ける方法としては、上述のような粘着剤組成物を支持基材に直接付与(典型的には塗布)して硬化処理する方法(直接法)や、適当な剥離面(例えば、剥離性を有する転写シートの表面)上に上記粘着剤組成物を塗布して硬化処理することで該剥離面上に粘着剤層を形成し、その粘着剤層を支持基材に貼り合わせて転写する方法(転写法)等を用いることができる。上記硬化処理は、乾燥(加熱)、冷却、架橋、追加の共重合反応、エージング等から選択される1または2以上の処理であり得る。例えば溶媒を含む粘着剤組成物を単に乾燥させるだけの処理(加熱処理等)や、加熱溶融状態にある粘着剤組成物を単に冷却する(固化させる)だけの処理も、ここでいう硬化処理に含まれ得る。上記硬化処理が2以上の処理(例えば乾燥および架橋)を含む場合、これらの処理は同時に行ってもよく、多段階に亘って行ってもよい。 As a method for providing the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the supporting base material which becomes the base material layer, a method of directly applying (typically coating) the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to the supporting base material and performing a curing treatment (direct method) ) Or an appropriate release surface (for example, the surface of a transfer sheet having releasability), and by applying a curing treatment to the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed on the release surface. A method in which the layer is attached to a supporting base material and transferred (transfer method) or the like can be used. The curing treatment may be one or more treatments selected from drying (heating), cooling, crosslinking, additional copolymerization reaction, aging and the like. For example, the treatment of simply drying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a solvent (heat treatment or the like) or the treatment of simply cooling (solidifying) the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition in a heating and melting state is also included in the curing treatment here. May be included. When the curing treatment includes two or more treatments (for example, drying and crosslinking), these treatments may be performed simultaneously or may be performed in multiple steps.

 粘着剤組成物の塗布は、例えばグラビアロールコーター、リバースロールコーター、キスロールコーター、ディップロールコーター、バーコーター、ナイフコーター、スプレーコーター等の慣用のコーターを用いて行うことができる。架橋反応の促進、製造効率向上等の観点から、粘着剤組成物の乾燥は加熱下で行うことが好ましい。粘着剤組成物が塗布される対象物(支持基材等)の種類にもよるが、例えば凡そ40℃~150℃程度の乾燥温度を採用することができる。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be applied using a conventional coater such as a gravure roll coater, a reverse roll coater, a kiss roll coater, a dip roll coater, a bar coater, a knife coater, and a spray coater. From the viewpoint of accelerating the crosslinking reaction, improving the production efficiency, etc., it is preferable to dry the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition under heating. A drying temperature of, for example, about 40° C. to 150° C. can be adopted, although it depends on the type of the object (supporting substrate or the like) to which the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied.

 ここに開示される保護シートを構成する粘着剤層は、特に限定されるものではないが、熱水抽出により測定される塩化物イオン量が粘着剤(層)1g当たり凡そ105μg以下であることが適当である。これにより、保護対象であるLow-Eガラス板における腐食等を長期にわたって防止することができる。粘着剤(層)1g当たりの塩化物イオン量は、好ましくは凡そ100μg以下、より好ましくは凡そ95μg以下、さらに好ましくは凡そ90μg以下、特に好ましくは凡そ85μg以下であり、凡そ75μg以下(凡そ70μg以下)であってもよい。粘着剤(層)1g当たりの塩化物イオン量の下限値は、理想的には0μgであるが、生産効率、実用上の許容レベル等の観点から、凡そ1μg以上であってもよく、凡そ10μg以上であってもよく、凡そ50μg以上であってもよい。粘着剤(層)1g当たりの塩化物イオン量は、下記の方法により測定される。あるいは、保護シートと基材層における塩化物イオン量を熱水抽出により測定して両者の塩化物イオン量の差から、粘着剤層からの塩化物イオン量を算出し、得られた値を単位粘着剤(層)重量当たりの値に換算して求めてもよい。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer constituting the protective sheet disclosed herein is not particularly limited, but the chloride ion amount measured by hot water extraction is about 105 μg or less per 1 g of the pressure-sensitive adhesive (layer). Appropriate. This makes it possible to prevent corrosion and the like in the Low-E glass plate that is the protection target for a long period of time. The chloride ion amount per 1 g of the adhesive (layer) is preferably about 100 μg or less, more preferably about 95 μg or less, further preferably about 90 μg or less, particularly preferably about 85 μg or less, about 75 μg or less (about 70 μg or less. ). The lower limit of the amount of chloride ions per 1 g of the pressure-sensitive adhesive (layer) is ideally 0 μg, but from the viewpoint of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be about 1 μg or more, about 10 μg. It may be more than 50 μg. The chloride ion amount per 1 g of the pressure-sensitive adhesive (layer) is measured by the following method. Alternatively, the chloride ion amount in the protective sheet and the base material layer is measured by hot water extraction, and the chloride ion amount from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is calculated from the difference in the chloride ion amount between the two, and the obtained value is used as a unit. It may be obtained by converting it into a value per weight of the adhesive (layer).

 [粘着剤(層)の塩化物イオン量]
 測定対象である保護シートを純水でよく洗って、シート面積200cmサイズに切り出し、粘着剤のみを採取する。採取した粘着剤をポリプロピレン(PP)製容器に入れて秤量する。純水25mLをPP製容器に添加し、乾燥器を用いて120℃で1時間の加温抽出を行う。得られた抽出液について、後述のイオンクロマトグラフ法と同じ方法で、塩化物イオン標準液を用いて抽出液中の塩化物イオン量を定量し、抽出に用いた粘着剤1g当たりの塩化物イオン量を求める。
[Amount of chloride ions in adhesive (layer)]
The protective sheet to be measured is thoroughly washed with pure water, cut into a sheet area of 200 cm 2 and only the adhesive is collected. The collected adhesive is put in a polypropylene (PP) container and weighed. 25 mL of pure water is added to a PP container, and extraction with heating is performed at 120° C. for 1 hour using a dryer. With respect to the obtained extract, the amount of chloride ion in the extract was quantified using a chloride ion standard solution by the same method as the ion chromatography method described later, and chloride ion per 1 g of the adhesive used for extraction Find the amount.

 (ゲル分率)
 ここに開示される粘着剤層の酢酸エチル不溶分の重量分率(ゲル分率)は特に限定されず、例えば凡そ40%以上(典型的には凡そ50%以上)であり得る。一態様において、所定以上の表面硬さを得る観点から、粘着剤層のゲル分率は、凡そ60%以上が適当であり、凡そ80%以上が好ましく、凡そ90%以上(例えば凡そ91%以上、さらには凡そ93%以上)がより好ましい。粘着剤層のゲル分率は、例えば凡そ95%以上(例えば凡そ98%以上)であってもよい。ゲル分率の上昇により、粘着剤の凝集性が向上し、経時粘着力が抑制される傾向にある。ゲル分率の上限は、原理上、100%である。いくつかの態様において、ゲル分率は、例えば凡そ98%以下とすることができ、凡そ95%以下(例えば凡そ90%以下)としてもよい。ゲル分率は、例えば、ベースポリマーの組成、ベースポリマーの重合方法や重合条件、ベースポリマーの分子量、架橋剤の使用の有無およびその種類ならびに使用量の選択等により調節することができる。ゲル分率は下記の方法で測定される。
(Gel fraction)
The weight fraction (gel fraction) of the ethyl acetate insoluble matter in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited and may be, for example, about 40% or more (typically about 50% or more). In one aspect, from the viewpoint of obtaining a predetermined or higher surface hardness, the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is suitably about 60% or more, preferably about 80% or more, and about 90% or more (for example, about 91% or more. , And about 93% or more) is more preferable. The gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be, for example, about 95% or more (eg, about 98% or more). The increase in the gel fraction tends to improve the cohesiveness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive and suppress the temporal adhesive force. The upper limit of the gel fraction is 100% in principle. In some embodiments, the gel fraction can be, for example, about 98% or less, and can be about 95% or less (eg, about 90% or less). The gel fraction can be adjusted by, for example, the composition of the base polymer, the polymerization method and the polymerization conditions of the base polymer, the molecular weight of the base polymer, the presence or absence of the use of a crosslinking agent, and the selection of the type and the amount thereof. The gel fraction is measured by the following method.

 (膨潤度)
 ここに開示される粘着剤層の膨潤度は特に限定されず、凡そ30倍以下であり得る。膨潤度は、所定以上の表面硬さを得る観点から、凡そ20倍以下とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ15倍以下、より好ましくは凡そ12倍以下であり、例えば凡そ10倍以下、凡そ8倍以下であってもよい。膨潤度の下限は原理上1倍であり、凡そ3倍以上、例えば凡そ5倍以上であり得る。膨潤度は、例えば、ベースポリマーの分子量、架橋剤の種類(官能基間距離)や使用量等により調節することができる。膨潤度は下記の方法で測定される。後述の実施例についても同様の方法が採用される。
(Swelling degree)
The swelling degree of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited and may be about 30 times or less. The degree of swelling is appropriately about 20 times or less, preferably about 15 times or less, more preferably about 12 times or less, for example, about 10 times or less, from the viewpoint of obtaining a surface hardness of a predetermined value or more. It may be about 8 times or less. The lower limit of the degree of swelling is in principle 1 time and may be approximately 3 times or more, for example approximately 5 times or more. The degree of swelling can be adjusted by, for example, the molecular weight of the base polymer, the type (distance between functional groups) of the crosslinking agent, the amount used, and the like. The degree of swelling is measured by the following method. The same method is adopted for the examples described later.

  [ゲル分率および膨潤度の測定]
 約0.1gの粘着剤層サンプル(重量W1)を平均孔径0.2μmの多孔質ポリテトラフルオロエチレン膜(重量W2)で巾着状に包み、口をタコ糸(重量W3)で縛る。上記多孔質ポリテトラフルオロエチレン膜としては、商品名「ニトフロン(登録商標)NTF1122」(日東電工社製、平均孔径0.2μm、気孔率75%、厚さ85μm)またはその相当品を使用する。この包みを酢酸エチル50mLに浸し、室温(典型的には23℃)で7日間保持した後、上記包みを取り出し、外表面に付着している酢酸エチルを拭き取り、該包みの重量(W4)を測定する。次いで、上記包みを130℃で2時間乾燥させ、該包みの重量(W5)を測定する。各値を以下の式に代入することにより、粘着剤層のゲル分率および膨潤度を算出することができる。
    ゲル分率(%)=[(W5-W2-W3)/W1]×100
    膨潤度(倍)=(W4-W2-W3)/(W5-W2-W3
[Measurement of gel fraction and swelling degree]
About 0.1 g of the adhesive layer sample (weight W 1 ) was wrapped in a purse-like shape with a porous polytetrafluoroethylene membrane (weight W 2 ) having an average pore diameter of 0.2 μm, and the mouth was tied with a tacho thread (weight W 3 ). .. As the above-mentioned porous polytetrafluoroethylene film, a product name “Nitoflon (registered trademark) NTF1122” (manufactured by Nitto Denko Corporation, average pore diameter 0.2 μm, porosity 75%, thickness 85 μm) or its equivalent is used. The package is dipped in 50 mL of ethyl acetate and kept at room temperature (typically 23° C.) for 7 days, then the package is taken out, the ethyl acetate adhering to the outer surface is wiped off, and the weight of the package (W 4 ) To measure. Then, the package is dried at 130° C. for 2 hours, and the weight (W 5 ) of the package is measured. The gel fraction and swelling degree of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be calculated by substituting each value into the following equation.
Gel fraction (%)=[(W 5 −W 2 −W 3 )/W 1 ]×100
Swelling degree (times)=(W 4 -W 2 -W 3 )/(W 5 -W 2 -W 3 )

 <基材層>
 ここに開示される保護シートは基材層を含み得る。基材層としては、樹脂フィルム、ゴムシート、発泡体シート、これらの複合体等を用いることができる。ゴムシートの例としては、天然ゴムシート、ブチルゴムシート等が挙げられる。発泡体シートの例としては、発泡ポリウレタンシート、発泡クロロプレンゴムシート等が挙げられる。
<Base material layer>
The protective sheet disclosed herein may include a substrate layer. As the base material layer, a resin film, a rubber sheet, a foam sheet, a composite of these, or the like can be used. Examples of the rubber sheet include a natural rubber sheet and a butyl rubber sheet. Examples of the foam sheet include a polyurethane foam sheet, a chloroprene rubber sheet, and the like.

 ここに開示される技術は、樹脂フィルムを基材層とする保護シートに好ましく適用され得る。ここでいう「樹脂フィルム」は、典型的には、以下に示すような樹脂成分を主体とする樹脂組成物を膜状に成形してなるフィルムであって、いわゆる不織布や織布とは区別される概念(すなわち、不織布や織布を除く概念)である。実質的に非発泡の樹脂フィルムが好ましい。ここで、非発泡の樹脂フィルムとは、発泡体とするための意図的な処理を行っていない樹脂フィルムを指し、具体的には、発泡倍率が凡そ1.1倍未満(例えば1.05倍未満、典型的には1.01倍未満)の樹脂フィルムであり得る。 The technique disclosed here can be preferably applied to a protective sheet having a resin film as a base layer. The "resin film" here is typically a film formed by molding a resin composition containing a resin component as shown below into a film, and is distinguished from so-called non-woven fabrics and woven fabrics. (That is, the concept excluding non-woven fabric and woven fabric). A substantially non-foamed resin film is preferred. Here, the non-foamed resin film refers to a resin film that has not been intentionally treated to form a foam, and specifically, has a foaming ratio of less than about 1.1 times (for example, 1.05 times). Less, typically less than 1.01 times) resin film.

 樹脂フィルムを構成する樹脂成分の例としては、ポリオレフィン系樹脂(ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、エチレン-プロピレン共重合体、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体等)、ポリ塩化ビニル系樹脂(典型的には、軟質ポリ塩化ビニル系樹脂)、ポリ酢酸ビニル系樹脂、ポリウレタン系樹脂(エーテル系ポリウレタン、エステル系ポリウレタン、カーボネート系ポリウレタン等)、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート系樹脂、熱可塑性エラストマー(オレフィン系エラストマー、スチレン系エラストマー、アクリル系エラストマー等)、ポリエステル系樹脂(ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリブチレンナフタレート等)、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、フッ素系樹脂、セロハン樹脂等のセルロース系樹脂等が挙げられる。これらの樹脂成分は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いられ得る。樹脂フィルムの好適例としては、ポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムやポリエステル系樹脂フィルム、塩化ビニル系樹脂フィルムが挙げられる。 Examples of the resin component constituting the resin film include polyolefin resin (polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene-propylene copolymer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, etc.), polyvinyl chloride resin (typically soft poly Vinyl chloride resin), polyvinyl acetate resin, polyurethane resin (ether polyurethane, ester polyurethane, carbonate polyurethane, etc.), urethane (meth)acrylate resin, thermoplastic elastomer (olefin elastomer, styrene elastomer, Acrylic elastomer, etc.), polyester resin (polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene naphthalate, etc.), polycarbonate resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, fluorine resin, cellophane resin, etc. Resin etc. are mentioned. These resin components may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Suitable examples of the resin film include a polyolefin resin film, a polyester resin film, and a vinyl chloride resin film.

 特に限定するものではないが、一態様に係る保護シートにおいて、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル系樹脂、ポリウレタン系樹脂、熱可塑性エラストマーおよびポリエステル系樹脂からなる群から選択される1種または2種以上の樹脂成分を主成分として含む基材層(典型的には、かかる樹脂成分を50重量%を超える割合で含む基材層)を好ましく採用し得る。他の一態様では、性能、取扱い性、コスト等を考慮して、ポリオレフィン系樹脂層、ポリエステル系樹脂層またはポリ塩化ビニル系樹脂層を含む基材層を好ましく利用し得る。上記樹脂材料のなかでも、熱安定性や軽量性等の点からポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリウレタン系樹脂およびオレフィン系エラストマーが好ましく、取扱い性等の点からポリオレフィン系樹脂およびオレフィン系エラストマーが特に好ましい。 Although not particularly limited, in the protective sheet according to one aspect, one or more selected from the group consisting of a polyolefin resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, a polyurethane resin, a thermoplastic elastomer and a polyester resin. A base material layer containing the above resin component as a main component (typically, a base material layer containing such a resin component in a proportion exceeding 50% by weight) can be preferably used. In another aspect, a base material layer including a polyolefin-based resin layer, a polyester-based resin layer, or a polyvinyl chloride-based resin layer can be preferably used in consideration of performance, handleability, cost, and the like. Among the above resin materials, polyolefin-based resins, polyurethane-based resins and olefin-based elastomers are preferable from the viewpoint of thermal stability and light weight, and polyolefin-based resins and olefin-based elastomers are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of handleability.

 ここに開示される保護シートは、ポリオレフィン系樹脂を主成分として含む(50重量%を超える割合で含む)基材層を備える態様、すなわちポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムを基材層とする態様で好ましく実施され得る。例えば、基材層全体の50重量%以上がポリエチレン(PE)樹脂および/またはポリプロピレン(PP)樹脂であるポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムを好ましく採用することができる。換言すれば、上記ポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムは、PE樹脂とPP樹脂との合計量が基材層全体の50重量%以上を占めるものであり得る。上記ポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムは、PE樹脂とPP樹脂とのブレンドであり得る。 The protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably carried out in an aspect including a base material layer containing a polyolefin-based resin as a main component (in a proportion exceeding 50% by weight), that is, an embodiment using a polyolefin-based resin film as the base material layer. obtain. For example, a polyolefin resin film in which 50% by weight or more of the entire base material layer is a polyethylene (PE) resin and/or a polypropylene (PP) resin can be preferably used. In other words, the total amount of the PE resin and the PP resin in the polyolefin resin film may account for 50% by weight or more of the entire base material layer. The polyolefin resin film may be a blend of PE resin and PP resin.

 上記PP樹脂は、構成単量体としてプロピレンを含む種々のポリマー(プロピレン系ポリマー)を主成分とするものであり得る。1種または2種以上のプロピレン系ポリマーから実質的に構成されるPP樹脂であってもよい。ここでいうプロピレン系ポリマーの概念には、ホモポリプロピレンの他、プロピレンと他のモノマーとのランダム共重合体(ランダムポリプロピレン)やブロック共重合体(ブロックポリプロピレン)が包含される。ここでいうプロピレン系ポリマーの概念には、例えば以下のものが含まれる。
 プロピレンのホモポリマー(ホモポリプロピレン)。例えばアイソタクチックポリプロピレン。
 プロピレンと他のα-オレフィン(典型的には、エチレンおよび炭素原子数4~10のα-オレフィンから選択される1種または2種以上)とのランダムコポリマー(ランダムポリプロピレン)。好ましくは、プロピレンを主モノマー(主構成単量体、すなわち単量体全体の50重量%以上を占める成分)とするランダムポリプロピレン。
 プロピレンに他のα-オレフィン(典型的には、エチレンおよび炭素原子数4~10のα-オレフィンから選択される1種または2種以上)をブロック共重合したコポリマー(ブロックポリプロピレン)。好ましくは、プロピレンを主モノマー(主構成単量体、すなわち単量体全体の50重量%以上を占める成分)とするブロックポリプロピレン。
The PP resin may be mainly composed of various polymers (propylene-based polymers) containing propylene as a constituent monomer. It may be a PP resin substantially composed of one or two or more propylene-based polymers. In addition to homopolypropylene, the concept of propylene-based polymer includes a random copolymer of propylene and another monomer (random polypropylene) or a block copolymer (block polypropylene). The concept of the propylene-based polymer here includes, for example, the following.
A homopolymer of propylene (homopolypropylene). For example, isotactic polypropylene.
A random copolymer (random polypropylene) of propylene and another α-olefin (typically, one or more selected from ethylene and α-olefins having 4 to 10 carbon atoms). Preferably, a random polypropylene containing propylene as a main monomer (main constituent monomer, that is, a component occupying 50% by weight or more of the whole monomer).
A copolymer (block polypropylene) obtained by block copolymerizing propylene with another α-olefin (typically, one or more selected from ethylene and α-olefins having 4 to 10 carbon atoms). Preferably, a block polypropylene containing propylene as a main monomer (main constituent monomer, that is, a component accounting for 50% by weight or more of the whole monomer).

 上記PE樹脂は、構成単量体としてエチレンを含む種々のポリマー(エチレン系ポリマー)を主成分とするものであり得る。1種または2種以上のエチレン系ポリマーから実質的に構成されるPE樹脂であってもよい。上記エチレン系ポリマーは、エチレンのホモポリマーであってもよく、主モノマーとしてのエチレンに、副モノマーとして他のα-オレフィンを共重合(ランダム共重合、ブロック共重合等)させたものであってもよい。上記α-オレフィンの好適例としては、プロピレン、1-ブテン(分岐1-ブテンであり得る。)、1-ヘキセン、4-メチル-1-ペンテン、1-オクテン等の、炭素原子数3~10のα-オレフィンが挙げられる。例えば、上記副モノマーとしてのα-オレフィンが凡そ10重量%以下(典型的には凡そ5重量%以下)の割合で共重合されたエチレン系ポリマーを主成分とするPE樹脂を好ましく採用し得る。 The PE resin may be mainly composed of various polymers (ethylene-based polymers) containing ethylene as a constituent monomer. It may be a PE resin substantially composed of one or two or more ethylene-based polymers. The ethylene-based polymer may be a homopolymer of ethylene, which is obtained by copolymerizing ethylene as a main monomer with another α-olefin as a sub-monomer (random copolymerization, block copolymerization, etc.). Good. Preferable examples of the α-olefin include propylene, 1-butene (which may be branched 1-butene), 1-hexene, 4-methyl-1-pentene, 1-octene and the like having 3 to 10 carbon atoms. .Alpha.-olefins. For example, a PE resin containing an ethylene-based polymer as a main component, which is copolymerized with the α-olefin as the sub-monomer at a ratio of about 10% by weight or less (typically about 5% by weight or less) can be preferably used.

 上記PE樹脂はまた、重合性官能基に加えて別の官能基を有するモノマー(官能基含有モノマー)とエチレンとのコポリマーを含むPE樹脂や、かかる官能基含有モノマーをエチレン系ポリマーに共重合させたPE樹脂等であってもよい。エチレンと官能基含有モノマーとのコポリマーとしては、例えば、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体(EVA)、エチレン-アクリル酸共重合体(EAA)、エチレン-メタクリル酸共重合体(EMAA)、エチレン-アクリル酸メチル共重合体(EMA)、エチレン-アクリル酸エチル共重合体(EEA)、エチレン-メタクリル酸メチル共重合体(EMMA)、エチレン-(メタ)アクリル酸(すなわち、アクリル酸および/またはメタクリル酸)共重合体が金属イオンで架橋されたもの等が挙げられる。 The PE resin also includes a PE resin containing a copolymer of ethylene with a monomer (functional group-containing monomer) having another functional group in addition to the polymerizable functional group, and a copolymer of the functional group-containing monomer with an ethylene-based polymer. It may be PE resin or the like. Examples of the copolymer of ethylene and a functional group-containing monomer include ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), ethylene-acrylic acid copolymer (EAA), ethylene-methacrylic acid copolymer (EMAA), ethylene-acrylic. Methyl acid copolymer (EMA), ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer (EEA), ethylene-methyl methacrylate copolymer (EMMA), ethylene-(meth)acrylic acid (that is, acrylic acid and/or methacrylic acid). ) Examples thereof include those obtained by crosslinking the copolymer with metal ions.

 PE樹脂の密度は特に限定されない。ここでいうPE樹脂の概念には、高密度ポリエチレン(HDPE)、中密度ポリエチレン(MDPE)、低密度ポリエチレン(LDPE)および直鎖状低密度ポリエチレン(LLDPE)のいずれもが含まれる。一態様において、上記PE樹脂の密度は、例えば0.90~0.94g/cm程度であり得る。好ましいPE樹脂として、LDPEおよびLLDPEが挙げられる。上記PE樹脂は、1種または2種以上のLDPEと、1種または2種以上のLLDPEとを含むものであってもよい。各LDPEまたはLLDPEのブレンド比や、LDPEとLLDPEとのブレンド比は特に限定されず、所望の特性を示すPE樹脂となるように適宜設定することができる。ここに開示される保護シートの基材層としては、LLDPEを50重量%超(好ましくは凡そ75重量%以上、例えば凡そ90重量%以上)の割合で含むLLDPEフィルムやLDPEを50重量%超(好ましくは凡そ75重量%以上、例えば凡そ90重量%以上)の割合で含むLDPEフィルム等のポリエチレン系樹脂フィルムを好ましく採用し得る。かかるポリエチレン系樹脂フィルムを構成要素として含む積層樹脂フィルムを用いてもよい。 The density of the PE resin is not particularly limited. The concept of the PE resin as used herein includes any of high density polyethylene (HDPE), medium density polyethylene (MDPE), low density polyethylene (LDPE) and linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE). In one aspect, the density of the PE resin may be, for example, about 0.90 to 0.94 g/cm 3 . Preferred PE resins include LDPE and LLDPE. The PE resin may include one or more kinds of LDPE and one or more kinds of LLDPE. The blending ratio of each LDPE or LLDPE and the blending ratio of LDPE and LLDPE are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set so that the PE resin exhibits desired characteristics. As the base material layer of the protective sheet disclosed herein, an LLDPE film or LDPE containing LLDPE in an amount of more than 50% by weight (preferably about 75% by weight or more, for example, about 90% by weight or more) is added to more than 50% by weight ( A polyethylene resin film such as an LDPE film, which is preferably contained in a proportion of about 75% by weight or more, for example about 90% by weight or more) can be preferably used. A laminated resin film containing such a polyethylene resin film as a constituent may be used.

 好ましい一態様において、基材層は着色剤を含む。典型的には、基材層は、着色剤を含む樹脂フィルムを備えるものであり得る。これにより、シート面全体がほぼ均一な着色を有する保護シートを好ましく得ることができる。より具体的には、ここに開示される基材層として、着色剤が練り込まれた樹脂フィルムからなる基材層が好ましく用いられ得る。ここで着色剤が練り込まれた樹脂フィルムとは、樹脂フィルムの主構成材料(典型的には樹脂材料)中に、着色剤が混合された樹脂フィルムをいう。着色剤は、実質的に樹脂フィルム中に分散状態で含まれる。また、着色剤含有樹脂フィルムは、着色層を設ける態様と比べて生産性の点で有利である。なお、着色剤含有基材層(例えば着色剤含有樹脂フィルム)は、それ自体が着色されていると換言することができ、着色基材層(例えば着色樹脂フィルム)ということができる。 In a preferred embodiment, the base material layer contains a colorant. Typically, the base material layer may include a resin film containing a colorant. This makes it possible to preferably obtain a protective sheet having a substantially uniform coloring on the entire sheet surface. More specifically, as the base material layer disclosed herein, a base material layer made of a resin film in which a colorant is kneaded can be preferably used. Here, the resin film in which the colorant is kneaded refers to a resin film in which the colorant is mixed in the main constituent material (typically the resin material) of the resin film. The colorant is substantially contained in the resin film in a dispersed state. Further, the colorant-containing resin film is advantageous in terms of productivity as compared with the aspect in which the color layer is provided. The colorant-containing base material layer (for example, a colorant-containing resin film) can be said to be colored in itself, and can be referred to as a colored base material layer (for example, a colored resin film).

 基材層(好ましくは樹脂フィルム)における着色剤の使用量は特に限定されず、所望の透明性と着色性とを両立するように適宜調整した量とすることができる。着色剤の使用量は、基材層の重量の0.1~30重量%程度とすることが適当であり、例えば0.1~25重量%(典型的には0.1~20重量%)程度とすることができる。 The amount of the colorant used in the base material layer (preferably the resin film) is not particularly limited, and may be an amount appropriately adjusted so as to achieve desired transparency and colorability. The amount of the colorant used is suitably about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the weight of the base material layer, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 20% by weight). It can be a degree.

 ここに開示される保護シートの基材層として用いられる樹脂フィルム(例えばポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルム)は、当該基材層への含有が許容される適宜の成分を必要に応じて含有し得る。例えば、充填材、酸化防止剤、光安定剤(ラジカル捕捉剤、紫外線吸収剤等を包含する意味である。)、帯電防止剤、可塑剤、スリップ剤、アンチブロッキング剤等の添加剤を適宜配合することができる。各添加剤の配合量は、例えば、保護シートの基材層等として用いられる樹脂フィルムの分野における通常の配合量と同程度とすることができる。 The resin film (for example, a polyolefin resin film) used as the base material layer of the protective sheet disclosed herein may optionally contain appropriate components that are allowed to be contained in the base material layer. For example, additives such as a filler, an antioxidant, a light stabilizer (which means a radical scavenger, an ultraviolet absorber, etc.), an antistatic agent, a plasticizer, a slip agent, an antiblocking agent, etc. are appropriately mixed. can do. The amount of each additive compounded can be, for example, approximately the same as the amount normally compounded in the field of a resin film used as a base layer or the like of a protective sheet.

 基材層は、単層構造であってもよく、2層、3層またはそれ以上の多層構造であってもよい。多層構造の場合、少なくとも一つの層(好ましくは全ての層)は、上述したいずれかの樹脂フィルムであることが好ましい。例えば、厚さの75%以上(より好ましくは90%以上)が単層または多層(典型的には単層)のポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムからなる構成の基材層が好ましい。基材層の全体が単層または多層のポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムからなる基材層であってもよい。経済性の観点から、単層構造の樹脂フィルム(例えば、LLDPEフィルム、LDPEフィルム等)からなる基材層を好ましく採用し得る。 The base material layer may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure having two layers, three layers or more. In the case of a multilayer structure, at least one layer (preferably all layers) is preferably any one of the resin films described above. For example, a base material layer having a structure in which 75% or more (more preferably 90% or more) of the thickness is a single-layer or multi-layer (typically single-layer) polyolefin resin film is preferable. The entire base material layer may be a base material layer made of a single-layer or multi-layer polyolefin resin film. From the viewpoint of economy, a base material layer made of a resin film having a single-layer structure (for example, LLDPE film, LDPE film, etc.) can be preferably used.

 基材層の製造方法は、従来公知の方法を適宜採用すればよく、特に限定されない。例えば、基材層として樹脂フィルムを採用する場合には、インフレーション成形、押出成形、Tダイキャスト成形、カレンダーロール成形等の従来公知の一般的なフィルム成形方法を適宜採用して作製した樹脂フィルムを使用することができる。 The method for producing the base material layer may be any conventionally known method, and is not particularly limited. For example, when a resin film is adopted as the base material layer, a resin film produced by appropriately adopting a conventionally known general film forming method such as inflation molding, extrusion molding, T die cast molding, calender roll molding, etc. Can be used.

 基材層の少なくとも一方の面(粘着剤層側の面)が樹脂フィルムの表面である構成において、該樹脂フィルムの表面には、コロナ放電処理、プラズマ処理、オゾン曝露、火炎曝露、紫外線照射処理、酸処理、アルカリ処理、下塗り剤の塗布等の、従来公知の表面処理が施されていてもよい。このような表面処理は、基材層と粘着剤層との密着性、言い換えると粘着剤層の基材層への投錨性を向上させるための処理であり得る。基材層としてポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルムを採用する態様では、上記表面処理を施すことが特に有意義である。 In a constitution in which at least one surface of the base material layer (surface on the side of the adhesive layer) is the surface of the resin film, the surface of the resin film is subjected to corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ozone exposure, flame exposure, ultraviolet irradiation treatment. Conventionally known surface treatments such as acid treatment, alkali treatment, and application of an undercoat agent may be applied. Such a surface treatment may be a treatment for improving the adhesion between the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, in other words, the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the base material layer. In the aspect in which the polyolefin-based resin film is used as the base material layer, it is particularly significant to perform the above surface treatment.

 ここに開示される基材層の全光線透過率は特に限定されない。通常、基材層の全光線透過率は凡そ3%以上であり、例えば凡そ5%以上(典型的には凡そ10%以上)であり得る。保護シート越しの被着体視認性の観点から、全光線透過率は凡そ20%以上(例えば凡そ30%以上)であることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ40%以上、より好ましくは凡そ50%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ60%以上、特に好ましくは凡そ70%以上であり、凡そ80%以上(例えば凡そ90%以上)であってもよい。基材層の全光線透過率の上限は特定の範囲に限定されるものではないが、Low-Eガラス板上での判別性の観点から、凡そ95%以下とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ90%以下であり、例えば凡そ80%以下であってもよく、凡そ70%以下であってもよい。 The total light transmittance of the base material layer disclosed herein is not particularly limited. Generally, the total light transmittance of the substrate layer is about 3% or more, for example about 5% or more (typically about 10% or more). From the viewpoint of the adherend visibility through the protective sheet, the total light transmittance is appropriately about 20% or more (for example, about 30% or more), preferably about 40% or more, and more preferably about 50%. As described above, it is more preferably about 60% or more, particularly preferably about 70% or more, and may be about 80% or more (for example, about 90% or more). The upper limit of the total light transmittance of the base material layer is not limited to a specific range, but from the viewpoint of the discriminability on the Low-E glass plate, it is suitable to be about 95% or less, and preferably Is about 90% or less, for example, about 80% or less, or about 70% or less.

 ここに開示される基材層の波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率は特に限定されない。上記波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率は、通常、凡そ2%以上であり、例えば凡そ5%以上であり、凡そ10%以上(例えば凡そ20%以上)であることが適当である。可視光領域に対応する波長450~800nmの範囲における透過率の最低値を所定値以上とすることで、保護シート越しの被着体視認性は向上する。好ましい一態様では、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が凡そ30%以上であり、より好ましくは凡そ40%以上、さらに好ましくは凡そ50%以上(例えば凡そ60%以上)である。また、上記波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率は、Low-Eガラス板上での判別性の観点から、凡そ95%以下とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ90%以下であり、例えば凡そ80%以下であってもよく、凡そ70%以下であってもよく、凡そ60%以下であってもよく、凡そ50%以下であってもよい。 The minimum transmittance of the base material layer disclosed herein at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is not particularly limited. The minimum transmittance at the wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is usually about 2% or more, for example about 5% or more, and about 10% or more (for example, about 20% or more) is suitable. By setting the minimum value of the transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm corresponding to the visible light region to a predetermined value or more, the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet is improved. In a preferred embodiment, the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is about 30% or more, more preferably about 40% or more, even more preferably about 50% or more (for example, about 60% or more). Further, the minimum transmittance at the wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is appropriately about 95% or less, preferably about 90% or less, from the viewpoint of discriminating property on the Low-E glass plate, and for example, about 90% or less. It may be 80% or less, about 70% or less, about 60% or less, or about 50% or less.

 基材層のヘイズ値は特定の範囲に限定されない。通常、基材層のヘイズ値は凡そ99以下(例えば90以下)である。透明性や、視認性に影響を及ぼす拡散や反射を抑制する観点から、上記ヘイズ値は凡そ50以下であることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ30以下、より好ましくは凡そ20以下であり、凡そ10以下(例えば凡そ5以下)であってもよい。上記ヘイズ値の下限値は特に限定されず、凡そ1以上(例えば凡そ5以上)とすることが適当であり、例えば凡そ10以上であってもよい。他の一態様では、上記ヘイズ値は凡そ20以上であってもよく、50超(例えば凡そ80以上、さらには凡そ90以上)であってもよい。保護シート越しの被着体視認性を損なわない範囲で高ヘイズ値とすることで、保護シートのLow-Eガラス板上での判別性を向上させ得る。 The haze value of the base material layer is not limited to a specific range. Usually, the haze value of the base material layer is about 99 or less (for example, 90 or less). From the viewpoint of suppressing transparency and diffusion and reflection that affect visibility, the haze value is suitably about 50 or less, preferably about 30 or less, more preferably about 20 or less, and It may be 10 or less (for example, about 5 or less). The lower limit of the haze value is not particularly limited, and it is suitable to be about 1 or more (for example, about 5 or more), and for example, about 10 or more. In another aspect, the haze value may be about 20 or more, and may be more than 50 (for example, about 80 or more, and further about 90 or more). By setting the high haze value within the range in which the visibility of the adherend through the protective sheet is not impaired, the distinguishability of the protective sheet on the Low-E glass plate can be improved.

 <粘着剤組成物の調製方法>
 ここに開示される粘着剤組成物の調製方法は、特に限定されず、従来公知または慣用の粘着剤組成物調製方法を適宜採用することができる。特に限定されるものではないが、一態様に係る粘着剤組成物調製方法は、例えば、(a)電気伝導度が300μS/cm未満である;および(b)塩化物イオン量が35μg/mL未満である;のうち少なくとも一方を満足する水性液体を用いることが好ましい。この方法によると、腐食等を防止し得る粘着剤組成物を得ることができる。このような粘着剤組成物は、Low-Eガラス板の保護用途に特に好ましく用いられる。
<Method for preparing adhesive composition>
The method for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known or commonly used pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preparation method can be appropriately adopted. Although not particularly limited, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preparation method according to one embodiment has, for example, (a) an electric conductivity of less than 300 μS/cm; and (b) an amount of chloride ions less than 35 μg/mL. It is preferable to use an aqueous liquid satisfying at least one of the following. According to this method, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition that can prevent corrosion and the like can be obtained. Such an adhesive composition is particularly preferably used for protecting Low-E glass plate.

 (水性液体の用意)
 一態様に係る粘着剤組成物の調製方法は、上記水性液体を用意する工程を含み得る。上記(a)および/または(b)を満足する水性液体は、地表水、地下水(井戸水であり得る。)を含む原水や、水道水、公知の水処理を実施した処理水のなかから、所望の電気伝導度および/または塩化物イオン量を満足する水性液体を、必要に応じて分析するなどして選択することにより得ることができる。
(Preparation of aqueous liquid)
The method for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect may include a step of preparing the aqueous liquid. The aqueous liquid satisfying the above (a) and/or (b) is desired from surface water, raw water including ground water (which may be well water), tap water, and treated water obtained by performing known water treatment. It is possible to obtain an aqueous liquid satisfying the electric conductivity and/or the amount of chloride ions of (1) by selecting, for example, by analyzing as necessary.

 好ましい一態様では、上記水性液体は、原水等の水性液体(未処理水性液体)に、濾過、膜分離、イオン交換、蒸留、物理吸着、電気分解等の公知の処理を施すことにより得られる。なかでも、逆浸透膜、ナノ濾過膜、限外濾過膜、精密濾過膜等を用いた膜分離による処理がより好ましく、逆浸透膜が特に好ましい。水処理方法として、イオン交換を採用する場合は、陽イオン交換(陽イオン交換樹脂使用)、陰イオン交換(陰イオン交換樹脂使用)、それらの混合系のいずれも使用可能であるが、腐食等の主因と考えられるアニオン(典型的には塩化物イオン)を除去する観点から、イオン交換水を使用する場合、陰イオン交換を採用することが好ましい。この態様において、上記処理工程に用いられる未処理水性液体は、電気伝導度が300μS/cm以上であり、且つ塩化物イオン量が35μg/mL以上である。処理装置としては、特に制限されず、公知または慣用の処理装置を用いることができる。処理条件についても、未処理水や装置、要求水質に応じて適切に設定すればよく、特定の条件に限定されない。 In a preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned aqueous liquid is obtained by subjecting an aqueous liquid such as raw water (untreated aqueous liquid) to known treatment such as filtration, membrane separation, ion exchange, distillation, physical adsorption, electrolysis and the like. Among them, the treatment by membrane separation using a reverse osmosis membrane, a nanofiltration membrane, an ultrafiltration membrane, a microfiltration membrane or the like is more preferable, and a reverse osmosis membrane is particularly preferable. When ion exchange is adopted as the water treatment method, cation exchange (using cation exchange resin), anion exchange (using anion exchange resin), or a mixed system thereof can be used, but corrosion, etc. From the viewpoint of removing anions (typically chloride ions) which are considered to be the main cause of the above, when ion-exchanged water is used, it is preferable to employ anion exchange. In this aspect, the untreated aqueous liquid used in the treatment step has an electric conductivity of 300 μS/cm or more and a chloride ion amount of 35 μg/mL or more. The processing device is not particularly limited, and a known or common processing device can be used. The treatment condition is not limited to a specific condition as long as it is appropriately set depending on the untreated water, the device, and the required water quality.

 (粘着剤組成物の調製)
 次いで、上記のようにして用意された水性液体を用いて、粘着成分としてのポリマー(ベースポリマーであり得る。)を含むポリマー含有液を得る。すなわち、ここに開示される方法は、上記水性液体と上記ポリマーとを含むポリマー含有液を得る工程を含み得る。水性液体の使用形態は、粘着剤組成物の調製に用いられるかぎり特に制限されず、使用のタイミングも特に制限されない。なお、上記水性液体は粘着剤組成物の調製用水ともいう。調製用水の使用形態としては、上記ポリマーの重合における重合用水、重合後に添加されるポスト重合用水(後添加水)としての使用が挙げられる。得られるポリマー含有液は、そのまま粘着剤組成物として用いてもよく、ポリマー含有液にさらに添加成分を混合したものを粘着剤組成物として用いてもよい。上記水性液体を用いて得られる粘着剤組成物は、上記ポリマーの少なくとも一部(典型的には全部)が上記水性液体に分散した水分散型粘着剤組成物の形態であり得る。粘着剤組成物に用いられるポリマー(典型的にはベースポリマー)の詳細や、粘着剤組成物の詳細、粘着剤組成物の調製に関わるその他の事項については前述のとおりであるので、重複する説明は省略する。
(Preparation of adhesive composition)
Then, using the aqueous liquid prepared as described above, a polymer-containing liquid containing a polymer (which may be a base polymer) as an adhesive component is obtained. That is, the method disclosed herein may include a step of obtaining a polymer-containing liquid containing the aqueous liquid and the polymer. The usage form of the aqueous liquid is not particularly limited as long as it is used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, and the timing of use is also not particularly limited. The above aqueous liquid is also referred to as water for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Examples of the form of use of the water for preparation include use as water for polymerization in polymerization of the above-mentioned polymer and water for post-polymerization added after polymerization (post-added water). The resulting polymer-containing liquid may be used as it is as a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, or a mixture of the polymer-containing liquid and additional components may be used as a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. The PSA composition obtained by using the aqueous liquid may be in the form of a water-dispersed PSA composition in which at least a part (typically all) of the polymer is dispersed in the aqueous liquid. The details of the polymer (typically a base polymer) used in the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, the details of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, and other matters relating to the preparation of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition are as described above, and therefore, duplicate description will be given. Is omitted.

 好ましい一態様では、上記水性液体は、エマルション重合における重合用水として用いられる。すなわち、ここに開示される粘着剤組成物調製方法は、上記水性液体の存在下でエマルション重合を実施してポリマーを得る工程を含み得る。エマルション重合によって得られるポリマーの詳細については前述のとおりであるので、重複する説明は省略する。 In a preferred embodiment, the above aqueous liquid is used as water for polymerization in emulsion polymerization. That is, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition preparation method disclosed herein may include a step of performing emulsion polymerization in the presence of the aqueous liquid to obtain a polymer. The details of the polymer obtained by the emulsion polymerization are as described above, and thus the duplicate description is omitted.

 (水性液体の特性)
 一態様において、粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体の電気伝導度は特に限定されない。水性液体中の塩化物イオンが所定量未満に制限されていることが好ましく、その場合、水性液体の電気伝導度が300μS/cm未満でなくてもよい。一方、電気伝導度は水性液体中のイオン量と相関するので、腐食等の原因となるイオン量制限の観点から、他の一態様における水性液体の電気伝導度は、好ましくは300μS/cm未満、より好ましくは200μS/cm未満、さらに好ましくは100μS/cm未満、特に好ましくは50μS/cm未満(例えば30μS/cm未満、さらには15μS/cm未満)である。このような水性液体は、腐食等の主因と考えられる塩化物イオン量を定量することなく、腐食等防止性を有するものとして用いることができる。
(Characteristics of aqueous liquid)
In one aspect, the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is not particularly limited. The chloride ions in the aqueous liquid are preferably limited to less than a predetermined amount, in which case the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid need not be less than 300 μS/cm. On the other hand, since the electrical conductivity correlates with the amount of ions in the aqueous liquid, the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid in another aspect is preferably less than 300 μS/cm from the viewpoint of limiting the amount of ions causing corrosion and the like. It is more preferably less than 200 μS/cm, further preferably less than 100 μS/cm, particularly preferably less than 50 μS/cm (eg less than 30 μS/cm, even less than 15 μS/cm). Such an aqueous liquid can be used as one having a corrosion preventing property without quantifying the amount of chloride ions which is considered to be a main cause of corrosion.

 使用する水性液体の電気伝導度の下限は、理論的下限値(室温で0.05μS/cm付近)であり得るが、生産効率や実用上の許容レベル等を考慮して、凡そ1μS/cm以上であってもよく、凡そ5μS/cm以上であってもよく、凡そ10μS/cm以上であってもよく、凡そ50μS/cm以上(例えば凡そ100μS/cm以上、さらには凡そ200μS/cm以上)であってもよい。 The lower limit of the electrical conductivity of the aqueous liquid used may be a theoretical lower limit value (around 0.05 μS/cm at room temperature), but considering the production efficiency and the practically acceptable level, it is about 1 μS/cm or more. May be about 5 μS/cm or more, about 10 μS/cm or more, about 50 μS/cm or more (for example, about 100 μS/cm or more, and further about 200 μS/cm or more). It may be.

 水性液体の電気伝導度は、市販の電気伝導計を用いて室温(23℃)にて測定される。具体的には、堀場製作所社製のポータブル電気伝導率計「ES-71」またはその相当品を用いて測定することができる。 The electric conductivity of the aqueous liquid is measured at room temperature (23°C) using a commercially available electric conductivity meter. Specifically, it can be measured using a portable electric conductivity meter “ES-71” manufactured by Horiba Ltd. or its equivalent.

 一態様において、粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体は、塩化物イオン量が制限されていることが好ましい。具体的には、水性液体の電気伝導度が300μS/cm以上の場合には、その塩化物イオン量は35μg/mL未満であることが好ましい。これによって、腐食等防止効果を実現することができる。なお、特に限定するものではないが、水性液体における塩化物イオン量は、その電気伝導度が300μS/cm未満の場合にも35μg/mL未満であることが好ましい。その場合、ここに開示される粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体は、その電気伝導度にかかわらず35μg/mL未満の塩化物イオンを含む。 In one aspect, it is preferable that the amount of chloride ions in the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is limited. Specifically, when the electric conductivity of the aqueous liquid is 300 μS/cm or more, the chloride ion amount thereof is preferably less than 35 μg/mL. As a result, a corrosion prevention effect can be realized. Although not particularly limited, the chloride ion amount in the aqueous liquid is preferably less than 35 μg/mL even when the electric conductivity thereof is less than 300 μS/cm. In that case, the aqueous liquid used in the preparation of the PSA composition disclosed herein contains less than 35 μg/mL of chloride ion, regardless of its electrical conductivity.

 一態様において、水性液体の塩化物イオン量は35μg/mL未満(例えば30μg/mL未満)であることが適当であり、好ましくは25μg/mL未満、より好ましくは20μg/mL未満、さらに好ましくは15μg/mL未満、特に好ましくは10μg/mL未満、最も好ましくは5μg/mL未満であり、3μg/mL未満(例えば1μg/mL未満)であってもよい。上記水性液体の塩化物イオン量の下限値は、理想的には0μg/mLであるが、生産効率や実用上の許容レベル等を考慮し、凡そ1μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ3μg/mL以上であってもよい。 In one aspect, the chloride content of the aqueous liquid is suitably less than 35 μg/mL (eg less than 30 μg/mL), preferably less than 25 μg/mL, more preferably less than 20 μg/mL, even more preferably 15 μg. /ML, particularly preferably less than 10 μg/mL, most preferably less than 5 μg/mL, and may be less than 3 μg/mL (eg less than 1 μg/mL). The lower limit of the amount of chloride ions in the above aqueous liquid is ideally 0 μg/mL, but in consideration of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be approximately 1 μg/mL or more, approximately 3 μg. /ML or more.

 好ましい一態様では、上記水性液体は、電気伝導度C[μS/cm]に対する塩化物イオン量ACl[μg/mL]の比(ACl/C)が凡そ1/5以下である。上記比(ACl/C)が所定値以下であることは、全イオンのなかで塩化物イオン量が相対的に低いことを意味する。上記比(ACl/C)を凡そ1/5以下とすることにより、腐食等の防止と生産性との両立を好ましく実現することができる。上記比(ACl/C)は、より好ましくは凡そ1/8以下であり、凡そ1/10以下であってもよく、凡そ1/15以下であってもよい。上記比(ACl/C)の下限値は特に制限されず、凡そ1/30以上(例えば凡そ1/20以上)であり得る。 In a preferred embodiment, the ratio (A Cl /C) of the chloride ion amount A Cl [μg/mL] to the electrical conductivity C [μS/cm] of the aqueous liquid is about ⅕ or less. When the ratio (A Cl /C) is not more than the predetermined value, it means that the chloride ion amount is relatively low among all the ions. By setting the above ratio (A Cl /C) to about 1/5 or less, it is possible to preferably realize both prevention of corrosion and the like and productivity. The above ratio (A Cl /C) is more preferably about ⅛ or less, may be about 1/10 or less, and may be about 1/15 or less. The lower limit value of the ratio (A Cl /C) is not particularly limited and may be about 1/30 or more (for example, about 1/20 or more).

 一態様に係る粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体は、腐食等防止の観点から硫酸イオン量が制限されていることが望ましい。水性液体における硫酸イオン量は、通常、凡そ50μg/mL以下であり、凡そ35μg/mL以下(例えば凡そ25μg/mL以下)とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ15μg/mL以下、より好ましくは凡そ5μg/mL以下、さらに好ましくは凡そ2μg/mL以下(例えば凡そ1μg/mL以下)である。上記水性液体の硫酸イオン量の下限値は、理想的には0μg/mLであるが、生産効率や実用上の許容レベル等を考慮して、凡そ10μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ20μg/mL以上であってもよい。 It is desirable that the amount of sulfate ion of the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect is limited from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion and the like. The amount of sulfate ion in the aqueous liquid is usually about 50 μg/mL or less, about 35 μg/mL or less (for example, about 25 μg/mL or less) is suitable, and preferably about 15 μg/mL or less, more preferably It is about 5 μg/mL or less, more preferably about 2 μg/mL or less (for example, about 1 μg/mL or less). The lower limit of the amount of sulfate ion of the aqueous liquid is ideally 0 μg/mL, but in consideration of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be about 10 μg/mL or more, about 20 μg. /ML or more.

 一態様に係る粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体は、腐食等防止の観点から硝酸イオン量が制限されていることが望ましい。水性液体における硝酸イオン量は、通常、凡そ30μg/mL以下であり、凡そ20μg/mL以下(例えば凡そ10μg/mL以下)とすることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ7μg/mL以下、より好ましくは凡そ5μg/mL以下、さらに好ましくは凡そ2μg/mL以下(例えば凡そ1μg/mL以下)である。上記水性液体の硝酸イオン量の下限値は、理想的には0μg/mLであるが、生産効率や実用上の許容レベル等を考慮して、凡そ1μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ3μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ5μg/mL以上(例えば10μg/mL以上)であってもよい。 It is desirable that the amount of nitrate ions in the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect is limited from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion and the like. The amount of nitrate ion in the aqueous liquid is usually about 30 μg/mL or less, about 20 μg/mL or less (for example, about 10 μg/mL or less) is suitable, and preferably about 7 μg/mL or less, more preferably It is about 5 μg/mL or less, more preferably about 2 μg/mL or less (for example, about 1 μg/mL or less). The lower limit of the amount of nitrate ions of the above aqueous liquid is ideally 0 μg/mL, but in consideration of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, etc., it may be about 1 μg/mL or more, about 3 μg. /ML or more, or about 5 μg/mL or more (for example, 10 μg/mL or more).

 一態様に係る粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体において、硝酸イオンと硫酸イオンと塩化物イオンの合計量は80μg/mL以下程度であることが適当である。これら腐食等の原因となり得る複数種のイオンの総量を制限することにより、腐食等をより確実に防止することができる。上記3種のイオンの合計量は、好ましくは50μg/mL未満、より好ましくは30μg/mL未満、さらに好ましくは15μg/mL未満であり、凡そ10μg/mL以下(例えば凡そ5μg/mL以下)であってもよい。上記水性液体における3種のイオンの合計量の下限値は、理想的には0μg/mLであるが、生産効率や実用上の許容レベル等の観点から、凡そ1μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ5μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ10μg/mL以上(例えば30μg/mL以上)であってもよい。 In the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition according to one aspect, it is appropriate that the total amount of nitrate ion, sulfate ion, and chloride ion is about 80 μg/mL or less. By limiting the total amount of these plural types of ions that may cause corrosion and the like, it is possible to prevent the corrosion and the like more reliably. The total amount of the three ions is preferably less than 50 μg/mL, more preferably less than 30 μg/mL, even more preferably less than 15 μg/mL, and approximately 10 μg/mL or less (for example, approximately 5 μg/mL or less). May be. The lower limit of the total amount of the three types of ions in the aqueous liquid is ideally 0 μg/mL, but may be approximately 1 μg/mL or more from the viewpoint of production efficiency, practically acceptable level, and the like. It may be about 5 μg/mL or more, or about 10 μg/mL or more (for example, 30 μg/mL or more).

 腐食等防止の観点から、ここに開示される技術においては、上記水性液体に含まれるイオンのうち、アニオン(典型的には塩化物イオン)量を制限することが好ましい。一方、水性液体中の陽イオン量は特に制限されない。一態様においては、水性液体中の陽イオン量は、電気伝導度300μS/cm未満となる範囲内であり得る。例えば、一般的な軟水化処理で除去されるカルシウムイオンやマグネシウムイオンの量は特に限定されず、粘着剤組成物の調製に使用される水性液体中のカルシウムイオンやマグネシウムイオンの量は1μg/mL以上であってもよく、凡そ10μg/mL以上であってもよく、20μg/mL以上であってもよい。 From the viewpoint of prevention of corrosion and the like, in the technique disclosed herein, it is preferable to limit the amount of anions (typically chloride ions) among the ions contained in the aqueous liquid. On the other hand, the amount of cations in the aqueous liquid is not particularly limited. In one aspect, the amount of cations in the aqueous liquid can be in the range of having an electrical conductivity of less than 300 μS/cm. For example, the amount of calcium ions and magnesium ions removed by general water softening treatment is not particularly limited, and the amount of calcium ions and magnesium ions in the aqueous liquid used for preparing the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is 1 μg/mL. Or more, about 10 μg/mL or more, or 20 μg/mL or more.

 水性液体の塩化物イオン量、硫酸イオン量、硝酸イオン量、カルシウムイオン量、マグネシウムイオン量は、市販の各イオン標準液(例えば和光純薬工業社より入手可能)を用いたイオンクロマトグラフ法により測定することができる。具体的には、以下の方法で測定される。 The amount of chloride ion, amount of sulfate ion, amount of nitrate ion, amount of calcium ion, and amount of magnesium ion of the aqueous liquid can be determined by ion chromatography using each commercially available ion standard solution (for example, available from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.). Can be measured. Specifically, it is measured by the following method.

 [水性液体のイオン量測定]
 イオンクロマトグラフィ測定条件は下記のとおりである。
 (測定条件)
 アニオン分析:
  装置:Thermo Fisher Scientific社製の「ICS-3000」
  分離カラム:Dionex IonPac AS18-fast(4mm×250mm)
  ガードカラム:Dionex IonPac AG18-fast(4mm×50mm)
  除去システム:Dionex AERS-500(エクスターナルモード)
  検出器:電気伝導度検出器
  溶離液:KOH水溶液(溶離液ジェネレーターカートリッジ使用)
  溶離液流量:1.0mL/min
  試料注入量:250μL
 カチオン分析:
  装置:Thermo Fisher Scientific社製の「DX-320」
  分離カラム:Dionex Ion Pac CS16(5mm×250mm)
  ガードカラム:Dionex Ion Pac CG16(5mm×50mm)
  除去システム:Dionex CSRS-500(リサイクルモード)
  検出器:電気伝導度検出器
  溶離液:メタンスルホン酸水溶液
  溶離液流量:1.0mL/min
  試料注入量:25μL
[Measurement of ion content of aqueous liquid]
Ion chromatography measurement conditions are as follows.
(Measurement condition)
Anion analysis:
Device: "ICS-3000" made by Thermo Fisher Scientific
Separation column: Dionex IonPac AS18-fast (4mm x 250mm)
Guard column: Dionex IonPac AG18-fast (4mm x 50mm)
Removal system: Dionex AERS-500 (external mode)
Detector: Electric conductivity detector Eluent: KOH aqueous solution (using eluent generator cartridge)
Eluent flow rate: 1.0 mL/min
Sample injection volume: 250 μL
Cation analysis:
Equipment: "DX-320" made by Thermo Fisher Scientific
Separation column: Dionex Ion Pac CS16 (5mm x 250mm)
Guard column: Dionex Ion Pac CG16 (5mm x 50mm)
Removal system: Dionex CSRS-500 (recycle mode)
Detector: Electric conductivity detector Eluent: Methanesulfonic acid aqueous solution Eluent flow rate: 1.0 mL/min
Sample injection volume: 25 μL

 なお、ここに開示される水性液体とは水(HO)を主成分とする液体をいい、水よりも少ない割合でアルコール等の有機溶剤を含んでもよい。典型的には、水性液体として水の割合が50体積%を超える液体が用いられる。水性液体における水の割合は、通常、凡そ90体積%以上であり、凡そ99体積%以上(例えば99.9体積%以上)が適当である。 The aqueous liquid disclosed herein is a liquid containing water (H 2 O) as a main component, and may contain an organic solvent such as alcohol in a ratio smaller than that of water. Typically, a liquid having a water content of more than 50% by volume is used as the aqueous liquid. The proportion of water in the aqueous liquid is usually about 90% by volume or more, and about 99% by volume or more (for example, 99.9% by volume or more) is suitable.

 <保護シートの特性>
 特に限定されるものではないが、ここに開示される保護シートは、熱水抽出により測定される塩化物イオン量が保護シート1g当たり8.9μg未満(例えば凡そ8.5μg以下)であることが適当である。これにより、保護対象であるLow-Eガラス板における腐食等を長期にわたって防止する構成が得られやすく、保護シートは長期信頼性に優れたものとなりやすい。保護シート1g当たりの塩化物イオン量は、好ましくは8.0μg未満、より好ましくは7.0μg未満、さらに好ましくは6.5μg未満、特に好ましくは6.0μg未満(例えば5.5μg未満)である。保護シート1g当たりの塩化物イオン量の下限値は、理想的には0μgであるが、生産効率や実用上の許容レベル等の観点から、凡そ1μg以上であってもよく、凡そ3μg以上であってもよく、凡そ5μg以上であってもよい。保護シート1g当たりの塩化物イオン量は、下記の方法により測定される。
<Characteristics of protective sheet>
Although not particularly limited, in the protective sheet disclosed herein, the amount of chloride ions measured by hot water extraction is less than 8.9 μg per 1 g of the protective sheet (for example, about 8.5 μg or less). Appropriate. As a result, it is easy to obtain a structure that prevents corrosion or the like in the Low-E glass plate that is the object of protection for a long period of time, and the protective sheet tends to have excellent long-term reliability. The amount of chloride ions per 1 g of the protective sheet is preferably less than 8.0 μg, more preferably less than 7.0 μg, still more preferably less than 6.5 μg, particularly preferably less than 6.0 μg (eg less than 5.5 μg). .. The lower limit of the amount of chloride ions per 1 g of the protective sheet is ideally 0 μg, but from the viewpoint of production efficiency and practically acceptable level, it may be approximately 1 μg or more, or approximately 3 μg or more. Or about 5 μg or more. The chloride ion amount per 1 g of the protective sheet is measured by the following method.

 [保護シートの塩化物イオン量]
 測定対象である保護シートを純水でよく洗って、シート面積50cmサイズに切り出し、ポリプロピレン(PP)製容器に入れて秤量する。純水25mLをPP製容器に添加し、乾燥器を用いて120℃で1時間の加温抽出を行う。得られた抽出液について、後述のイオンクロマトグラフ法と同じ方法で、塩化物イオン標準液を用いて抽出液中の塩化物イオン量を定量し、抽出に用いた保護シート1g当たりの塩化物イオン量を求める。
[Chloride ion content of protective sheet]
The protective sheet to be measured is thoroughly washed with pure water, cut into a sheet area of 50 cm 2 in size, put in a polypropylene (PP) container, and weighed. 25 mL of pure water is added to a PP container, and extraction with heating is performed at 120° C. for 1 hour using a dryer. For the obtained extract, the amount of chloride ions in the extract was quantified using a chloride ion standard solution by the same method as the ion chromatography method described later, and chloride ion per 1 g of the protective sheet used for extraction Find the amount.

 ここに開示される保護シートは、Low-Eガラス板に貼り付けて30分後に0.3m/分の引張速度、180度の剥離角度で測定される初期剥離強度が凡そ0.01N/20mm以上であることが適当である。上記の初期剥離強度を示す保護シートは、被着体に貼り付けられた後、比較的短時間のうちに被着体に良好に接着し、被着体からの浮き剥がれ等が生じにくく、良好な保護性能を発揮し得る。一態様において、初期剥離強度は凡そ0.05N/20mm以上(例えば凡そ0.1N/20mm以上)であり得る。好ましい一態様において、初期剥離強度は凡そ0.5N/20mm以上(例えば凡そ1N/20mm以上)であり得る。初期剥離強度の上限は特に制限されないが、軽剥離性の観点から、凡そ5N/20mm以下が適当であり、凡そ2.5N/20mm以下(例えば凡そ2N/20mm以下)が好ましい。初期剥離強度は、下記の方法により測定される。 The protective sheet disclosed herein has an initial peel strength of about 0.01 N/20 mm or more, which is measured at a peeling speed of 0.3 m/min and a peeling angle of 180 degrees, 30 minutes after being attached to a Low-E glass plate. Is suitable. The protective sheet having the above initial peel strength, after being adhered to the adherend, adheres well to the adherend within a relatively short time, and is unlikely to be peeled off from the adherend, It can exhibit excellent protection performance. In one aspect, the initial peel strength can be about 0.05 N/20 mm or greater (eg, about 0.1 N/20 mm or greater). In a preferred aspect, the initial peel strength can be about 0.5 N/20 mm or greater (eg, about 1 N/20 mm or greater). The upper limit of the initial peeling strength is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of light peeling property, about 5 N/20 mm or less is suitable, and about 2.5 N/20 mm or less (for example, about 2 N/20 mm or less) is preferable. The initial peel strength is measured by the following method.

 [初期剥離強度]
 測定対象である保護シートを幅20mm、長さ100mmの短冊状にカットして試験片を作製する。23℃、50%RHの標準環境下にて、この試験片を、被着体としてのLow-Eガラス板に、2kgのゴムローラを2往復させて圧着する。このサンプルを上記標準環境下に30分間保持した後、該標準環境下にて、万能引張試験機を用いて、引張速度0.3m/分、剥離角度180度の条件で、初期剥離強度[N/20mm]を測定する。Low-Eガラス板としては、日本板硝子社製の品番「RSFL6AS」(100mm×100mm)を用いる。なお、被着体としては、Low-Eガラス板であれば特に制限なく使用することができ、上記製品の相当品や他の市販のLow-Eガラス板を用いてもよい。
[Initial peel strength]
A protective sheet to be measured is cut into a strip having a width of 20 mm and a length of 100 mm to prepare a test piece. Under a standard environment of 23° C. and 50% RH, this test piece is pressure-bonded to a Low-E glass plate as an adherend by reciprocating a 2 kg rubber roller twice. After holding this sample in the standard environment for 30 minutes, under the standard environment, using a universal tensile tester, under conditions of a tensile speed of 0.3 m/min and a peel angle of 180 degrees, the initial peel strength [N /20 mm] is measured. As the Low-E glass plate, product number “RSFL6AS” (100 mm×100 mm) manufactured by Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd. is used. As the adherend, any low-E glass plate can be used without particular limitation, and equivalent products of the above products or other commercially available low-E glass plates may be used.

 ここに開示される保護シートは、Low-Eガラス板に貼り付けて50℃で7日間保存した後に0.3m/分の引張速度、180度の剥離角度で測定される経時剥離強度が凡そ5N/20mm以下であることが好ましい。この特性を満足する保護シートは、被着体への貼付け期間が比較的長くても、経時粘着力が十分に抑制されており、該被着体からの軽剥離性を維持し得る。したがって、被着体からの除去作業性に優れる。経時剥離強度が凡そ4N/20mm以下(より好ましくは凡そ2N/20mm以下)である保護シートによると、より良好な剥離作業性が実現され得る。また、被着体の保護期間中(例えば、保護シートが貼り付けられた被着体の加工時)における浮き剥がれを抑制する観点から、経時剥離強度は、凡そ0.05N/20mm以上であることが適当であり、好ましくは凡そ0.1N/20mm以上、より好ましくは凡そ0.3N/20mm以上である。経時剥離強度は凡そ1N/20mm以上であってもよい。経時剥離強度は、下記の方法により測定される。 The protective sheet disclosed herein has a peel strength of about 5 N measured with a pulling speed of 0.3 m/min and a peel angle of 180 degrees after being attached to a Low-E glass plate and stored at 50°C for 7 days. It is preferably /20 mm or less. A protective sheet satisfying these characteristics has sufficiently suppressed adhesive strength over time even if it is adhered to an adherend for a relatively long period of time, and can maintain its light releasability from the adherend. Therefore, the workability of removing from the adherend is excellent. With a protective sheet having a peel strength of about 4 N/20 mm or less (more preferably about 2 N/20 mm or less), better peeling workability can be realized. Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing floating and peeling during the protection period of the adherend (for example, during processing of the adherend to which the protective sheet is attached), the temporal peel strength is about 0.05 N/20 mm or more. Is suitable, preferably about 0.1 N/20 mm or more, more preferably about 0.3 N/20 mm or more. The time-dependent peel strength may be about 1 N/20 mm or more. The peel strength with time is measured by the following method.

 [経時剥離強度]
 測定対象である保護シートを幅20mm、長さ100mmの短冊状にカットして試験片を作製する。23℃、50%RHの標準環境下にて、この試験片を、被着体としてのLow-Eガラス板に、2kgのゴムローラを2往復させて圧着する。このサンプルを50℃の環境下に7日間保存し、次いで23℃、50%RHの標準環境下に1時間保持した後、該標準環境にて、万能引張試験機を用いて、引張速度0.3m/分、剥離角度180度の条件で、経時剥離強度[N/20mm]を測定する。被着体として用いるLow-Eガラス板は、上記初期剥離強度測定の場合と同様である。
[Peel strength over time]
A protective sheet to be measured is cut into a strip having a width of 20 mm and a length of 100 mm to prepare a test piece. Under a standard environment of 23° C. and 50% RH, this test piece is pressure-bonded to a Low-E glass plate as an adherend by reciprocating a 2 kg rubber roller twice. This sample was stored in an environment of 50° C. for 7 days, and then kept in a standard environment of 23° C. and 50% RH for 1 hour, and then, in the standard environment, a tensile rate of 0. The peel strength with time [N/20 mm] is measured under the conditions of 3 m/min and a peel angle of 180 degrees. The Low-E glass plate used as the adherend is the same as in the case of the above initial peel strength measurement.

 特に限定するものではないが、ここに開示される保護シートは、初期剥離強度P[N/20mm]に対する経時剥離強度P[N/20mm]の比(すなわちP/P比)が5倍以下であり得る。P/P比が小さいことは、剥離強度の経時上昇が少ないことを意味する。このことによって初期接着性と剥離作業時の軽剥離性とが好適に両立される。かかる観点から、P/P比は、好ましくは4以下、より好ましくは3以下、さらに好ましくは2以下、例えば1.8以下であってもよく、1.5以下、さらには1.3以下であってもよい。また、P/P比は、典型的には0.8以上であり、例えば1以上であり得る。 Although not particularly limited, the protective sheet disclosed herein has a ratio (that is, P 2 /P 1 ratio) of the temporal peel strength P 2 [N/20 mm] to the initial peel strength P 1 [N/20 mm]. It can be 5 times or less. A small P 2 /P 1 ratio means that the peel strength does not increase with time. As a result, the initial adhesiveness and the light releasability during the peeling work are suitably compatible with each other. From this viewpoint, the P 2 /P 1 ratio may be preferably 4 or less, more preferably 3 or less, still more preferably 2 or less, for example 1.8 or less, and 1.5 or less, further 1.3. It may be the following. Further, P 2 / P 1 ratio may typically be in is 0.8 or more, such as one or more.

 ここに開示される保護シートは、環境衛生の観点から、該保護シートを80℃で30分間加熱したときの該保護シート(基材層および粘着剤層は含み得る。ただし、剥離ライナーは含まない。)1gから放散される揮発性有機化合物(VOC:volatile organic compounds)の総量(以下、単にVOC放散量ともいう。)が1000μg(以下、これを「μg/g」と表記することがある。)以下であることが好ましい。上記VOC放散量は500μg/g以下(例えば300μg/g以下、典型的には100μg/g以下)であることがより好ましい。VOC放散量は、以下の方法で測定される。 From the viewpoint of environmental hygiene, the protective sheet disclosed herein includes the protective sheet (the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be included when the protective sheet is heated at 80° C. for 30 minutes, but the release liner is not included. The total amount of volatile organic compounds (VOC: volatile organic compounds) emitted from 1 g (hereinafter, also simply referred to as VOC emission amount) is 1000 μg (hereinafter, this may be referred to as “μg/g”). ) The following is preferable. The VOC emission amount is more preferably 500 μg/g or less (for example, 300 μg/g or less, typically 100 μg/g or less). The VOC emission amount is measured by the following method.

 [VOC測定試験]
 保護シートを所定のサイズ(ここでは面積約5cmのサイズ)にカットし、剥離ライナーを剥がしたものを試料片とし、該試料片を20mLのバイアル瓶に入れて密栓する。次いで、上記バイアル瓶を80℃で30分間加熱し、加熱状態のガス1.0mL(サンプルガス)をヘッドスペースオートサンプラー(HSS)を用いてガスクロマトグラフ(GC)測定装置に注入する。得られたガスクロマトグラムに基づいて、上記試料片から発生したガス量をn-デカン換算量として求める。得られた値から、保護シート(剥離ライナーを除く)1g当たりのVOC放散量(μg/g)を求める。なお、このn-デカン換算量は、GC Massにより得られる発生ガスの検出強度をn-デカンの検出強度とみなして、あらかじめ作成したn-デカンの検量線を適用することにより求める。HSSおよびGCの設定は以下のとおりである。
HSS:Agilent Technologies社製 型式「7694」
  加熱時間:30分間
  加圧時間:0.12分
  ループ充填時間:0.12分
  ループ平衡時間:0.05分
  注入時間:3分
  サンプルループ温度:160℃
  トランスファーライン温度:200℃
GC装置:Agilent Technologies社製 型式「6890」
  カラム:ジーエルサイエンス社製 J&W キャピラリーカラム 商品名「DB-ffAP」(内径0.533mm×長さ30m、膜厚1.0μm)
  カラム温度:250℃(40℃から90℃まで10℃/分で昇温し、引き続き250℃まで20℃/分で昇温して5分保持)
  カラム圧力:24.3kPa(定流モード)
  キャリアーガス:ヘリウム(5.0mL/分)
  注入口:スプリット(スプリット比 12:1)
  注入口温度:250℃
  検出器:FID
  検出器温度:250℃
[VOC measurement test]
A protective sheet is cut into a predetermined size (here, a size of about 5 cm 2 ) and the release liner is peeled off to form a sample piece. Then, the vial is heated at 80° C. for 30 minutes, and 1.0 mL of heated gas (sample gas) is injected into a gas chromatograph (GC) measuring device using a headspace autosampler (HSS). Based on the obtained gas chromatogram, the amount of gas generated from the above-mentioned sample piece is obtained as an n-decane conversion amount. From the obtained value, the amount of VOC emission (μg/g) per 1 g of the protective sheet (excluding the release liner) is determined. The n-decane conversion amount is determined by applying the calibration curve of n-decane prepared in advance, by regarding the detected intensity of the generated gas obtained by GC Mass as the detected intensity of n-decane. The settings of HSS and GC are as follows.
HSS: Model "7694" manufactured by Agilent Technologies
Heating time: 30 minutes Pressurization time: 0.12 minutes Loop filling time: 0.12 minutes Loop equilibration time: 0.05 minutes Injection time: 3 minutes Sample loop temperature: 160°C
Transfer line temperature: 200℃
GC device: Model "6890" manufactured by Agilent Technologies
Column: GL Sciences, Inc. J&W Capillary Column Product name “DB-ffAP” (inner diameter 0.533 mm×length 30 m, film thickness 1.0 μm)
Column temperature: 250° C. (heated from 40° C. to 90° C. at 10° C./min, then heated to 250° C. at 20° C./min and held for 5 minutes)
Column pressure: 24.3 kPa (constant flow mode)
Carrier gas: Helium (5.0 mL/min)
Inlet: Split (split ratio 12:1)
Inlet temperature: 250℃
Detector: FID
Detector temperature: 250℃

 <用途>
 ここに開示される保護シートは、窓ガラス等の建築材料として用いられるガラス板用表面保護シートに好適である。貼り付け対象となるガラス板は、典型的には、ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたコーティング層とを備え、該コーティング層は金属層を含むものであり得る。より具体的には、上記ガラス板は、一方の表面にLow-E層を有するガラス板であり得る。Low-E層は、通常、銀等の金属層を含む。上記ガラス板の製造では、Low-Eガラス板を含む2枚のガラス板を、Low-E層側表面を内側に向けてペアガラスとするまで、Low-E層形成面は露出した状態となり得る。そのLow-E層形成面を損傷、摩耗、劣化、腐食等から防ぐ目的で、ここに開示される保護シートは好ましく用いられる。すなわち、保護シートは、Low-E層形成面保護シートとして用いられ得る。Low-Eガラス板は、従来のガラス板に比べて高い遮熱性、断熱性を有し、室内空間の冷暖房効率を改善し得ることから、窓ガラス等の建築材料として広く用いられている。ここに開示される技術は、そのような材料の製造に用いられることにより、省エネルギー化、温室効果ガス排出低減に間接的に貢献し得る。
<Use>
The protective sheet disclosed herein is suitable for a surface protective sheet for a glass plate used as a building material such as a window glass. The glass plate to be attached typically includes a glass substrate and a coating layer laminated on the glass substrate, and the coating layer may include a metal layer. More specifically, the glass plate may be a glass plate having a Low-E layer on one surface. The Low-E layer usually includes a metal layer such as silver. In the production of the above glass plate, the low-E layer forming surface can be exposed until two glass plates including the Low-E glass plate are paired with the Low-E layer side surface facing inward. .. The protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably used for the purpose of preventing the surface on which the Low-E layer is formed from damage, abrasion, deterioration, corrosion and the like. That is, the protective sheet can be used as a low-E layer forming surface protective sheet. Low-E glass sheets have higher heat shielding properties and heat insulating properties than conventional glass sheets, and can improve the cooling and heating efficiency of indoor spaces, and are therefore widely used as building materials such as window glass. The technology disclosed herein can indirectly contribute to energy saving and reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by being used for manufacturing such a material.

 また、ここに開示される保護シートは、除去作業性の点から剥離強度が制限されがちな大面積の被着体表面に対して好ましく用いられる。ここに開示される保護シートは、凡そ1.5m以上、例えば凡そ2m以上(典型的には凡そ3m以上、さらには凡そ3.3m以上)の幅を有する被着体表面全体を覆う態様で好ましく用いられる。かかる被着体表面の長さは上記幅と同等以上である。好ましい一態様では、上記のような大面積の平板(好適には、平滑表面を有する平板)の一方の表面全体を覆う態様で好ましく用いられる。特に、窓ガラス等の建材用ガラス板は、生産、運搬等の効率面から大面積化が進んでいる。そのような大面積を有する(例えば、表面幅が2.6mを超える、典型的には表面幅が凡そ3m以上、さらには凡そ3.3m以上である)ガラス板の表面全体(典型的にはLow-Eガラス板のLow-E層形成面全体)を覆う態様で好ましく用いられる。ここに開示される保護シートは、Low-Eガラス板表面で視認しやすいので、Low-Eガラス板に対して保護シートの有無の判別がしやすく、保護シートの除去作業性に優れる。また、保護シートで上記ガラス板を保護した状態で、保護シート越しにガラス板の欠陥検査を行うことができる。さらに、ここに開示される技術の好ましい一態様によると、上記のような大面積の被着体に対して、軽剥離性を保持しつつ、優れた腐食等防止性を実現することができる。 Further, the protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably used for a large-area adherend surface whose peel strength tends to be limited in terms of workability for removal. The protective sheet disclosed herein is preferably in a mode of covering the entire surface of the adherend having a width of about 1.5 m or more, for example, about 2 m or more (typically about 3 m or more, further about 3.3 m or more). Used. The length of the adherend surface is equal to or larger than the width. In a preferred embodiment, the flat plate having a large area (preferably, a flat plate having a smooth surface) as described above is preferably used in a mode of covering one entire surface. In particular, glass plates for building materials such as window glass are becoming larger in area in terms of efficiency of production, transportation and the like. The entire surface of a glass sheet having such a large area (for example, a surface width of more than 2.6 m, typically a surface width of about 3 m or more, and even about 3.3 m or more) (typically The low-E glass plate is preferably used in such a manner as to cover the entire surface on which the Low-E layer is formed). Since the protective sheet disclosed herein is easily visible on the surface of the Low-E glass plate, it is easy to determine the presence or absence of the protective sheet on the Low-E glass plate, and the workability of removing the protective sheet is excellent. In addition, the glass sheet can be inspected for defects through the protective sheet while the glass sheet is protected by the protective sheet. Furthermore, according to a preferred aspect of the technology disclosed herein, excellent corrosion resistance and the like can be realized for the adherend having a large area as described above while maintaining light peelability.

 さらに、いくつかの態様に係る保護シートは、経時粘着力が抑制されたものであり得るので、例えば、被着体への貼付け期間(被着体の保護期間でもあり得る。)が比較的長く(典型的には2週間以上、例えば4週間以上に)なっても良好な除去作業性を発揮し得る。したがって、例えば、被着体(具体的にはLow-Eガラス板)への貼付けから該被着体からの除去までの期間が2週間以上(例えば4週間以上)となり得る使用態様でも好適に利用され得る。 Furthermore, since the protective sheet according to some aspects may have a suppressed adhesive force over time, for example, the period of application to the adherend (which may be the period of protection of the adherend) is relatively long. Good removal workability can be exhibited even (typically for 2 weeks or longer, for example, for 4 weeks or longer). Therefore, for example, it can be suitably used even in a usage mode in which the period from attachment to an adherend (specifically, Low-E glass plate) to removal from the adherend can be 2 weeks or more (eg, 4 weeks or more). Can be done.

 この明細書により開示される事項には以下のものが含まれる。
 (1) ガラスユニットの製造方法であって、
 ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板を用意する工程(A)と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板の前記Low-E層表面に保護シートを貼り付ける工程(B)と;
 前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを実施する任意の工程(C)と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板から前記保護シートを除去する工程(D)と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板を用いてガラスユニットを組み立てる工程(E)と;
を含み、
 ここで、前記保護シートは、1.5m以上の幅を有し、
 (a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、方法。
 (2) 前記工程(B)と工程(D)との間に前記Low-Eガラス板の検査工程を含む、上記(1)に記載の方法。
 (3) 前記Low-Eガラス板は2m以上の幅を有する、上記(1)または(2)に記載の方法。
 (4) 前記Low-Eガラス板は2.6m超の幅を有する、上記(1)または(2)に記載の方法。
 (5) 前記Low-Eガラス板は3.3m以上の幅を有する、上記(1)または(2)に記載の方法。
 (6) 前記Low-E層は金属層を含む、上記(1)~(5)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (7) 前記Low-E層は銀層を含む、上記(1)~(5)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (8) 前記Low-E層の厚さは1000nm以下である、上記(1)~(7)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (9) 前記工程(B)は、少なくとも1枚の前記保護シートで前記Low-Eガラス板の一方の表面全体を覆う工程を含む、上記(1)~(8)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (10) 前記工程(C)は必須の工程であり、該工程(C)において、前記Low-Eガラス板に対して水を用いた洗浄を実施する、上記(1)~(9)のいずれかに記載の方法。
The matters disclosed by this specification include the following.
(1) A method of manufacturing a glass unit,
A step (A) of preparing a Low-E glass plate including a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate;
Attaching a protective sheet to the surface of the Low-E layer of the Low-E glass plate (B);
An optional step (C) of carrying out at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling on the Low-E glass plate having the protective sheet attached thereto;
A step (D) of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate;
A step (E) of assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate;
Including,
Here, the protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more,
A method in which at least a part of the sheet surface has at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more.
(2) The method according to (1) above, which includes an inspection step of the Low-E glass plate between the step (B) and the step (D).
(3) The method according to (1) or (2) above, wherein the Low-E glass plate has a width of 2 m or more.
(4) The method according to (1) or (2) above, wherein the Low-E glass plate has a width of more than 2.6 m.
(5) The method according to (1) or (2) above, wherein the Low-E glass plate has a width of 3.3 m or more.
(6) The method according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein the Low-E layer includes a metal layer.
(7) The method according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein the Low-E layer includes a silver layer.
(8) The method according to any one of (1) to (7) above, wherein the thickness of the Low-E layer is 1000 nm or less.
(9) The method according to any one of (1) to (8) above, wherein the step (B) includes a step of covering one entire surface of the Low-E glass plate with at least one protective sheet. ..
(10) Any one of (1) to (9) above, wherein the step (C) is an essential step, and in the step (C), the Low-E glass plate is washed with water. The method described in crab.

 (11) ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板の表面に保護シートを貼り付ける工程(貼付け工程);を含み、
 ここで、前記保護シートは、1.5m以上の幅を有し、
 (a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、Low-Eガラス板の保護方法。
 (12) 前記Low-Eガラス板から前記保護シートを除去する工程(除去工程)をさらに含み、
 前記貼付け工程および除去工程の間に、前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板の輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の工程を任意に含んでよい、上記(11)に記載の方法。
 (13) 前記Low-Eガラス板は1.5m以上の幅を有しており、
 前記貼付け工程は、少なくとも1枚の前記保護シートで前記Low-Eガラス板の一方の表面全体を覆う工程を含む、上記(11)または(12)に記載の方法。
(11) a step of attaching a protective sheet to the surface of a Low-E glass plate including a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate (attaching step);
Here, the protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more,
Low-E having a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more; How to protect glass plates.
(12) The method further includes a step (removal step) of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate,
Between the attaching step and the removing step, optionally, at least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling of the Low-E glass sheet to which the protective sheet is attached is included. The method according to (11) above.
(13) The Low-E glass plate has a width of 1.5 m or more,
The said pasting process is a method as described in said (11) or (12) including the process of covering one whole surface of the said Low-E glass plate with at least one said protective sheet.

 (14) 全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有する、上記(1)~(13)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (15) 前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域のヘイズ値は50以下である、上記(1)~(14)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (16) 前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域は、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が30%以上である、上記(1)~(15)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (17) 前記シート面の全体が、前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域である、上記(1)~(16)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (18) 前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域は着色領域である、上記(1)~(17)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (19) 前記シート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている、上記(1)~(18)のいずれかに記載の方法。
 (20) 青色または緑色に着色されている、上記(19)に記載の方法。
(14) The method according to any one of (1) to (13) above, which has a region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more.
(15) The method according to any one of (1) to (14) above, wherein the haze value of the region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more is 50 or less.
(16) The method according to any one of (1) to (15) above, wherein the region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more has a minimum transmittance of 30% or more at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm.
(17) The method according to any one of (1) to (16) above, wherein the entire sheet surface is a region that satisfies at least one of (a) and (b).
(18) The method according to any one of (1) to (17) above, wherein the area satisfying at least one of (a) and (b) is a colored area.
(19) The method according to any one of (1) to (18) above, wherein the sheet surface is colored almost uniformly.
(20) The method according to (19) above, which is colored blue or green.

 (21) (a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、保護シート。
 (22) 着色領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、保護シート。
 (23) 1.5m以上の幅を有する、上記(21)または(22)に記載の保護シート。
 (24) 全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有する、上記(21)~(23)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (25) 前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域のヘイズ値は50以下である、上記(21)~(24)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (26) 前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域は、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が30%以上である、上記(21)~(25)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (27) 前記シート面の全体が、前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域である、上記(21)~(26)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (28) 前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域は着色領域である、上記(21)~(27)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (29) シート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている、上記(21)~(28)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (30) 青色または緑色に着色されている、上記(21)~(29)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (31) 基材層と、該基材層に支持された粘着剤層と、を備え、
 前記基材層および前記粘着剤層のうち少なくとも一方が着色されている、上記(21)~(30)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (32) 前記基材層は、着色剤を含む樹脂フィルムからなる、上記(31)に記載の保護シート。
 (33) 前記粘着剤層は、アクリル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ポリエーテル系ポリマー、ゴム系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリアミド系ポリマーおよびフッ素系ポリマーからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種のポリマーを50重量%以上の割合で含む、上記(31)または(32)に記載の保護シート。
 (34) 3.3m以上の幅を有する、上記(21)~(33)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (35) Low-Eガラス板の保護に用いられる、上記(21)~(34)のいずれかに記載の保護シート。
 (36) ガラスユニットの製造方法であって、
 ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板を用意する工程と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板の前記Low-E層表面に、上記(21)~(35)のいずれかに記載の保護シートを貼り付ける工程と;
 前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを実施する任意の工程と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板から前記保護シートを除去する工程と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板を用いてガラスユニットを組み立てる工程と;
を含む、ガラスユニットの製造方法。
(21) At least a part of the sheet surface has a region satisfying at least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more. Protective sheet.
(22) A protective sheet having a colored region on at least a part of the sheet surface.
(23) The protective sheet according to (21) or (22), which has a width of 1.5 m or more.
(24) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (23), which has a region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more.
(25) The protective sheet according to any one of (21) to (24), wherein the haze value of the region having the total light transmittance of 3% or more is 50 or less.
(26) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (25), wherein the region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more has a minimum transmittance of 30% or more at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm.
(27) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (26) above, wherein the entire sheet surface is a region that satisfies at least one of (a) and (b).
(28) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (27) above, wherein the region satisfying at least one of (a) and (b) is a colored region.
(29) The protective sheet according to any one of (21) to (28) above, which is colored substantially uniformly over the entire sheet surface.
(30) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (29), which is colored blue or green.
(31) A base material layer, and an adhesive layer supported by the base material layer,
The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (30) above, wherein at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is colored.
(32) The protective sheet according to (31), wherein the base material layer is made of a resin film containing a colorant.
(33) The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least one selected from the group consisting of acrylic polymers, urethane polymers, polyester polymers, polyether polymers, rubber polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers, and fluorine polymers. The protective sheet according to (31) or (32) above, which contains the polymer of 50% by weight or more.
(34) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (33), which has a width of 3.3 m or more.
(35) The protective sheet according to any of (21) to (34), which is used for protecting a Low-E glass plate.
(36) A method for manufacturing a glass unit, comprising:
Preparing a Low-E glass plate comprising a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate;
Attaching the protective sheet according to any one of (21) to (35) to the surface of the Low-E layer of the Low-E glass plate;
An optional step of performing at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning, and handling on the Low-E glass plate to which the protective sheet is attached;
Removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate;
Assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate;
A method of manufacturing a glass unit, comprising:

 以下、本発明に関するいくつかの実施例を説明するが、本発明をかかる実施例に示すものに限定することを意図したものではない。なお、以下の説明において「部」および「%」は、特に断りがない限り重量基準である。 Hereinafter, some examples of the present invention will be described, but the present invention is not intended to be limited to those shown in the examples. In the following description, "part" and "%" are based on weight unless otherwise specified.

 <例1>
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート58部、n-ブチルメタクリレート40部およびアクリル酸2部からなるモノマー原料と、界面活性剤(第一工業製薬社製の商品名「アクアロンKH-1025」、EO付加モル数30以下のポリオキシエチレン-1-(アリルオキシメチル)アルキルエーテル硫酸アンモニウム)3部およびイオン交換水150部とを混合し、窒素ガスを導入しながら乳化機(ホモミキサー)で乳化させることにより、モノマー原料の乳化液を調製した。
 温度計、窒素ガス導入管、冷却器および攪拌装置を備えた反応容器に上記乳化液を入れ、窒素気流下で攪拌しながら液温50℃まで加熱した。これに重合開始剤として2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオンアミジン)ジヒドロクロライド(和光純薬工業社製、商品名「V-50」)0.03部を加え、液温を50℃付近に保って5時間重合反応を行った。得られた重合反応液にアンモニア水を加えてpHを8程度に調整した。このようにしてアクリル系ポリマーの水分散液を調製した。
 この水分散液に、該水分散液に含まれる不揮発分100部に対し、オキサゾリン系架橋剤(日本触媒社製の商品名「エポクロスWS-500」)2部を混合して、本例に係る粘着剤組成物を調製した。
 支持基材として、青色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ46μmのLDPEフィルム(青色LDPEフィルム)を、インフレーション成形により温度や速度等の条件を調整して作製した。
 上記青色LDPEフィルムの片面にコロナ放電処理が施し、そのコロナ処理面(第一面)に、上記で用意した粘着剤組成物を、乾燥後の厚さが6μmとなるようにバーコーターで塗布した。これを70℃で2分間乾燥した後、50℃で1日間エージングして、青色LDPEフィルムからなる基材層の片面にアクリル系粘着剤層を有する片面接着性粘着シートを作製した。このようにして得た粘着シートを本例に係る保護シートとした。
<Example 1>
Monomer raw material consisting of 58 parts of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 40 parts of n-butyl methacrylate and 2 parts of acrylic acid, and a surfactant (trade name "Aqualon KH-1025" manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd., EO addition mole number 30 or less) 3 parts of polyoxyethylene-1-(allyloxymethyl)alkyl ether ammonium sulfate) and 150 parts of ion-exchanged water are mixed and emulsified with an emulsifying machine (homomixer) while introducing nitrogen gas to obtain a monomer raw material. An emulsion was prepared.
The above emulsified liquid was placed in a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a condenser and a stirrer, and heated to a liquid temperature of 50°C while stirring under a nitrogen stream. To this, 0.03 part of 2,2′-azobis(2-methylpropionamidine)dihydrochloride (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., trade name “V-50”) was added as a polymerization initiator, and the liquid temperature was around 50° C. The polymerization reaction was carried out for 5 hours. Ammonia water was added to the obtained polymerization reaction solution to adjust the pH to about 8. Thus, an aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer was prepared.
According to this example, 2 parts of an oxazoline-based cross-linking agent (trade name "Epocros WS-500" manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) was mixed with 100 parts of a non-volatile component contained in the aqueous dispersion. An adhesive composition was prepared.
As a supporting substrate, an LDPE film having a thickness of 46 μm (blue LDPE film) in which a blue pigment was kneaded was prepared by inflation molding under the conditions such as temperature and speed.
Corona discharge treatment was applied to one surface of the blue LDPE film, and the adhesive composition prepared above was applied to the corona-treated surface (first surface) with a bar coater so that the thickness after drying was 6 μm. .. This was dried at 70° C. for 2 minutes and then aged at 50° C. for 1 day to prepare a single-sided adhesive pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on one surface of a base layer made of a blue LDPE film. The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet thus obtained was used as the protective sheet according to this example.

 <例2>
 緑色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ46μmのLDPEフィルムを例1と同様の方法により作製し、これを支持基材として使用した他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 2>
A 46 μm-thick LDPE film in which a green pigment was kneaded was produced by the same method as in Example 1, and the protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that this was used as a supporting substrate.

 <例3>
 支持基材として、顔料を含まない厚さ55μmのLDPEフィルムを、インフレーション成形により温度や速度等の条件を調整して作製し、これを支持基材として使用した。その他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 3>
As a supporting base material, a 55 μm-thick LDPE film containing no pigment was produced by adjusting the conditions such as temperature and speed by inflation molding and used as a supporting base material. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.

 <例4>
 青色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ55μmのLDPEフィルムを例3と同様の方法により作製し、これを支持基材として使用した他は例3と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 4>
A protective film according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3, except that an LDPE film having a thickness of 55 μm, in which a blue pigment was kneaded, was produced in the same manner as in Example 3, and this was used as a supporting base material.

 <例5>
 白色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ55μmのLDPEフィルムを例3と同様の方法により作製し、これを支持基材として使用した他は例3と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 5>
A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that an LDPE film having a thickness of 55 μm, in which a white pigment was kneaded, was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3, and this was used as a supporting substrate.

 <例6>
 顔料を含まない厚さ50μmのPE/PPブレンドフィルム(商品名「トレテックCF470」、東レフィルム加工社製)を支持基材として使用した。その他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 6>
A 50 μm-thick PE/PP blend film (trade name “Tretec CF470”, manufactured by Toray Film Co., Ltd.) containing no pigment was used as a supporting substrate. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.

 <例7>
 青色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ50μmのPE/PPブレンドフィルム(商品名「トレテックCF470」、東レフィルム加工社製)を支持基材として使用した。その他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 7>
A 50 μm thick PE/PP blend film (trade name “Tretec CF470”, manufactured by Toray Film Co., Ltd.) in which a blue pigment was kneaded was used as a supporting substrate. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.

 <例8>
 支持基材として、白色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ38μmのPETフィルム(商品名「ダイヤホイルW100」、三菱ケミカル社製)を使用した。その他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 8>
A 38 μm-thick PET film (trade name “Diafoil W100”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) in which a white pigment was kneaded was used as a supporting substrate. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.

 <例9>
 支持基材として、厚さ60μmの透明LDPEフィルムを、インフレーション成形により温度や速度等の条件を調整して作製した。これを支持基材として使用した他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 9>
As a supporting base material, a transparent LDPE film having a thickness of 60 μm was produced by inflation molding under controlled conditions such as temperature and speed. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that this was used as a supporting substrate.

 <例10>
 支持基材として、黒色顔料を練り込んだ厚さ25μmのPETフィルム(商品名「ダイヤホイルB100」、三菱ケミカル社製)を使用した。その他は例1と同様にして本例に係る保護シートを得た。
<Example 10>
As the supporting base material, a PET film (trade name “Diafoil B100”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.) having a thickness of 25 μm in which a black pigment was kneaded was used. A protective sheet according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.

 [視認性評価]
 幅1500mm、長さ1000mmのLow-Eガラス板を用意し、保護シートを貼り合わせた。蛍光灯から3m離れた位置に保護シート付きLow-Eガラス板を立てて、当該Low-Eガラス板の保護シート貼付け面側から1m離れた位置にてLow-Eガラス板の保護シート貼付け面を目視で観察し、保護シートの有無を確認できるか否かを評価した。Low-Eガラス板上の保護シートを視認できた場合を「○」、視認できなかった場合を「×」と判定した。
[Visibility evaluation]
A Low-E glass plate having a width of 1500 mm and a length of 1000 mm was prepared and a protective sheet was attached thereto. Place the Low-E glass plate with a protective sheet upright at a position 3 m away from the fluorescent lamp, and place the protective sheet affixing surface of the Low-E glass plate at a position 1 m away from the protective sheet affixing surface side of the Low-E glass plate. It was visually observed to evaluate whether the presence or absence of the protective sheet can be confirmed. The case where the protective sheet on the Low-E glass plate was visible was judged as "○", and the case where it was not visible was judged as "x".

 [Low-Eガラス板の欠陥検査性]
 長さ3~5cm程度の筋状欠陥(3ヵ所)、直径1~5mmのチッピング傷(3ヵ所)を表面に有する幅1500mm、長さ1000mmのLow-Eガラス板を用意し、その欠陥形成面に保護シートを貼り合わせた。蛍光灯から3m離れた位置に保護シート付きLow-Eガラス板を立てて、当該Low-Eガラス板の保護シート貼付け面側から1m離れた位置にてLow-Eガラス板の保護シート貼付け面を目視で観察し、保護シート越しにLow-Eガラス板の欠陥検査性を下記の基準で評価した。
 (評価基準)
  4点:筋状欠陥およびチッピング傷をすべて視認できた。
  3点:筋状欠陥およびチッピング傷を概ね視認できた。
  2点:筋状欠陥およびチッピング傷のいずれかを視認できた。
  1点:筋状欠陥およびチッピング傷を視認できなかった。
[Low-E glass plate defect inspection]
Prepare a Low-E glass plate with a width of 1500 mm and a length of 1000 mm, which has streaky defects with a length of 3 to 5 cm (3 places) and chipping scratches with a diameter of 1 to 5 mm (3 places) on the surface. A protective sheet was attached to. Place a Low-E glass plate with a protective sheet at a position 3 m away from the fluorescent lamp, and place the protective sheet affixing surface of the Low-E glass plate at a position 1 m away from the protective sheet affixing surface side of the Low-E glass plate. It was visually observed, and the defect inspection property of the Low-E glass plate was evaluated through the protective sheet according to the following criteria.
(Evaluation criteria)
4 points: All streak defects and chipping scratches were visible.
3 points: Stripe defects and chipping scratches were almost visible.
2 points: Either streak defects or chipping scratches were visually recognized.
1 point: No streak defects and chipping scratches were visible.

 各例の保護シートについての評価結果を表1に示す。表1には、各例の概要(基材種、色、全光線透過率、可視光領域(波長450~800nm)の最低透過率、ヘイズ値)もあわせて示す。 Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the protective sheet of each example. Table 1 also shows an outline of each example (base material type, color, total light transmittance, minimum transmittance in visible light region (wavelength 450 to 800 nm), haze value).

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002

 表1に示されるように、例1~8は良好な視認性を有し、ガラス板上で判別しやすいものであった。これらの例に係る保護シートは、(a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する。一方、上記(a)および(b)を満足しない例9では良好な視認性が得られなかった。この結果から、上記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する保護シートは、Low-Eガラス板上で判別しやすいことがわかる。
 また、例1~8の保護シートは、所定値以上の全光線透過率を有しており、Low-Eガラス板の欠陥検査が可能であった。これに対し、全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有しない例10の保護シートは、Low-Eガラス板の欠陥検査性の評価結果がよくなく、保護シート越しのLow-Eガラス板検査がしにくいものであった。この結果から、全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有する保護シートによると、保護シート越しのLow-Eガラス板検査が可能であることがわかる。その効果は、1.5m以上の幅を有する構成でよりよく発揮され得る。
As shown in Table 1, Examples 1 to 8 had good visibility and were easy to discriminate on the glass plate. In the protective sheet according to these examples, a region which satisfies at least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more; Have at least a portion. On the other hand, in Example 9 which does not satisfy the above (a) and (b), good visibility was not obtained. From this result, it can be seen that the protective sheet having the region satisfying at least one of the above (a) and (b) on at least a part of the sheet surface is easy to discriminate on the Low-E glass plate.
Further, the protective sheets of Examples 1 to 8 had a total light transmittance of not less than the predetermined value, and it was possible to inspect the Low-E glass plate for defects. On the other hand, the protective sheet of Example 10 which does not have the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more does not have a good evaluation result of the defect inspection property of the Low-E glass plate, and the Low-E glass plate through the protective sheet is poor. The inspection was difficult. From this result, it can be seen that a protective sheet having a region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more enables a Low-E glass plate inspection through the protective sheet. The effect can be better exhibited in a structure having a width of 1.5 m or more.

 以上、本発明の具体例を詳細に説明したが、これらは例示にすぎず、請求の範囲を限定するものではない。請求の範囲に記載の技術には、以上に例示した具体例を様々に変形、変更したものが含まれる。 The specific examples of the present invention have been described in detail above, but these are merely examples and do not limit the scope of the claims. The technology described in the claims includes various modifications and changes of the specific examples illustrated above.

  1 :基材層
  1A:一方の面
  1B:他方の面
  2 :粘着剤層
  2A:接着面
 10 :保護シート
100 :Low-Eガラス板
110 :ガラス基板
120 :Low-E層
200 :保護シート
300 :ガラスユニット
320 :他のガラス板
340 :スペーサ
1: Base material layer 1A: One surface 1B: Other surface 2: Adhesive layer 2A: Adhesive surface 10: Protective sheet 100: Low-E glass plate 110: Glass substrate 120: Low-E layer 200: Protective sheet 300 : Glass unit 320: Other glass plate 340: Spacer

Claims (31)

 1.5m以上の幅を有し、
 全光線透過率が3%以上である領域を有し、かつ
 (a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、Low-Eガラス板用保護シート。
With a width of 1.5m or more,
At least one of (a) the minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 90% or less; and (b) the haze value is 10 or more. A low-E glass sheet protective sheet having a satisfying area on at least a part of the sheet surface.
 前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域のヘイズ値は50以下である、請求項1に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to claim 1, wherein the haze value of the region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more is 50 or less.  前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域は、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が30%以上である、請求項1または2に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the region having a total light transmittance of 3% or more has a minimum transmittance of 30% or more at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm.  前記シート面の全体が、前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域である、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the entire sheet surface is an area that satisfies at least one of (a) and (b).  前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域は着色領域である、請求項1~4のいずれか一項に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the area satisfying at least one of (a) and (b) is a colored area.  前記シート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている、請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 5, which is colored substantially uniformly over the entire surface of the sheet.  青色または緑色に着色されている、請求項1~6のいずれか一項に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 6, which is colored blue or green.  基材層と、該基材層に支持された粘着剤層と、を備え、
 前記基材層および前記粘着剤層のうち少なくとも一方が着色されている、請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載の保護シート。
A base material layer and an adhesive layer supported by the base material layer,
The protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein at least one of the base material layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is colored.
 前記基材層は、着色剤を含む樹脂フィルムからなる、請求項8に記載の保護シート。 The protective sheet according to claim 8, wherein the base material layer is made of a resin film containing a colorant.  1.5m以上の幅を有し、
 (a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、Low-Eガラス板用保護シート。
With a width of 1.5m or more,
Low-E having a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more; Protective sheet for glass plate.
 3.3m以上の幅を有する、請求項1~10のいずれか一項に記載の保護シート。 Protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 10, having a width of 3.3 m or more.  前記粘着剤層は、アクリル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ポリエーテル系ポリマー、ゴム系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリアミド系ポリマーおよびフッ素系ポリマーからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種のポリマーを50重量%以上の割合で含む、請求項8または9に記載の保護シート。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least one polymer selected from the group consisting of acrylic polymers, urethane polymers, polyester polymers, polyether polymers, rubber polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers and fluorine polymers. The protective sheet according to claim 8 or 9, which contains 50% by weight or more.  ガラスユニットの製造方法であって、
 ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板を用意する工程と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板の前記Low-E層表面に、請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の保護シートを貼り付ける工程と;
 前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを実施する任意の工程と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板から前記保護シートを除去する工程と;
 前記Low-Eガラス板を用いてガラスユニットを組み立てる工程と;
を含む、ガラスユニットの製造方法。
A method of manufacturing a glass unit,
Preparing a Low-E glass plate comprising a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate;
A step of sticking the protective sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 12 on the surface of the low-E layer of the low-E glass plate;
An optional step of performing at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning, and handling on the Low-E glass plate to which the protective sheet is attached;
Removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate;
Assembling a glass unit using the Low-E glass plate;
A method of manufacturing a glass unit, comprising:
 前記保護シートを貼り付ける工程と前記保護シートを除去する工程との間に前記Low-Eガラス板の検査工程を含む、請求項13に記載の方法。 The method according to claim 13, further comprising a step of inspecting the Low-E glass plate between the step of attaching the protective sheet and the step of removing the protective sheet.  前記Low-Eガラス板は2m以上の幅を有する、請求項13または14に記載の方法。 The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the Low-E glass plate has a width of 2 m or more.  前記Low-Eガラス板は2.6m超の幅を有する、請求項13または14に記載の方法。 The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the Low-E glass plate has a width of more than 2.6 m.  前記Low-Eガラス板は3.3m以上の幅を有する、請求項13または14に記載の方法。 The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the Low-E glass plate has a width of 3.3 m or more.  前記Low-E層は金属層を含む、請求項13~17のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 17, wherein the Low-E layer includes a metal layer.  前記Low-E層は銀層を含む、請求項13~18のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 18, wherein the Low-E layer includes a silver layer.  前記Low-E層の厚さは1000nm以下である、請求項13~19のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, wherein the thickness of the Low-E layer is 1000 nm or less.  前記保護シートを貼り付ける工程は、少なくとも1枚の前記保護シートで前記Low-Eガラス板の一方の表面全体を覆う工程を含む、請求項13~20のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 20, wherein the step of attaching the protective sheet includes a step of covering one entire surface of the Low-E glass plate with at least one protective sheet.  前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板につき、輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを実施する任意の工程は必須の工程であり、該工程において、前記Low-Eガラス板に対して水を用いた洗浄を実施する、請求項13~21のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 An optional step of carrying out at least one selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning, and handling is an essential step for the Low-E glass plate having the protective sheet attached, The method according to any one of claims 13 to 21, wherein the low-E glass plate is washed with water in the process (1).  ガラス基板と、該ガラス基板上に積層されたLow-E層とを備えるLow-Eガラス板の表面に保護シートを貼り付ける工程(貼付け工程);を含み、
 ここで、前記保護シートは、1.5m以上の幅を有し、
 (a)波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が90%以下である;および(b)ヘイズ値が10以上である;の少なくとも一方を満足する領域をシート面の少なくとも一部に有する、Low-Eガラス板の保護方法。
A step of attaching a protective sheet to the surface of a Low-E glass plate including a glass substrate and a Low-E layer laminated on the glass substrate (attaching step);
Here, the protective sheet has a width of 1.5 m or more,
Low-E having a region satisfying at least one of (a) a minimum transmittance of 90% or less at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm; and (b) a haze value of 10 or more; How to protect glass plates.
 前記Low-Eガラス板から前記保護シートを除去する工程(除去工程)をさらに含み、
 前記貼付け工程および除去工程の間に、前記保護シートが貼り付けられた前記Low-Eガラス板の輸送、保管、加工、洗浄およびハンドリングからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の工程を任意に含んでよい、請求項23に記載の方法。
Further comprising a step (removal step) of removing the protective sheet from the Low-E glass plate,
Between the attaching step and the removing step, optionally, at least one step selected from the group consisting of transportation, storage, processing, cleaning and handling of the Low-E glass sheet to which the protective sheet is attached is included. 24. The method of claim 23, which may be.
 前記Low-Eガラス板は1.5m以上の幅を有しており、
 前記貼付け工程は、少なくとも1枚の前記保護シートで前記Low-Eガラス板の一方の表面全体を覆う工程を含む、請求項23または24に記載の方法。
The Low-E glass plate has a width of 1.5 m or more,
The method according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the attaching step includes a step of covering one entire surface of the Low-E glass plate with at least one protective sheet.
 前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域のヘイズ値は50以下である、請求項13~25のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 25, wherein a haze value of a region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more is 50 or less.  前記全光線透過率が3%以上である領域は、波長450~800nmにおける最低透過率が30%以上である、請求項13~26のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 26, wherein a minimum transmittance at a wavelength of 450 to 800 nm is 30% or more in a region where the total light transmittance is 3% or more.  前記シート面の全体が、前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域である、請求項13~27のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 27, wherein the entire sheet surface is a region that satisfies at least one of (a) and (b).  前記(a)および(b)の少なくとも一方を満足する領域は着色領域である、請求項28に記載の方法。 29. The method according to claim 28, wherein the area satisfying at least one of (a) and (b) is a colored area.  前記シート面の全体にわたってほぼ均一に着色されている、請求項13~29のいずれか一項に記載の方法。 The method according to any one of claims 13 to 29, wherein the entire surface of the sheet is colored substantially uniformly.  前記保護シートは青色または緑色に着色されている、請求項30に記載の方法。 The method according to claim 30, wherein the protective sheet is colored blue or green.
PCT/JP2020/004337 2019-02-21 2020-02-05 Protection sheet and method for manufacturing glass unit Ceased WO2020170820A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019029737A JP2020132233A (en) 2019-02-21 2019-02-21 Manufacturing method of protective sheet and glass unit
JP2019-029737 2019-02-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020170820A1 true WO2020170820A1 (en) 2020-08-27

Family

ID=72143905

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/004337 Ceased WO2020170820A1 (en) 2019-02-21 2020-02-05 Protection sheet and method for manufacturing glass unit

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2020132233A (en)
WO (1) WO2020170820A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2023126994A (en) 2020-08-04 2023-09-13 シャープ株式会社 Terminal device, base station device, method, and integrated circuit
JP2022106544A (en) * 2021-01-07 2022-07-20 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Sheet molding compound product, and method for manufacturing sheet molding compound product
TW202413570A (en) * 2022-09-06 2024-04-01 日商拓自達電線股份有限公司 Double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007254619A (en) * 2006-03-24 2007-10-04 Panac Co Ltd Re-releasable colored adhesive film
US20130019637A1 (en) * 2007-06-06 2013-01-24 Guardian Industries Corp. Method of making coated glass article, and intermediate product used in same
JP2013241614A (en) * 2006-12-18 2013-12-05 Nitto Denko Corp Adhesive sheet
JP2016080993A (en) * 2014-10-21 2016-05-16 パナック株式会社 Protective film for optical member, and inspection method for optical member
WO2016139318A1 (en) * 2015-03-04 2016-09-09 Agc Glass Europe Temporary surface protective adhesive layer
JP2017008172A (en) * 2015-06-19 2017-01-12 日東電工株式会社 Surface protective film
JP2018184003A (en) * 2018-06-27 2018-11-22 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Method for producing laminated polyester film

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007254619A (en) * 2006-03-24 2007-10-04 Panac Co Ltd Re-releasable colored adhesive film
JP2013241614A (en) * 2006-12-18 2013-12-05 Nitto Denko Corp Adhesive sheet
US20130019637A1 (en) * 2007-06-06 2013-01-24 Guardian Industries Corp. Method of making coated glass article, and intermediate product used in same
JP2016080993A (en) * 2014-10-21 2016-05-16 パナック株式会社 Protective film for optical member, and inspection method for optical member
WO2016139318A1 (en) * 2015-03-04 2016-09-09 Agc Glass Europe Temporary surface protective adhesive layer
JP2017008172A (en) * 2015-06-19 2017-01-12 日東電工株式会社 Surface protective film
JP2018184003A (en) * 2018-06-27 2018-11-22 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Method for producing laminated polyester film

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2020132233A (en) 2020-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6856374B2 (en) Surface protection sheet
JP2020193346A (en) Adhesive sheet and method for peeling adhesive sheet
CN111527168B (en) Method for producing glass unit and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
US20170283661A1 (en) Surface protection sheet
CN105602463A (en) Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
US10954414B2 (en) Method for producing glass unit and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
CN111511860B (en) Manufacturing method of glass unit, pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and use of corrosion inhibitor
US12291660B2 (en) Method for preparing pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, method for producing protective sheet and method for producing glass unit
WO2020170820A1 (en) Protection sheet and method for manufacturing glass unit
CN114051490A (en) Method for protecting Low-E glass plate, method for producing glass unit, laminate, and protective sheet for Low-E glass plate
US12319854B2 (en) Protective sheet
CN114040844A (en) Low-E glass plate, protective sheet for Low-E glass plate, and use thereof
US12358263B2 (en) Method for protecting low-E glass plate, method for producing glass unit, laminate and protective sheet for low-E glass plate
WO2020137954A1 (en) Protective sheet
WO2020137953A1 (en) Method for preparing adhesive agent composition, method for manufacturing protective sheet, and method for manufacturing glass unit
JP2021004299A (en) Protective sheet
WO2025084280A1 (en) Surface protection sheet

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20759773

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20759773

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1